Master Problem Package Physics

Page # 67
STRAIGHT OBJECTIVE TYPE
a a  t2
Q.1 The dimensions of in the equation P = where P is pressure, x is distance and t is time, are:
b bx
(A) [M2L T–3] (B) [MT–2] (C) [LT–3] (D) [ML3T–1]
Q.2 If the mass, time and work are taken as fundamental physical quantities then dimensional formula of
length
 1 1   1 1

2 1 2
 
2 1
(A) M T W  (B) M T W  (C) M 1 T 2 W
2

  (D) None of these
Q.3 Consider a screw gauge without any zero error. What will be the final reading corresponding to the final
state as shown? It is given that the circular head translates P msd in N rotations. One msd is equal to
1mm.
(A) (P/N) (2 + 45/100) mm (B) (N/P) (2+45/N)mm

 45 P 
(C) P (2/N + 45/100)mm (D)  2    mm
 100 N 
Q.4 The diagram shows part of the vernier scale on a pair of calipers.
Which reading is correct ?

(A) 2.74 cm (B) 3.10 cm (C) 3.26 cm (D) 3.64 cm
Q.5 In a vernier callipers having 10 Vsd, the vernier constant is 0.1 mm. When the jaws are closed, zero of
vernier lies to the left of zero of main and 7th Vsd coincides with a main scale division. When a cylinder
is placed between the jaws the main scale reading was 7.7 cm and vernier scale read 8 divisions. What
is the diameter of the cylinder ?
(A) 78.1 mm (B) 77.5 mm (C) 77.8 mm (D) 78.5 mm
Q.6 In a meter bridge experiment the resistance of resistance box is 16, which is inserted in right gap.The
null point is obtained at 36cm from the left end. The least count of meter scale is 1mm. What is the value
of unknown resistance? (Error = L.C. or L.C./2)
5 5 5 128 1
(A) 9 ±  (B) 9 ±  (C) 9   (D)  
128 256 512 9 2560
Page # 68
Q.7 In an optical bench experiment to measure the focal length of a concave mirror, random error in focal
length will be
(A) minimum when u = f and maximum when u = 
(B) minimum when u =  and maximum when u = f
(C) minimum when u = 0 and maximum when u = 2f
(D) minimum when u = 2f and maximum when u = 0
  2 2 t 
Q.8 The acceleration of a particle is given by a   2î  6 tˆj  cos k̂  ms–2
 9 3 
 
At t = 0, r = 0 and v  ( 2î  ĵ) ms–1. The position vector at t = 2 s is
      
(A) 8î  10 ˆj  k̂ m (B) 8î  10 ĵ  3k̂ m (C) 3î  8ˆj  10 k̂ m (D) 10 î  3ˆj  8k̂ m 
Q.9 A projectile is to be projected towards enemy territory at the same horizontal level. The initial velocity of
the projectile is known to be 100 ± 1 m/s. Initial angle of the projectile is known to be projected
45°  1°. What is the possible range of the projectile?
(A) 990 m  R  1010 m (B) 980 m  R  1020 m
(C) 970 m  R  1030 m (D) 930 m  R  970 m
Q.10 In the figure shown, the speed of the truck is v to the right. The speed with which the block is moving up
at  = 60° is:
v

(A) v (B) 2 v 3 (C) 3v 4 (D) none
Q.11 A bird flies for 4 sec from t = 0 with a velocity of |t – 2| m/s in a straight line, where t = time in seconds.
It covers a distance of
(A) 2 m (B) 4 m (C) 6 m (D) 8 m
Q.12 The displacement-time graph of a moving particle with constant acceleration is shown in the figure. The
velocity-time graph is best given by
(A) (B) (C) (D)

Page # 69
Q.13 An aeroplane moves along horizontal line AB as shown in figure. Choose correct option about wind
velocity. B
A
(A) wind may not be moving at all (B) wind may be moving in east direction
(C) wind may be moving in north direction (D) wind may be moving in west direction
Q.14 A gun is mounted on a plateau 960 m away from its edge as shown. Height of plateau is 960 m The gun
can fire shells with a velocity of 100 m/s at any angle. Of the following choices, what is the minimum
distance OP (= x) from the edge of plateau where the shell of gun can reach?
(A) 480 m (B) 720 m (C) 360 m (D) none
Q.15 Two towns A and B are connected by a regular bus service with a bus leaving in either direction every
T minutes. A man cycling with speed of 20km/h in the direction A to B, notices that a bus goes past him
every t1 = 18 minutes in the direction of motion, and every t2 = 6 minutes in the opposite direction. What
is the period T of the bus service? Assume that velocity of cyclist is less than velocity of bus
(A) 4.5 minutes (B) 24 minutes (C) 9 minutes (D) 12 minutes
Q.16 Three particles start from origin at the same time with a velocity 2ms–1 along positive x-axis, the second
with a velocity 6ms–1 along negative y-axis. Find the velocity of the third particle along x = y line so that
the three particles may always lie in a straight line
(A)  3 3 (B) 3 2 (C)  3 2 (D) 2 2
Q.17 Two boats were going down stream with different velocities. When one overtook the other a plastic
ball was dropped from one of the boats. Some time later both boats turned back simultaneously & went at
the same speeds as before (relative to the water) towards the spot where the ball had been dropped.
Which boat will reach the ball first?
(A) the boat which has greater velocity (relative to water)
(B) the boat which has lesser velocity (relative to water)
(C) both will reach the ball simultaneously
(D) cannot be decided unless we know the actual values of the velocities and the time after which they turned around.
Q.18 In the arrangement shown in figure. The ratio of velocity V1 & V2

of block (1) & (2) is
V1 V1 sin 
(A) V = 2 cot (B) V =
2 2 2
V1
(C) V = 2sin (D) none
2
Page # 70
Q.19 A conveyer belt of length l is moving with velocity v. A block of mass m is pushed against the motion of
conveyer belt with velocity v0 form end B. Co-efficient of friction between block and belt is . The value
of v0 so that the amount of heat liberated as a result of retardation of the block by conveyer belt is
maximum is v v
0
B A
(A) gl (B) 2gl (C) 2 gl (D) 3gl
Q.20 Two block M1 and M2 rest upon each other on an inclined plane. Coefficient of friction between surfaces
are shown. If the angle  is slowly increased, and M1 < M2 then M1
2=0.2
(A) block A slips first A M2
(B) block B slips first B
2=0.2
(C) both slip simultaneously

(D) both remain at rest
Q.21 A bob B of mass 1kg is suspended form the ceiling of a toy train as shown in the figure. The train
oscillates simple harmonically in horizontal direction with angular frequency =5rad/s and amplitude
a = 0.1m. What is the ratio of maximum and minimum tensions in the string AB during the motion
(g = 10 ms–2 & tan 37°= 3/4 )
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 1
Q.22 A trolley is accelerating down an incline of angle  with acceleration g sin. Which of the following is
correct. ( is the angle made by the string with vertical).
(A)  =  (B)  = 00
(C) Tension in the string, T = mg (D) Tension in the string, T = mg sec 
Q.23 A railroad car is moving in the +x direction on a straight and level track. A person in the railroad car
throws a ball. The ball follows trajectory shown, relative to the railroad car. From an inspection of the
trajectory, what can be concluded about the motion of railroad car? Treat y-axis along vertical.
(A) it is moving at a constant speed (B) it is speeding up

(C) it is slowing down (D) None of the above can be concluded
Page # 71
R
Q.24 A circular rope of weight W and radius r = is resting on a smooth sphere of radius R. The tension in
2
rope is
Rope
r
R
(A) W /(  6 ) (B) W /(  12 ) (C) W /(  10 ) (D) None of these
Q.25 The rear side of a truck is open and a box of mass 20kg is placed on the truck 4 meters away from the
open end. Coefficent of friction between truck and block is 0.15. The truck starts from rest with an
acceleration of 2m/sec2 on a straight road. The box will fall off the truck when truck is at a distance from
the starting point equal to: (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 4 metres (B) 8 metres (C) 16 metres (D) 32 metres
Q.26 A cart is sliding on a smooth incline. An observer (O1) is fixed to cart and another observer fixed on
ground (O2) observes , a loose bolt that is released from ceiling. At the instant of release cart has
velocity v0 as seen by O2. Mark the correct option. Loose bolt
(O1)
(A) Trajectory of bolt for O1 is parabola.
(B) Trajectory of bolt for O2 is straight line inclined at an v0
angle  with vertical. (O2)

(C) Trajectory of bolt for O2 is a straight line perpendicular
to ceiling of cart.
(D) Trajectory of bolt for O1 is straight line.
Q.27 Two blocks m1 and m2 are connected with a compressed spring and placed on a smooth horizontal
surface as shown in figure. Force constant of spring is k. Under the influence of forces F1 and F2, at an
instant blocks move with common acceleration a0. At that instant force F2 is suddenly withdrawn. Mark
correct option. a0
F1 F1 F2
(A) Instantaneous acceleration of m1 is a0 – m m1 m2
1
F2
(B) Instantaneous acceleration of m2 is a0 + m
2
(C) Instantaneous acceleration of m1 is a1 = 0
(D) Instantaneous acceleration of m2 is a2 = 0
Q.28 The conveyor belt is moving at 4 m/s. The coefficient of static friciton between the conveyor belt and the
10 kg package B is s = 0.2. Determine the shortest time in which the belt can be stopped so that the
package does not slide on the belt. B
(A) 1s (B) 2s (C) 4s (D) 8s

Page # 72
9 2
Q.29 The potential energy of a body is given by U = 2 – . The position at which it’s speed can be
x x
maximum is.
(A) x = + 3 m (B) x = – 3 m (C) x = 9 m (D) x = – 9 m
Q.30 The potential energy of a 1 kg particle free to move along the x-axis is given by
 x4 x2 
V(x) =  4  2  J
 
The total mechanical energy of the particle is 2 J. Then , the maximum speed ( in m/s) is
3 9
(A) (B) 3 2 (C) (D) 2
2 2
Q.31 In the figure shown the spring constant is K. The mass of the upper disc is m and
that of the lower disc is 3m. The upper block is depressed down from its equilibrium
position by a distance  =5mg/K and released at t=0. Find the velocity of ‘m’ when
normal reaction on 3m is mg.
(A) zero (B) g[m/K ] 1/2 (C) 2g[m/K]1/2 (D) 4g[m/K]1/2
Q.32 Two atoms interact with each other according to the following force F and potential energy V diagrams.
What is their equilibrium separation?
(A) the separation u which is equal to y (B) the separation u which is equal to z
(C) the separation w which is equal to y (D) the separation w which is equal to z
Q.33 Two springs of force constant 100 N/m and 150 N/m are in series as shown. The block is pulled by a
distance of 2.5 cm to the right from equilibrium position. What is the ratio of work done by the spring
at left to the work done by the spring at right. :
150 N/m
100 N/m
3 2
(A) (B) (C) 0.2 (D) None of these
2 3
B
Q.34 In the figure shown, there is a smooth tube of radius 'R', fixed in the vertical m
plane. A ball 'B' of mass 'm' is released from the top of the tube. B slides down
due to gravity and compresses the spring. The end 'C' of the spring is fixed and O
the end A is free. Initially the line OA makes an angle of 60° with OC and finally
A
it makes an angle of 30° after compression. Find the spring constant of the
k
spring. C
Fix smooth tube
12mg(2  3 ) 36mg(2  3 ) 18mg
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
2R 2 R 2 R
Page # 73
Q.35 Figure shows force vectors at different points in space for two forces.
(a) (b)
In figure (a) the force function is F1  F0 ĵ , where F0 is a constant. The force in figure (b) is given by
x
F2  F0   ĵ , where origin is taken at left corner of the box, a is width of the each square box. Mark the
a
correct options.
(A) Both forces F1 and F2 are conservative forces
(B) Both forces F1 and F2 are nonconservative forces
(C) F1 is conservative F2 is non conservative
(D) F1 is nonconservative F2 is conservative
Q.36 A car speeds up with constant magnitude of tangential acceleration in a circular path moving in anticlockwise
direction. Which of the following figure represents acceleration of the car.
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.37 A skier plans to ski a smooth fixed hemisphere of radius R. He starts from rest from a curved smooth
surface of height (R/4). The angle  at which he leaves the hemisphere is
(A) cos–1 (2/3) (B) cos–1 (5/ 3 )
(C) cos–1 (5/6) (D) cos–1 (5/ 2 3 )
Q.38 A small bead of mass m can moves on a smooth circular wire (radius R) under the action of a force
Km
F = 2 directed (r = position of bead from P & K = constant) towards a point P with in the circle at
r
R
a distance from the centre. What should be the minimum velocity of bead at the point of the wire
2
nearest the centre of force (P) so that bead will complete the circle
3K 8K 6K
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
R 3R R
Page # 74
Q.39 A small ball of mass m is attached to a piece of light string and released from rest at an angle 0 = 37°
from the vertical as shown. Which of the graphs best represents the tension in the string as a function of
the angle  (also relative to the vertical)?
(A) FT
0 = 37°
(B)
FT =mg
(C)
m (D)

–37° 0 37°
Q.40 A particle of mass m is projected at an angle of 60° with a velocity of 20 m/s relative to the ground from
a plank of same mass m which is placed on smooth surface. Initially plank was at rest. The minimum
length of the plank for which the ball will fall on the plank itself is (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 40 3 m (B) 20 3 m (C) 10 3 m (D) 60 3 m
Q.41 Five identical balls each of mass m and radius r are strung like beads at random and at rest along a
smooth, rigid horizontal thin rod of length L, mounted between immovable supports. Assume 10r < L
and that the collision between balls or between balls and supports are elastic. If one ball is struck
horizontally so as to acquire a speed v, the average force felt by the support is
5mv 2 mv 2
(A) (B)
L – 5r L – 10r
5mv 2 mv 2
(C) (D)
L – 10r L – 5r
Q.42 A block of mass M is tied to one end of a massless rope. The other end of the rope is in the hands of a
man of mass 2M as shown in the figure. The block and the man are resting on a rough plank of mass M
as shown in the figure. The whole system is resting on a smooth horizontal surface. The man pulls the
rope. Pulley is massless and frictionless. What is the displacement of the plank when the block meets the
pulley.(Man does not leave his position on plank during the pull)
(A) 0.5 m (B) 1m (C) zero (D) 2/3 m

Page # 75
L
Q.43 Figure shows a square lamina with a disc of radius removed from it which is now placed symmetrically
2
over upper right quarter. What is location of centre of mass of system relative to origin shown in figure.
2L
Removed part
placed on
remaining sheet
2L
origin
removed
part
L L L L
(A) ( î  ĵ) (B) ( î  ĵ) (C) ( î  ĵ) (D) ( î  ĵ)
12 8 4 16
Q.44 In the figure shown the cart of mass 6 m is intially at rest. A particle of mass m is attached to the end of
the light rod which can rotate freely about A. If the rod is released from rest in a horizontal position
shown, determine the velocity vrel of the particle with respect to the cart when the rod is vertical. Assume
frictionless surface.
6m A
 m
7 7 14 8
(A) g (B) g (C) g (D) g
3 6 3 3
Q.45 Suppose a golf ball is hurled at a heavy bowling ball initially at rest and bounces elastically from the
bowling ball. After the collision.
(A) the golf ball has the greater momentum and the greater kinetic energy
(B) the bowling ball has the greater momentum and the greater kinetic energy
(C) the golf ball has the greater momentum but has the smaller kinetic energy
(D) the bowling ball has the greater momentum but has the smaller kinetic energy
Q.46 Three masses are connected with a spring & a string as shown. They are initially at rest, with spring at its
natural length & string too at its original length. Find the maximum extension in the spring after the forces
start acting as shown :
(A) F/K (B) 2F/K (C) F/2K (D) 4F/K
Q.47 A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The relative speed of burnt gas is 800 ms–1. To give an initial
upwards acceleration of 20 ms–2, the amount of gas ejected per second to supply the needed thrust will be
(A) 127.5 kg s–1 (B) 187.5 kg s–1 (C) 185.5 kg s–1 (D) 137.5 kg s–1
Page # 76
Q.48 Blocks A & B of mass m each are connected with spring of constant k. Both blocks lie on frictionless
ground and are imparted horizontal velocity v as shown when spring is unstretched. Find the maximum
stretch of spring.
m m
(A) v (B) v
k 2k
2m
(C) v (D) none
k
Q.49 In the figure shown a particle P strikes the inclined smooth plane horizontally and rebounds vertically. If
the angle  is 60°, then the coefficient of restitution is:
(A) 1/3 (B) 1 3 (C) 1/2 (D) 1
Q.50 Which will roll down a hill faster, a can of regular fruit juice or a can of frozen fruit juice?
(A) Regular fruit juice (B) Frozen fruit juice

(C) Depends on the temperature (D) Depends on the angle of inclination.
Q.51 In the given figure a ring of mass m is kept on a horizontal surface while a body of equal mass 'm'
attached through a string. Which is wounded on the ring. When the system is released the ring rolls
without slipping. Consider the following statements and choose the correct option.
2g m acm+ R
(i) acceleration of the centre of mass of ring is acm
3
f
4g
(ii) acceleration of the hanging particle is m acm+ R
3
(ii) frictional force (on the ring) acts along forward direction
(iv) frictional force (on the ring) acts along backward direction
(A) Statement (i) and (ii) only (B) Statement (ii) and (iii) only
(C) Statement (i) and (iv) only (D) none of these
Q.52 Four solid spheres are made to move a rough horizontal surface. Sphere P is given a spin and released.
Sphere Q is given a forward linear velocity. Spheres R and S are given linear and rotational motions as
shown in the figure. Directions of the friction force on spheres P, Q, R, S are respectively
(A) Right, Left, Right, Left   
(B) Right, Left, Left, Right P Q R S
(C) Left, Right, Left, either Left or Right
(D) Right, Left, Left, either Left or Right
Page # 77
Q.53 A mechanism consists of a part which is translated with a velocity u and a rod AB of length L and mass
M hinged at A. The rod rotates about axis A with angular velocity . The kinetic energy of rod when it
is vertical as shown is
1 1 1 1
(A) Mu2 + ML22 (B) Mu2 + MLu
2 6 2 6
1 1 1
(C) Mu2+ ML22 + MLu (D) None of these
2 6 2
Q.54 Uniform rod AB is hinged at end A in horizontal position as shown in the figure. The other end is connected
to a block through a massless string m as shown. The pulley is smooth and massless. Masses of block
and rod is same and is equal to m. Then acceleration of block just after release from this position is
(A) 6g/13 (B) g/4 (C) 3g/8 (D) None
Q.55 In the figure shown, the end A of the rod of length L is being pushed down parallel to the inclined surface
with a velocity = v. Let the velocity of end B = u and the angular velocity of the rod = . Then,
(A) u = vcos, upward (B) u = v, downwards

(C)  = v sin/L (D)  = 2vsin/L
Q.56 In the figure shown, the instantaneous speed of end A of the rod is v to the left. The angular velocity of the
rod of length L, must be
(A) v/2L (B) v/L
(C) v 3 2L (D) None
Q.57 A uniform horizontal rod of length l falls verticallyfrom height h on two identical blocks placed symmertricallybelow
the rod as shown in figure. The coefficients of restitution are e1 and e2. The maximum height through which the centre
of mass of the rod will rise after after bouncing off the blocks is
h (e1  e 2 ) 2 h (e1  e 2 ) 2 h 4h
(A) (e  e ) (B) (C) (D)
1 2 4 2 (e12  e22 )
Page # 78
Q.58 A ring of radius R is rolling purely on the outer surface of a pipe of radius 4R. At some instant, the center
of the ring has a constant speed = v. Then , the acceleration of the point on the ring which is in contact
with the surface of the pipe is
(A) 4v2/5R (B) 3v2/5R (C) v2/4R (D) zero
Q.59 A circular hoop of mass m and radius R rests flat on a horizontal frictionless surface. A bullet, also of
mass m and moving with a velocity v, strikes the hoop and gets embedded in it. The thickness of the
hoop is much smaller than R. The angular velocity with which the system rotates after the bullet strikes
the hoop is
(A) V/(4R) (B) V/(3R) (C) 2V/(3R) (D) 3V/(4R)

Q.60 Inside a uniformly accelerating thin-walled spherical shell of radius R, which is rolling on horizontal
surface, there is a small body slipping around. Angle of friction between body and inner surface of sphere
is 23°. Which of the following can be the acceleration a of the center of sphere to ensure that the small
body stays at R/2 distance from the surface?
g 3g g 3
(A) (B) (C) g tan23° (D)
3 4 2
Q.61 Find the moment of inertia of ring of mass m and radius R about an axis passing through its centre and
making an angle of 45° with its plane :
45°
MR 2 MR 2 3
(A) (B) (C) MR 2 (D) MR2
4 2 4
Q.62 Two identical bricks of length L are piled one on top of the other on a table as shown in the figure. The
maximum distance S the top brick can overhang the table with the system still balanced is:
L
1 2 3 7
(A) L (B) L (C) L (D) L
2 3 4 8
Page # 79
Q.63 A ladder leans against a wall. If the ladder is not to slip, which one of the following must be true?
(A) The coefficient of friction between the ladder and the wall must not be zero
(B) The coefficient of friction between the ladder and the floor must not be zero
(C) Both A and B
(D) Either A or B
Q.64 The young's modulus of material of a thin ring shaped elastic body is Y. The mass of ring is m, area of
cross section is A, It's initial radius is R. Ring is a little elongated, then left alone. At what time will ring
circumference be same as it was initially. Neglect loss of energy.
 mR 3 mR mR  mR
(A) (B) (C) 2 (D)
8 YA 2 YA YA 2 YA
Q.65 A square metal frame in the vertical plane is hinged at O at its center. A bug moves along the rod PN
which is at a distance l from the hinge, such that the whole frame is always stationary, even though the
frame is free to rotate in the vertical plane about the hinge. Then the motion of the bug will be simple
harmonic, with time period
O
l
P N
l 2l 4l l
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
g g g 2g
[Hint : There is a frictional force between the rod and the bug.]
Q.66 This is the position graph of a mass on a spring. What can you say about the velocity and the force at the
instant indicated by the dashed line ? Positive direction is to right.
x
A
0 t
–A
(A) Velocity is zero ; force is to the right. (B) Velocity is positive ; force is to the right
(C) Velocity is negative ; force is to the right (D) Velocity is zero ; force is to the left.
Q.67 A particle performs harmonic oscillations along a straight line with a period T and amplitude a. The mean
a
velocity of the particle averaged over the time interval during which it travels a distance starting from
2
the extreme position is :
a 2a 3a a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
T T T 2T
Page # 80
Q.68 A smooth wedge of mass m and angle of inclination 600 rests unattached be-
tween two springs of spring constant k and 4k, on a smooth horizontal plane,
both springs in the unextended position. The time period of small oscillations of
the wedge (assuming that the springs are constrained to get compressed along
their length) equals
 1 m  1  m  2  m
(A) 1   (B) 1   (C) 1   (D) none of the above
 2 k  3 k  3 k
Q.69 A solid disk of radius R is suspended from a spring of linear spring constant k
and torsional constant c, as shown in figure. In terms of k and c, what value of R
will give the same period for the vertical and torsional oscillations of this system?
2c c c 1 c
(A) (B) (C) 2 (D) •
k 2k k 2 k
Q.70 A mass m is hung on an ideal massless spring. Another equal mass is connected to the
m
other end of the spring. The whole system is at rest. At t = 0, m is released and the
system falls freely under gravity. Assume that natural length of the spring is L0, its initial k
stretched length is L and the acceleration due to gravity is g. What is distance between g
masses as function of time. m
2k 2k
(A) L0 + (L – L0) cos t (B) L0 cos t
m m
2k 2k
(C) L0 sin t (D) L0 + (L – L0) sin t
m m
Q.71 A uniform solid cylinder of mass 5 kg and radius 0.1 m is resting on a horizontal platform (parallel to the x-
y plane) and is free to rotate about its axis along the y-axis. The platform is given a motion in the x direction
given by x = 0.2 cos(10t) m. If there is no slipping, then maximum torque acting on the cylinder during its
motion is
(A) 0.2 N–m (B) 2.0 N–m (C) 5.0 N–m (D) 10.0 N–m
Q.72 The drawing shows a top view of a frictionless horizontal surface, where there are two indentical springs
with particles of mass m1 and m2 attached to them. Each spring has a spring constant of 1200 N/m. The
particles are pulled to the right and then released from the positions shown in the drawing. How much
time passes before the particles are again side by side for the first time if m1 = 3.0 kg and m2 = 27 kg ?
10cm
m1
m2
Natural length
  3 
(A) sec (B) sec (C) sec (D) sec
40 20 40 10
Page # 81
Q.73 A short boy sits on a seat suspended by a light string from a fixed point O and starts swinging in a vertical
plane from the extreme position P with a small amplitude. The graph, which shows the variation of the
tension in the string withtime ‘t’ is : O
(A) (B) O t
O t
(C) (D)
O t O t
Q.74 A particle at the end of a spring executes simple harmonic motion with a period t1, while the corresponding
period for another spring is t2. If the period of oscillation with the two springs in series is T, then
(A) T2 = t12 + t 22 (B) T = t1+ t2 (C) T –1 = t11 + t 2 1 (D) T –2 = t12 + t 2 2
Q.75 Consider a very long stick of length 2R, which extends from just above the surface of the earth, to a
radius 3R. If initial conditions have been set up so that this stick moves in a circular orbit while always
pointing radially. What is the period of this orbit. g represents acceleration due to gravity on surface of
earth.
R R R
(A) 6 (B) 2 6 (C)  6 (D) none of these
2g g g
Q.76 A satellite revolving in a circular equatorial orbit from west to east appears over a certain point on the
equator every 8 hours. Therefore it's period is
(A) 16 hr (B) 8 hr (C) 6 hr (D) 32 hr
Q.77 A space vehicle approaching a planet has a speed v, when it is very far from the planet. At that moment
tangent of its trajectory would miss the centre of the planet by distance R. If the planet has mass M and
radius r, what is the smallest value of R in order that the resulting orbit of the space vehicle will just miss
the surface of the planet ?
1/ 2
r  2 2GM   2GM 
(A) R =  v  (B) R = vr 1 
v r   r 
v  2 2GM  2GMv
(C) R = v  (D) R =
r  r  r
Page # 82
Q.78 A spherical hole of radius R 2 is excavated from the asteroid of mass M as
shown in the figure. The gravitational acceleration at a point on the surface of the
asteroid just above the excavation is
GM GM GM 7GM
(A) 2 (B) 2 R 2 (C) 2 (D)
R 8R 8R 2
Q.79 A space vehicle approaching a planet has a speed v, when it is very far from the planet. At that moment
tangent of its trajectory would miss the centre of the planet by distance R. If the planet has mass M and
radius r, what is the smallest value of R in order that the resulting orbit of the space vehicle will just miss
the surface of the planet ?
1/ 2
r  2 2GM   2GM 
(A) R =  v  (B) R = vr 1 
v r   r 
v  2 2GM  2GMv
(C) R = v  (D) R =
r  r  r
Q.80 Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve around a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same sense. Their
periods of revolution are 1 hour and 8 hours respectively. The radius of the orbit of S1 is 104 km. When
S1 is closest to S2, the angular speed of S2 as observed by an astronaut in S1 is :
(A)  rad/hr (B) /3 rad/hr (C) 2 rad/hr (D) /2 rad/hr
Q.81 Maximum height reached by a bullet fired vertically upward with a speed equal to 50% of the escape
velocity from earth’s surface is (R is radius of earth) :
(A) R/3 (B) R/2 (C) 16R/9 (D) R/8
Q.82 A satellite is revolving round the earth with orbital speed v0. If it is imagined to stop suddenly, the speed
with which it will strike the surface of the earth would be (ve - escape speed of a body from earth’s
surface)
v e2
(A) (B) v0 (C) ( v e2  v 02 )1 / 2 (D) ( v e2  2v 02 )1 / 2
v0
Q.83 In the asteroid belt, a pebble is in close orbit around a spherical rock having density nearly same as that
of earth. ("Close," meaning that the pebble goes around the rock very near to the rock's surface). Orbital
period of the pebble around the rock is of the order of
(A) 1 day (B) 1 month (C) 1 hr (D) 1 yr
Q.84 Two identical cylinders have a hole of radius a (a<<R) at its bottom. A ball of radius R is kept on the hole
and water is filled in the cylinder such that there is no water leakage from bottom. In case-1 water is filled
upto height h and in second case it is filled upto height 2h. If F1 is net force by liquid on sphere in case-
1 and F2 is net force by liquid on sphere in case-2 then.
2h
h
R R
a a
(1) (2)
(A) F1 =F2=0 (B) F1 > F2 (C) F2 > F1 (D) F1 =F20
Page # 83
Q.85 A pan balance has a container of water with an overflow spout on the right-hand pan as shown. It is full
of water right up to the overflow spout. A container on the left-hand pan is positioned to catch any water
that overflows. The entire apparatus is adjusted so that it’s balanced. A brass weight on the end of a
string is then lowered into the water, but not allowed to rest on the bottom of the container. What
happens next?
(A) Water overflows and the right side of the balance tips down.
(B) Water overflows and the left side of the balance tips down.
(C) Water overflows but the balance remains balanced.
(D) Water overflows but which side of the balance tips down depends on whether the brass weight
is partly or completely submerged.
Q.86 In the firgure shown, the heavy cylinder (radius R) resting on a smooth surface separates two liquids of
densities 2 and 3. The height h for the equilibrium of cylinder must be
h 2 R 3 R
3R 3 3
(A) (B) R (C) R 2 (D) R
2 2 4
Q.87 A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and chunk of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened
together. The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which makes the combination to float with
entire volume of the combination submerged in water is
(A) 1/5 (B) 1/3 (C) 3/5 (D) 2/5
Q.88 The figure shows a conical container of half-apex angle 37o filled with certain quantities of kerosene and
water. The force exerted by the water on the kerosene is approximately.
(Take atmospheric pressure = 105 Pa)
5
P0 = 10 Pa
Kerosene
10 m sp.gr.= 0.8
Water
8m sp.gr.= 1.0
(A) 3 × 107 N (B) 4 × 107 N (C) 2 × 107 N (D) 5 × 107 N
Q.89 A barometer tube of length 0.99m reads 0.76 m . The volume of air measured at atmospheric pressure
to be introduced into space to cause the length of mercury column to drop to 0.57 m is (the cross-
section of the barometer tube is 0.1 cm2)?
(A) 10.5 cc (B) 1.05 cc (C) 105 cc (D) None of these
Page # 84
Q.90 A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is kept on a rough surface. The velocities of air (density ) around
4R 2
the sphere are as shown in figure. Assuming R to be small and M = kg , what is the minimum
g
value of coefficient of friction so that the sphere starts pure rolling? (Assume force due to pressure
difference is acting on centre of mass of the sphere)
  m/s
  m/s
M R
 Horizontal
(A) 0.25 (B) 0.50 (C) 0.75 (D) 1.0
Q.91 A light, rigid sheet of triangular shape has a curved portion cut from it as shown in figure. It floats on the
surface of water. Some soap solution is dropped over dotted region. Surface tension of water and soap
film are T1 & T2 respectively. T1 = 1.5T2. Mark correct option.
(A) The frame experiences a net force F = (T1 – T2)R in y < 0 direction
(B) The frame experiences force F = (T1 – T2)R in y > 0 direction
(C) The frame experiences force (T1 – T2)(2–)R in y > 0 direction
(D) Resultant force on wire frame is zero
Q.92 A plastic circular disc of radius R is placed on a thin oil film, spread over a flat horizontal surface. The
torque required to spin the disc about its central vertical axis with a constant angular velocity is proportional
to
(A) R2 (B) R3 (C) R4 (D) R6
Q.93 A sphere of brass released in a long liquid column attains a terminal speed v0. If the terminal speed
attained by the sphere of marble of the same radius and released in the same liquid is nv0, then the value
of n will be.
Given: The specific gravities of brass, marble and the liquid are 8.5, 2.5 and 0.8 respectively.
5 17 11 17
(A) (B) (C) (D)
17 77 31 5
Q.94 A sphere of radius 10 cm and density 500 kg/m3 is under water of density 1000 kg/m3. The acceleration
of the sphere is 9.80 m/s2 upward. Viscosity of water is 1.0 centipoise. If g = 9.81 m/s2, the velocity of
the sphere is :
(A) 9 m/s (B) 10 m/s (C) 11 m/s (D) 12 m/s
Page # 85
Q.95 A solid floats with 2/3 of its volume immersed in a liquid and with 3/4 of its volume immersed in another
liquid. What fraction of its volume will be immersed if it floats in a homogenous mixture formed of equal
volumes of the liquids?
(A) 6/7 (B) 8/11 (C) 11/16 (D) 12/17
Q.96 A source and an observer are situated on two perpendicular tracks as
Source
shown in the figure. The observer is at rest and source is moving with a
speed 50 m/s. The source emits sound waves of frequency 90 Hz which
travel in the medium with velocity 200 m/s. The frequency of sound
Observer
heard by observer when the source crosses the origin is
(A) 84 Hz (B) 88 Hz (C) 92 Hz (D) 96 Hz
Q.97 The wave function of a triangular wave pulse is defined by the relation below at time t = 0 sec.
 a Direction of pulse propagation
 mx for 0  x 
2
 a
y   – m( x – a ) for  x  a
 2
0 every where else


The wave pulse is moving in the +x direction in a string having tension T and mass per unit length . The
total energy present with the wave pule is
m 2 Ta m 2 Ta m 2 Ta
(A) (B) m2 Ta (C) (D)
2  2
Q.98 A closed organ pipe of length L is vibrating in its first overtone. There is a point Q inside the pipe at a
distance 7 L/9 from the open end. The ratio of pressure amplitude at Q to the maximum pressure
amplitude in the pipe is
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 2 : 3
Q.99 A string of length 3L is fixed at both ends. It resonates with a tuning fork in third harmonic with amplitude
at antinode equal to A0. At time t = 0, a string element at position of antinode is at half its positive
amplitude and moving towards mean position. Displacement of a string element at L/2 is given by
A0  11  3A 0  5 
(A) sin  t   (B) sin  t  
2  6  2  6 
 5  A0  5 
(C) A 0 sin  t   (D) sin  t  
 6  2  6 
1
Q.100 The shape of a wave propagating in the positive x or negative x- direction is given y = at
1 x2
1
t =0 and y = at t = 1s where x and y are in meters. The shape the wave disturbance does
2  2x  x 2
not change during propagation. Find the velocity of the wave.
(A) 1 m/s in positive x direction (B) 1 m/s in negative x direction
1 1
(C) m/s in positive x direction (D) m/s in negative x direction
2 2
(E) 2 m/s in positive x-direction
Page # 86
Q.101 Two pulses on a string approach each other at speeds of 1 m/s. What is the shape of the string at t = 6s?
1 m/s 1 m/s
x(m)
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Approaching waves at t = 0 s
(A) x(m) (B) x(m)

6 8 10 12 14 6 8 10 12 14
(C) x(m) (D) x(m)

6 8 10 12 14 6 8 10 12 14
Q.102 A composite string is made up by joining two strings of different masses per unit length   and 4. The
composite string is under the same tension. A transverse wave pulse:
Y = (6 mm) sin (5t + 40x), where t is in seconds and x in metres, is sent along the lighter string towards
the joint. The joint is at x = 0. The equation of the wave pulse reflected from the joint is
(A) (2mm) sin(5t – 40x) (B) (4mm) sin(40x – 5t)
(C) – (2mm) sin(5t – 40x) (D) (2mm) sin(5t – 10x)
Q.103 A rope hangs from a rigid support. A pulse is set by jiggling the bottom end. We want to design a rope in
which velocity v of pulse is independent of z, the distance of the pulse from fixed end of the rope.
If the rope is very long the desired function for mass per unit length µ(z) in terms of µ0 (mass per unit
length of the rope at the top (z = 0), g, v and z is :
z=0
2 2
(A) (z)   0e [g / v ]z (B) (z)   0e [g / v ]z
 g   v2 
(C) (z )   0 log e  2  z (D)  ( z )   e   z
0  g 
v   
Q.104 A sound source S and observers O1, O2 are placed as shown. S is always at
rest and O1, O2 start moving with velocity v0 at t = 0. At any later instant, let f1
and f2 represent apparent frequencies of sound received by O1 and O2,
respectively. The ratio f1/f2 is
(A) zero (B) between 0 and 1
(C) 1 (D) > 1
Q.105 A source of sound attached to the bob of a simple pendulum execute SHM. The difference between the
apparent frequency of sound as received by an observer during its approach and recession at the mean
position of the SHM motion is 2% of the natural frequency of the source. The velocity of the source at
the mean position is (velocity of sound in the air is 340 m/s)
[Assume velocity of sound source << velocity of sound in air]
(A) 1.4 m/s (B) 3.4 m/s (C) 1.7 m/s (D) 2.1 m/s
Page # 87

Q.106 2 loudspeakers are emitting sound waves of wavelength  with an initial phase difference of . At what
2
minimum distance from O on line AB will one hear a maxima
A
3 O
100 B
100 25
(A) 25  (B) (C) (D) 50 
15 3
Q.107 An open pipe of sufficient length is dipping in water with a speed V vertically. If at any instant l is length
of tube above water then the rate at which fundamental frequency of pipe changes is (C is the speed of
sound in air)
l
V
CV CV CV CV
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2l 2 4l 2 2v 2 t 2 4v 2 t 2
Q.108 The frequency of a car horn is f. What frequency is observed if both the car and the observer are at rest,
but a wind is blowing from the car toward the observer ?
(A) f (B) greater than f (C) less than f (D) either greater or less than f
Q.109 If a source of sound approaches a stationary observer with velocity v then he observes an increase in
frequency equal to n1. If source recedes away from the stationary observer with same velocity v then
he observe a decrease in frequency equal to n2 then:
(A) n1 = n2 (B) n1 > n2
(C) n1 < n2 (D) n1>n2 or n2>n1 depending upon velocity v
Q.110 A liquid of volumetric thermal expansion coefficient =  and bulk modulus B is filled in a spherical tank of
negligible heat expansion coefficient. Its radius is R and wall thickness is ‘t’ (t <<R). When the temperature
of the liquid is raised by , the tensile stress developed in the walls of th tank is :
(A) BR/2t (B) BR/t (C) 2BR/t (D) BR/4t
Q.111 Two bodies of masses 2kg and 3kg are connected by a metal wire of cross section 0.04 mm2. Breaking
stress of metal wire is 2.5 GPa. The maximum force F that can be applied to 3kg block so that wire does
not break is : (Neglect friction)
3kg
2kg 2
0.04mm F
(A) 100 N (B) 150 N (C) 200 N (D) 250 N

Page # 88
Q.112 A steel rod is 4.000 cm in diameter at 30ºC. A brass ring has an interior diameter of 3.992 cm at
30 ºC. In order that the ring just slides onto the steel rod, the common temperature of the two should
be nearly (steel= 11 × 10–6/ºC and brass= 19 × 10–6/ºC)
(A) 200 ºC (B) 250 ºC (C) 280 ºC (D) 400 ºC
Q.113 A sealed glass bulb containing mercury (incompletely filled) just floats in water at 4°C. If the water
and bulb are (i) cooled to 2°C and (ii) warmed to 8°C, the bulb
(A) (i) sinks (ii) sinks (B) (i) sinks (ii) floats
(C) (i) floats (ii) floats (D) (i) floats (ii) sinks
Q.114 Two thin walled spheres of different materials, one with double the radius and one-fourth wall thickness
of the other, are filled with ice. If the time taken for complete melting of ice in the sphere of larger radius
is 25 minutes and that for smaller one is 16 minutes, the ratio of thermal conductivities of the materials of
larger sphere to the smaller sphere is
(A) 4 : 5 (B) 25 : 1 (C) 1 : 25 (D) 8 : 25
Q.115 Two identical heaters are coated with paint. In 1st case e1 = 1.0 and in 2nd case e2 = 0.5. Both are kept
in identical chambers which are in similar surroundings. If the heaters are switched on, in steady state 1st
heater has temperature T1 on surface and 1 of its chamber. 2nd heater has temperature T2 on surface
and 2 of its chamber.
(A) 1 = 2; T1 < T2 (B) 1 > 2; T1 = T2 (C) 1 = 2; T1 > T2 (D) 1 < 2; T1 = T2
Q.116 A silver ball, painted black is kept inside a box which is maintained at a temprature of 27°C. The ball is
maintained initially at a constant temperature of 127°C by making the radiation to fall on it through a
small hole in the box. Latter on due to some chemical reaction between silver and paint, the paint
uniformly evaporates from the surface of ball exposing the silver. If same amount of radiation continues
to fall on ball, then temperature of ball as a function of time is shown as : (Assume emissivity of silver is
zero and paint to be black body also assume radiation to be the only mode of heat transfer.)
27°C
127°C
T T T T
127°C 127°C 127°C
127°C
(A) (B) (C) (D)

27°C 27°C 27°C
t t t t
Q.117 Identify the graph which correctly represents the spectral intensity versus wavelength graph at two
temperatures T' and T (T < T')

Page # 89
Q.118 Two moles of an idea gas is initially in state A having pressure 1.01 × 105 N/m2 and temperature 300K
. Keeping pressure constant, the gas is taken to state B. Temperature at B is 500 K. The gas is then
taken to state C in such a way that its temperature increases and volume decreases. Also from B to C the
dT
magnitude of increases. The volume of gas at C is equal to volume of gas at A. Now the gas is taken
dV
to initial state A keeping volume constant A total of 1200 J of heat is with drawn from the sample in the
cyclic process. The T – V graph for the cyclic process and work done in path B to C are respectively
(Take R = 8.3 J/k/mol.)
C C
T T
B B
(A) A and – 4520 J (B) A and – 460 J

V V
C C
T T
B B
(C) A and – 4520 J (C) A and – 460 J

V V
Q.119 A liquid whose coefficient of volume expansion is r. Completely fills a sealed metal tank at negligible
pressure. The coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is , and the pressure of the liquid will be
t t t
(A)  r (B)  r – 3  (C) tk (r – 3) (D)  r –  
k k k
Q.120 There are two identical vessels containing same quantity of an ideal gas at same pressure. Vessel A is
placed in a train moving with constant speed and the vessel B is placed on the platform. In the frame of
an observer standing on the plateform, select the correct statement
(A) Temperature of gas in both vessel is same where as kinetic energy of gas in the vessel is different.
(B) kinetic energy of gas in both vessels is same but temperature are different.
(C) both kinetic energy and temperature are same.
(D) both kinetic energy and temperature are different.
Q.121 Two identical glass spheres filled with air are connected by a thin horizontal glass tube. The glass tube
contains a pellet of mercury at its mid-point. Air in one sphere is at 0°C and the other is at 20°C. If
temperature of both the vessels are increased by 10°C, then neglecting the expansions of the bulbs and
the tube
(A) the mercury pellet gets displaced towards the sphere at lower temperature
(B) the mercury pellet gets displaced towards the sphere at higher temperature
(C) the mercury pellet does not get displaced at all.
(D) the temperature rise causes the pellet to expand without any displacement
Q.122 A process 12 using monoatomic gas is shown on the P-V diagram on the
right. P1 = 2P2 = 106 N/m2, V2 = 4V1 = 0.4 m3. The heat absorbed by the gas
in this process will be :
(A) 350 kJ (B) 375 kJ (C) 425 kJ (D) None
Page # 90
Q.123 One mole of an ideal gas at pressure P0 and temperature T0 volume V0 is expanded isothermally to twice
its volume and then compressed at constant pressure to (V0/2) and the gas is brought to original state by
a process in which P  V (Pressure is directly proportional to volume). The correct representation of
process is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.124 One mole of diatomic gas is being heated in a closed tank from 300 K up to 1000 K. During the process
part of the molecules dissociate. At 1000 K the energy of the diatomic molecules are only half of that of
the whole gas. By what factor has the gas pressure increased (Pfinal / Pinitial)? (The oscillation of the
molecules are not to be taken in account.)
160 16 3
(A) (B) (C) (D) none
33 11 2
Q.125 Two pistons having low thermal conductivity divide an adiabatic container in three equal parts as shown.
An ideal gas is present in the three parts A, B & C having initial pressures as shown and same temperatures.
Now the pistons are released. Then the final equilibrium length of part A after long time will be
(A) L/8 (B) L/4 (C) L/6 (D) L/5
Q.126 The pressure and density of a gas ( = 1.5) changes for (P, ) to (p', ') during adiabatic changes.If '/
 = 32, then P'/P will be
(A) 128 (B) 1/128 (C) 32 (D) 1/32 (E) None
Q.127 If the ratio of lengths, radii and Young’s moduli of steel and brass wires in the figure are a,b and c
respectively, then the corresponding ratio of increase in their lengths is
steel
m
brass
2m
(A) 2a2c/b (B) 3a/2b2c (C) 2ac/b2 (D) 3c/2ab2
Q.128 A point mass m is suspended by means of a light metallic wire. The mass is given enough horizontal
velocity so that it moves in a vertical circle. Now temperature is increased but the wire continues to move
in a vertical circle of increased radius. If TH and TL are the value of tension in the wire at its highest and
lowest point respectively, then due to increase in temperature the value of (TL – TH) will :
(A) decrease (B) increase
(C) remain same (D) cannot be determined
Page # 91
Q.129 Figure shows three temperature scales with the freezing and boiling point of water indicated. A change of
25 R0, 25 S0 and 25 U0 is denoted by x1, x2, x3 respectively. Which of the following is correct:
(A) x1 > x2 > x3 (B) x2 < x1 < x3 (C) x3 > x2 > x1 (D) x2 > x3 > x1
Q.130 The container A is constantly maintained at 100°C and insulated container B of the figure initially contains
ice at 0°C. Different rods are used to connect them. For a rod made of copper, it takes 30 minutes for
the ice to melt and for a rod of steel of same cross-section taken in different experiment it takes 60
minutes for ice to melt. When these rods are simultaneously connected in parallel, the ice melts in
(A) 15 minutes (B) 20 minutes (C) 45 minutes (D) 90 minutes
Q.131 Two identical balls of wax are attached on the outer surfaces of two tin sheets. The inner surface of ‘P’
is coated with lamp black and that of Q is polished. If a source of heat is placed between P and Q then
which ball will melt first?
(A) Q ball (B) P ball

(C) both simultaneously (D) nothing can be predicted
Q.132 An ideal gas at pressure, volume and temperature P0, V0 and T0 respectively is heated to point B,
allowed to expand to point C, and then returned to the original; point A. Points B and C have the same
temperatures. The internal energy decreases by (3P0V0/2) in going from point C to A. Heat transfer
along the process CA is
(A) (+P0V0/2) (B) (–5P0V0/2) (C) (–3P0V0/2) (D) 0
Q.133 On an imaginary planet the acceleration due to gravity is same as that on Earth but there is also a
downward electric field that is uniform close to the planet’s surface. A ball of mass m carrying a charge
q is thrown upward at a speed v and hits the ground after an interval t. What is the magnitude of potential
difference between the starting point and the top point of the trajectory ?
mv  gt  mv  gt  mv 2mv
(A) v  (B) v  (C) v  gt  (D) ( v  gt )
2q  2 q  2 2q q
Page # 92
Q.134 A positively charged sphere of radius r0 carries a volume charge density E (Figure). A spherical cavity
of radius r0/2 is then scooped out and left empty, as shown. What is the direction and magnitude of the
electric field at point B ?
17r0 r0 17r0 r0

(A) 54  left (B) 6  left (C) 54  right (D) 6  right
0 0 0 0
Q.135 A sphere carrying a charge of Q having weight w falls under gravity between a pair of vertical plates at
a distance of d from each other. When a potential difference V is applied between the plates the acceleration
of sphere changes as shown in the figure, to along line BC. The value of Q is
A
45°
C
d
w w wd 2 wd
(A) (B) (C) (D)
V 2V V V
Q.136 Two conducting spheres of radii R each are given equal charges +Q and are kept such that their centre
are at distance r (>R). The force of attraction (F) between them is:
KQ 2 KQ 2
(A) (B)
r2 (r  2R ) 2
KQ 2 KQ 2 KQ 2 KQ
(C) 2  F  (D) 2 >F>
r (r  2R ) 2 (r  2R ) r2
Q.137 A nonconducting sphere with radius a is concentric with and surrounded by a conducting spherical shell
with inner radius b and outer radius c. The inner sphere has a negative charge uniformly distributed
throughout its volume, while the spherical shell has no net charge. The potential V(r) as a function of
distance from the center is given by
(A) (B) (C) (D)

Page # 93
Q.138 A charged large metal sheet is placed into uniform electric field, perpendicularly to the electric field lines.
After placing the sheet into the field, the electric field on the left side of the sheet is E1=5 ×105 V/m and
on the right it is E2=3 ×105 V/m. The sheet experiences a net electric force of 0.08 N. Find the area of
one face of the sheet. Assume external field to remain constant after introducing the large sheet.
 1 
Use  4  = 9 × 109 Nm2/C2
 0
(A) 3.6  × 10–2 m2 (B) 0.9  × 10–2 m2 (C) 1.8  × 10–2 m2 (D) none

Q.139 The magnitude of electric fieldintensity at point B (2, 0, 0) due to a dipole of dipole moment, P  î  3 ĵ
1
kept at oringin is (assume that the point B is at large distance from the dipole and k = 4 )
0
13k 13k 7k 7k
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 4 8 4
Q.140 The diagram shows a uniformly charged hemisphere of radius R. It has volume charge density . If the
electric field at a point 2R distance above its center is E then what is the electric field at the point which
is 2R below its center?
(A) R/60 + E (B) R/120 – E (C) –R/60 + E (D) R/240 + E
Q.141 Two uncharged metal spheres, L and M, are in contact. A positively charged rod is brought close to L,
but not touching it, as shown. The two spheres are slightly separated and the rod is then withdrawn. As
a result: L M
insulating supports
(A) L is positive and M is negative (B) both spheres are positive

(C) both spheres are negative (D) L is negative and M is positive
Page # 94
Q.142 Which of the following statement is true ?
(A) The rate of change of potential with distance along any direction is constant in a uniform electric field.
(B) The electric field is zero where the potential is zero.
(C) The potential arising from a single point charge may vary from positive to negative in different
regions.
(D) The force on a charged particle located on an equipotential surface is zero.
Q.143 In normal cases thin stream of water bends toward a negatively charged rod. When a positively charged
rod is placed near the stream, it will bend in the
(A) Opposite direction. (B) Same direction.

(C) It won’t bend at all. (D) Can't be predicted.
Q.144 A spherical insulator of radius R is charged uniformly with a charge Q throughout its volume and contains
Q
a point charge located at its centre. Which of the following graphs best represent qualitatively, the
16
variation of electric field intensity E with distance r from the centre.
E E
(A) (B)
r r
R R
E
E
(C) (D)
r
R r
Q.145 A short electric dipole is oriented along x-direction at origin. At which of following point the electric field
have no x component.
y
x
P
(A) (1, 1, 0) (B) ( 2 , 1, 0) (C) (1, 2 , 0) (D) (1, 0, 0)

Page # 95
Q.146
(W) (X) (Y) (Z)

Figure shows charged hollow metal spheres (except X) each with internal radius a and external radius b.
Match each charge distribution with the corresponding E - field graph.
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) W – II; X – I; Y – III; Z – IV (B) W – III; X – I; Y – II; Z – IV

(C) W – I; X – II; Y – III; Z – IV (D) W – II; X – III; Y – I; Z – IV
Q.147 In the circuit shown, the switch is shifted from position 1  2 at t = 0. The switch was initially in position
1 since a long time. The graph between charge on capacitor C and time 't' is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.148 Four capacitors and two sources of e.m.f. are connected as shown in the figure. The p.d. in volts
between the points a and b is :
(A) zero (B) 13 (C) 17 (D) 27

Page # 96
Q.149 The circuit was in the shown state from a long time. Now the switch S is closed. The charge that flows
through the switch is
400 100
(A) C (B) 100 C (C) 50 C (D) C
3 3
Q.150 In the given circuit, the initial charges on the capacitors are shown in the figure. The charge flown through
the switches S1 and S2 respectively after closing the switches are
Q0/3 Q0
– + + –
– + + –
– + + –
– + + –
C 2C 3C
Q0
V
2C
S2 S1
Q0 Q0 Q0 Q0 3 Q
(A) zero, (B) , (C) zero, (D) Q0 , 0
6 5 2 2 5 6
Q.151 A 3 F and a 5F capacitor are connected in series across a 30 V battery. A 7F capacitor is then
connected in parallel across the 3F capacitor. Choose the INCORRECT option.
(A) Voltage across 3µF capacitor before connecting 7µF capacitor is 18.75V
(B) Charge flown through battery after connecting 7µF capacitor is 43.75 µC
(C) 5µF capacitor and 7µF capacitor can be said to be in series.
(D) After connecting 7µF capacitor, it has charge of 70µC
Q.152 Two conducting large plates P1 & P2 are placed parallel to each other at very small separation 'd'. The
plate area of either face of plate is A. A charge +2Q is given to plate P1 & –Q to the plate P2 (neglect
ends effects). If plate P1 & P2 are now connected by conducting wire, then total amount of heat produced
is
4Q 2 d 9 Q2d 3Q 2 d
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
3 0 A 8 0 A 4 0 A
Page # 97
Q.153 A hollow conducting sphere of inner radius R and outer radius 2R has resistivity '' a function of the
distance 'r' from the centre of the sphere:  = kr2 /R. The inner and outer surfaces are painted with a
perfectly conducting 'paint' and a potential difference V is applied between the two surfaces. Then, as
'r' increases from R to 2R, the electric field inside the sphere
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C) remains constant (D) passes through a maxima
Q.154 In the two circuits shown, all the light bulbs and batteries are identical. If A, B and C respectively denotes
the brightness of light bulbs A, B & C then
(A) C > A = B (B) C < A = B (C) C = A > B (D) C = A < B
Q.155 A cell of internal resistance 1  is connected across a resistor. A voltmeter having variable resistance G
is used to measure p.d. across resistor. The plot of voltmeter reading V against G is shown. What is
value of external resistor R?
(A) 5  (B) 4  (C) 3  (D) 1 
Q.156 Two scales on a voltmeter measure voltages up to 20.0 V and 30.0 V. The resistance connected in
series with the galvanometer is 1680for the 20.0 V scale and 2930  for the 30.0 V scale. The
resistance of the galvanometer and the full scale current are respectively
(A) 320 and 8 mA (B) 70 and 10 mA (C) 820 and 10 mA (D) 820 and 8 mA
Q.157 A galvanometer shows a reading of 0.65 mA. When a galvanometer is shunted with a 4 resistance, the
deflection is reduced to 0.13 mA. If the galvanometer is further shunted with a 2 wire, the new reading
will be (the main current remains the same)
(A) 0.60 mA (B) 0.08 mA (C) 0.12 mA (D) 0.05 mA
Q.158 A square loop of side 2 cm carrying current I0 is placed in x - y plane in a magnetic field B  ( 4î  3 ĵ)T .
y
Find the unit vector along the axis about which it will start rotating.
4 ĵ  3î – 4 ĵ – 3î
(A) (B)
5 5
2cm
– 4 ĵ  3î 4 ĵ – 3î
(C) (D) x
5 5
Page # 98
Q159 The resistance of a circular coil is 50 turns & 10 cm diameter is 5 . What must be the potential
difference across the ends of the coil so as to nullify the horizontal component of the earth's magnetic
field [BH =  × 10–5 T] at the centre of the coil? How should the coil be placed to achieve this result?
(A) 0.5 V with plane of coil normal to the magnetic meridian
(B) 0.5 V with plane of coil in the magnetic meridian
(C) 0.25 V with plane of coil normal to the magnetic meridian
(D) 0.25 V with plane of the coil in the magnetic meridian
Q.160 A neutral particle at rest in a magnetic field decays into two charged particles of different mass. The
energy released goes into their kinetic energy. Then what can be the path of the two particles. Neglect
any interaction between the two charges.
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
Q.161 The figure shows a conducting loop ABCDA placed in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to its
plane. The part ABC is the (3/4)th portion of the square of side length l. The part ADC is a circular arc
of radius R. The points A and C are connected to a battery which supply a current I to the circuit. The
magnetic force on the loop due to the field B is
BIlR
(A) zero (B) BI l (C) 2BIR (D)
lR
Q.162 The magnetic field shown in the figure consists of two uniform regions. The width of the first part is 5 cm
and the magnetic induction here is 0.001 T. The width of the other part is also 5 cm, with the direction of
the induction being opposite in direction and 0.002 T in magnitude. What should be the minimum speed
of the electron arriving from the direction indicated in the figure so that it can pass through the magnetic
field? Mass of electron = 9 × 10–31 kg
8 4 16
(A) × 107 m/s (B) × 107 m/s (C) × 107 m/s (D) none
9 9 9
Page # 99
Q.163 The mutual inductance between the rectangular loop and the long straight wire as shown in figure is M.
0a  c 
(A) M = Zero (B) M = ln1  
2  b 
0b  a  c  0a  b 
(C) M = ln  (D) M = ln1  
2  b  2  c 
Q.164 Which of the following quantities can be written in SI units in Kgm2A–2s–3?

(A) Resistance (B) Inductance (C) Capacitance (D) Magnetic flux
Q.165 In the circuit shown switch is connected to 1 for a very long time. At a particular instant t = 0, switch is
L
shifted to 2, the current in the circuit after a time gap of is
R
L
2
1
2L R
 3 3 
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 Re R Re R
Q.166 In the circuit shown, the capacitor is initially charged with a 12 V battery, when switch S1 is open and
switch S2 is closed. S1 is then closed and, at the same time, S2 is opened. The maximum value of current
in the circuit is
(A) 0.38 mA (B) 0.84 mA (C) 0.72 mA (D) 0.1 mA
Q.167 After switch S2 is closed and S1 is opened, the maximum value of current through the inductor is:
 C  C   3C  5C
(A)  L  E (B)  2L  E (C)  2 L  E (D)  4 L  E
       
Page # 100
Q.168 A bar magnet was pulled away from a hollow coil A as shown. As the south pole came out of the coil, the
bar magnet next to hollow coil B experienced a magnetic force
Up
Left Right
N S
Down
A
N S
B
(A) to the right. (B) to the left. (C) upwards. (D) equal to zero.
Q.169 A coil of inductance L = 0.2 H and of resistance R = 62.8  is connected to the mains alternating
voltage of frequency 50 Hz. What can be the capacitance of the capacitor connected in series with the
coil if the useful power has to remain unchanged?
(A) 10 C (B) 50 C (C) 25 C (D) 100 C
Q.170 Refer to the circuit diagram and the corresponding graphs. The current rises when key K is pressed.
With R = R1 and L = L1 the rise of current is shown by curve (1), while curve (2) shows the rise of
current when R = R2 and L = L2. The maximum current is same for both curves, then :
L R i
i0
(1)
(2)
K V
O Time (t)
(A) R1 = R2, L1 > L2 (B) R1 > R2, L1 = L2

(C) R1 > R2, L1 < L2 (D) R1 = R2, L1 < L2
Q.171 A capacitor and resistor are connected with an A.C. source as shown in figure. Reactance of capacitor
 –1  3  
is Xc = 3 and resistance of resistor is 4. Phase difference between current I and I1 is  tan    37º 
 4 
Xc = 3
I1 R= 4
I
V=V sint
(A) 90º (B) zero (C) 53º (D) 37º

Page # 101
Q.172 In the figure, if I L = 0.8 A, IC = 0.6 A, then I = ?
(A) 0.4 A (B) 0.2 A (C) 1.0 A (D) 1.4 A
Q.173 A ray of light strikes a plane mirror at an angle of incidence 45º as shown in the figure. After reflection,
the ray passes through a prism of refractive index 1.5, whose apex angle is 4º. The angle through
which the mirror should be rotated if the total deviation of the ray is to be 90º is
(A) 1° clockwise (B) 1° anticlockwise (C) 2° clockwise (D) 2° anticlockwise
Q.174 Spherical wave fronts shown in figure, strike a plane mirror. Reflected
wave fronts will be as shown in
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.175 An insect of negligible mass is sitting on a block of mass M, tied with a spring of force constant K. The
block performs simple harmonic motion with amplitude A infront of a plane mirror placed as shown. The
maximum speed of insect relative to its image will be
45°
K A K K M
(A) A (B) (C) A 2 (D) A
M 2 M M K
Q.176 A point source of light 'S' at a distance d from the screen A produces light
intensity I0 at the centre of the screen. If a completely reflecting mirror M is
placed at a distance d behind the source as shown in the figure, find the intensity
at the centre of the screen
9 10 8 9
(A) I (B) I (C) I (D) I
10 0 9 0 9 0 8 0
Page # 102
Q.177 A ray light from a liquid ( = 3 ) is incident on a system of two right angled prism of refractive indices
3 and 2 as shown. The ray suffers zero deviation when emerges into air from CD. The angle of
incidence i is A
D
Liquid
 2
i
air
 3
B C
(A) 45º (B) 35º (C) 20º (D) 10º
Q.178 The x-z plane separates two media A and B of refractive indices 1 = 1.5 and 2 = 2. A ray of light

travels from A to B. Its direction in the two media are given by unit vectors u  a î  b ˆj and
1

u 2  c î  d ˆj . Then
a 4 a 3 b 4 b 3
(A)  (B)  (C)  (D) 
c 3 c 4 d 3 d 4
Q.179 A vessel is quarter filled with a liquid of refractive index . The remaining parts of the vessel is filled with
an immiscible liquid of refractive index 3/2 . The apparent depth of the vessel is 50% of the actual
depth. The value of  is
(A) 1 (B) 3/2 (C) 2/3 (D) 4/3
Q.180 A point object O moves from the principal axis of a converging lens in a direction OP. I is the image
of O, will move initially in the direction
(A) IQ (B) IR (C) IS (D) IU
Q.181 Two point sources P and Q are 24 cm apart. Where should a convex lens of focal length 9 cm be placed
in between them so that the images of both sources are formed at the same place?
(A) 3 cm from P (B) 15 cm from Q (C) 9 cm from Q (D) 18 cm from P
Q.182 An object was placed upright 25 cm in front of a converging lens with a focal length of 20 cm. A concave
mirror with a focal length of 15 cm was placed 120 cm behind the lens. Which of these describes the final
image?
(A) real, enlarged (B) virtual, upright (C) virtual, inverted (D) inverted, diminished
Page # 103
Q.183 Three coherent point sources S1, S2 and S3 are placed on a line perpendicular to the screen as shown in
the figure. The wavelength of the light emitted by the sources is . The distance between adjacent
sources is d = 3. The distance of S2 from the screen is D (>> ). Find the minimum (non zero) distance
x of a point P on the screen at which complete darkness is obtained.
2 2D 17D 4 2D
(A) (B) (C) 4 5D (D)
7 8 7
Q.184 A thin perfectly transparent glass sheet of thickness t and refractive index  is pasted on one of the two
identical slits. If the intensity of light at the centre of the screen is I0 in the absence of glass sheet, the
intensity at O as a function of thickness t of the glass plate is
 t  2  t  2  (  1) t   (  1) t 
(A) I 0 cos  (B) I 0 cos   (C) I 0 cos   (D) I 0 cos 
       
Q.185 Plane wavefronts are incident on a glass slab which has refractive index as a function of distance Z, according

to the relation  =  0 (1–Z2/ Z02 ), where 0 is the refractive index along the axis and Z0 is a constant. This
glass slab can acts as lens of focal length F. By using the concept of optical path length calculate the focal
length of the slab. Consider t to be very small as compared to F. [Hint : Equate the OPL of ray (1) and
ray (2)]
(A) Z02 /(20t) (B) Z02 /(0t) (C) 0 Z02 /(2t) (D) None
Q.186 In a regular YDSE, when thin film of refractive index  is placed in front of the upper slit then it is
observed that the intensity at the central point becomes half of the original intensity. It is also observed
that the initial 3rd maxima is now below the central point and the initial 4th minima is above the central
point. Now, a film of refractive index 1 and thickness same as the above film, is put in the front of the
lower slit also. It is observed that whole fringe pattern shifts by one fringe width. What is the value of 1?
(A) (4+9)/12 (B) (4+9)/13 (C) (4+9)/11 (D) None
Page # 104
Q.187 Three coherent point sources S1, S2 and S3 are placed on a line perpendicular to the screen as shown in
the figure. The wavelength of the light emitted by the sources is . The distance between adjacent
sources is d = 3. The distance of S2 from the screen is D (>> ). Find the minimum (non zero) distance
x of a point P on the screen at which complete darkness is obtained.
2 2D 17D 4 2D
(A) (B) (C) 4 5D (D)
7 8 7
Q.188 In young's double slit experiment a coordinate axis is printed on the screen. The y co-ordinates of central
maxima and 10th maxima are 2cm and 5cm respectively. When the YDSE apparatus is immersed in a
liquid of refractive index 1.5, the corresponding y-co-ordinates will be
4 10
(A) 2cm, 7.5 cm (B) 3cm, 6cm (C) cm, cm (D) 2 cm, 4 cm
3 3
Q.189 Two coherent sources A & B emitting light of wavelength  are placed at position
(–D, 0) and (–D, 3) respectively. Here D >> . The number of minima on y-axis and maxima on x-axis
respectively are
(A) 6, 5 (B) 5, 6 (C) 4, 3 (D) 3, 4
Q.190 If light of wavelength of maximum intensity emitted from surface at temperature T1 is used to cause
photoelectric emission from a metallic surface, the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 6
ev, which is 3 time the work function of the metallic surface. If light of wavelength of maximum intensity
emitted from a surface at temperature T2(T2 = 2T1) is used, the maximum kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons emitted is
(A) 2 eV (B) 4 eV (C) 14 eV (D) 18 eV
Q.191 The half lives of a radioactive sample are 30 years and 60 years from -emission and -emission
respectively. If the sample decays both by -emission and -emission simultaneously, the time after
which, only one-fourth of the sample remain is
(A) 10 years (B) 20 years (C) 40 years (D) 45 years
Page # 105
Q.192 An x-ray tube has three main controls.
(i) the target material (its atomic number z)
(ii) the filament current (If) and
(iii) the acceleration voltage (V)
I

min
Figure shown a typical intensity distribution against wavelength. Which of the following is incorrect?
(A) The limit min is proportional to V–1
(B) The sharp peak shifts to the right as Z in increased
(C) The penetrating power of X ray increases if V increased
(D) The intensity everywhere increases if filament current If is increased
Q.193 During negative  decay, an anti-neutrino is also emitted along with the ejected electron. Then
(A) only linear momentum will be conserved
(B) total linear momentum and total angular momentum but not total energy will be conserved
(C) total linear momentum and total energy but not total angular momentum will be conserved
(D) total linear momentum, total angular momentum and total energy will be conserved
Q.194 Which of the following statement is correct in connection with hydrogen spectrum
(A) The longest wavelength in the Balmer series is longer than the longest wavelength in Lyman series
(B) The shortest wavelength in the Balmer series is shorter than the shortest wavelength in the Lyman
series
(C) The longest wavelength in both Balmer and Lyman series are equal
(D) The longest wavelength in Balmer series is shorter than the longest wavelength in the Lyman series.
Page # 106
COMPREHENSION TYPE
Paragraph for Question Nos. 195 to 197
The velocity-time graph of a car moving on a straight track is given below. The car weighs 1000 kg.
Velocity
(m/s)
10
time
2 7 10 (sec)
Q.195 The distance travelled by the car during the whole motion is :
(A) 50m (B) 75 m (C) 100 m (D) 150 m
Q.196 The braking force required to bring the car to a stop with in one second from the maximum speed is :
10000 5000
(A) N (B) 5000 N (C) 10000 N (D) N
3 3
Q.197 Correct acceleration-time graph representing the motion of car is :
a(m/s2) a(m/s2)
5 5
t(s) t(s)
(A) 2 7 10 (B) 2 7 10
10 10
 
3 3
a(m/s2) a(m/s2)
5 5
t(s)
(C) (D) 2 7 10
t(s)
2 7 10
10

3
Paragraph for question no. 198 to 200

To find the speed of a river's current, boatman decides to carry out the following experiment. He drops
a wooden bucket into the water and himself sets off downstream, rowing along the flow of river. After 40
min, he reaches a point A, 1 km from his starting-point and turns back. After travelling some distance
upstream, he picks up the bucket, turns round again and, rowing downstream once more, reaches A for
the second time 24 min later (after picking the bucket). Assuming that the speeds of both current and
boat (w.r.t. river) are constant, and also that no time is wasted on turning round.
Page # 107
Q.198 How long does the boatman spend on rowing upstream to meet the bucket ?
(A) 24 min (B) 40 min (C) 84 min (D) 16 min
Q.199 What is the speed of the current ?

4 3 3
(A) 1 km/hr (B) km / hr (C) km / hr (D) km / hr
3 4 10
Q.200 What is the boat's speed relative to the water?

(A) 1.2 km/hr (B) 1 km/hr (C) 0.75 km/hr (D) None of these
Paragraph for question nos. 201 to 203
Friction is a force that aids us daily, in fact so much so that we don't even pause to appreciate its
importance. We would not be able to wear pants or jeans without friction. We would have to live like
aborigines in the jungle. The shirt is supported at our shoulders. But if we stand up the weight of our jeans
is to be supported by a vertical force. The surface of our waist and thighs can be approximated to be like
curved surface of a vertical cylinder. The force of friction acting between this curved surface and jeans
balances the weight of the jeans.
To understand this mathematically, let us consider a vertical man whose waist is a rigid cylinder having a
circumference of 90 cm. He wears a jeans of mass 500 gm using an elastic massless belt which can be
assumed to be on elastic string of force constant 500N/m and circumference 85cm when not extended.
The coefficient of friction between waist and jeans is 0.5.
Q.201 What is the net normal force exerted by the jeans on the man?
(A) 25 N (B) 10 N (C) 12.5 N (D) 0
Q.202 What is the friction force acting between the man's waist and jeans?
(A) 5N (B) 12.5 N (C) 7.5 N (D) 25 N
Q.203 When the man stands in an elevator going up with a high acceleration, his jeans start sliding down. What
can be the minimum acceleration of the elevator?
(A) 147 m/s2 (B) 288 m/s2 (C) 87 m/s2 (D) 24 m/s2

A small block of mass m, can move without friction on the outside of a fixed vertical circular track of
radius R. The block is attached to a spring of natural length R/2 and spring constant k. The other end of
spring is connected to a point at height R/2 directly above the centre of track.
A
m
R/2  R
O
Q.204 If the block is releaed from rest when the spring is in horizontal state (see figure) then at that moment,
(A) tangential acceleration is g

3 kR

2 4m
 3 1 (B) radial acceleration is
g kR 3
2

4m
 
3 1
(C) tangential acceleration is

g kR 3
2

4m
 3 1  (D) radial acceleration is g
3 kR

2 4m
 3 1 
Page # 108
Q.205 Consider block to be at rest at top most point A of track. If the block is slowly pushed from rest at the
highest point A. When the spring reaches in horizontal state, then.
 3kR 2 
(A) Spring potential energy is  4  2  3  
 
 kR 2 
(B) Spring potential energy is  8  3  1
2
 
 
 mgR 
(C) Gravitational potential energy (taking U = 0 at  = 0) is  
 2 
 3mgR 
(D) Gravitational potential energy (taking U = 0 at  = 0) is  
 8 
Q.206 If the complete setup is in a gravity free space, then the minimum speed(v0) required at the highest point
A to just reach the lowest point is
k 3R k
(A) 2R (B)
m 2 m
k
(C) R (D) Motion not possible in gravity free space.
m

A block of mass M slides on a frictionless surface with an initial speed of v0. On top of block is a small
box of mass m. the coefficients of friction between box and block are s and k. The sliding block
encounters an ideal spring with force constant k. Answer following questions.
m s k
=0 M
v0
Q.207 Assuming no relative motion between box and block what is the maximum possible acceleration of
block and box at the instant of maximum compression ?
 s Mg  s ( M  m )g  s mg
(A) sg (B) (C) (D)
m m M
Q.208 What is maximum value of k for which it remains true that box does not slide ?
2 2
 sg  M  sg 
(A)   (B)   (M  m)
 v 0  ( M  m) v
 0 
2
  s g  ( M  m) 2
(C)   (D) None of these
 2v 0  M
Page # 109
Q.209 Suppose the value of k is just slightly greater then the value found in previous question, so that the box
begins to slide just as the spring reaches maximum compression. The accelerations of box and block are
respectively.
m ( s   k )   s M mg
(A) aBox = µkg aBlock = g (B) aBox = (µs – µk)g aBlock = (µs – µk)
M M
mg
(C) aBox = µkg aBlock = (µs – µk) (D) None of these
M

Two block of A and B of mass 1 kg and 2 kg are hung from light pulley. Initially the block B is held
stationary. At t = 0 block B is given velocity 10 m/s in upward direction. String and pulley are light and
there is no friction any where.
1kg A 10m/s
B 2kg
Q.210 Time till which acceleration (magnitude and direction both) of the two block remains same
1
(A) sec. (B) 1 sec.
2
(C) 2 sec. (D) Acceleration of the blocks always remains same.
Q.211 Velocity of block 'B' as block 'A' has acended by distance 5m from its original position
10 5 7
(A) 10 7 m/s (B) 2 m/s (C) 10 m/s (D) 10 m/s
3 3 3
Q.212 Total mechanical energy lost when the string becomes taut is
100 200
(A) J (B) 100 J (C) 300 J (D) J
3 3

A particle of mass 1.5 kg moves along x-axis in a conservative force field. Its potential energy is given by
V(x) = 2x3 – 9x2 + 12x, where all quantities are written in SI units. The plot of this potential energy is
given below.
U
It is seen that the particle can be in stable equilibrium at a point on x-axis, x0. When it is displaced slightly
from this equilibrium position, it executes SHM with time period T.
Page # 110
Q.213 What is the range of total mechanical energy of the particle for which its motion can be oscillatory about
a point
(A) E < 5J (B) E < 8J (C) E < 12 J (D) E < 9 J
Q.214 What is the value of x0 ?

(A) 2 m (B) 3m (C) 1m (D) 1.5 m
Q.215 What is the time period of SHM mentioned in the paragraph ?
 
(A)  sec. (B) 2 sec. (C) sec. (D) sec.
2 4

Ram and Shyam are two students of ACME course. One day after the test, they start discussing about
the motion of the moon around the earth. The moon is known to take 27 days in completing a circular
orbit. y
A x
C
Earth
D
In the figure, the moon moves counterclockwise (ABCD) around the earth.
Q.216 Ram asks Shyam : "What is the direction of the moon's instantaneous velocity at point D"?
(A) + x (B) + y (C) – x (D) – y
Q.217 Shyam asks Ram : "What is the direction of the moon's average velocity for one quarter of an orbit,
starting at C and ending at D"?
(A) 45° above + x (toward + y) (B) 45° below + x (toward – y)
(C) 45° above – x (toward + y) (D) 45° below – x (toward – y)
Q.218 Ram asks Shyam : "What is the direction of the impulse of gravitational force due to earth on moon for
one half of an orbit, starting at C and ending at A"?
(A) + x (B) + y (C) – x (D) – y

Consider two frames of reference, S and S', the first one being fixed to the ground and the second one
fixed to a train moving at 5.00 m/s with respect to the ground (figure). A block of mass 4.00 kg, initially
at rest with respect to S', is acted upon by a 14.0 N force for 3.00s in the positive x direction. Neglect
friction.
y’
y
5 m/s
m x’
x
Page # 111
Q.219 According to an observer in S,
(A) the initial kinetic energy is of the block is 50 J.
(B) final kinetic energy 480.5 J.
(C) the change in kinetic energy is 430.5 J.
(D) the work done by the force on the block is 430.5 J.
Q.220 According to an observer in S',

(A) the initial kinetic energy of the block is zero.
(B) final kinetic energy is 220.5 J
(C) the change in kinetic energy is 220.5 J
(D) the work done by the force on the block is 220.5 J
Q.221 Mark the correct option/s

(A) Work energy theorem cannot be applied in frame S'.
(B) Work energy theorem is derived from Newton is second law It is valid in all inertial reference frames.
(C) Work done by force is same in both the frames.
(D) Change in kinetic energy of both the blocks is independent of reference frames S and S'.

Ram is preparing for IIT JEE. He sets on to tackle a typical problem in mechanics. He sees that the
wedge is kept on a smooth ground and it’s inclined surface is also smooth. A block is projected on
it as shown. Both the block and wedge have equal mass. Can you help him find the answer to
following three questions ?
0
v
m
m
Q.222 He sets on to find the maximum height attained by the block, assuming the block does not fall off to
the other side. Which of the following equations is correct.
1
(A) mgh = mv 02 (by conservation of energy) where h is maximum height of the block.
2
(B) 02 = v 02 –2gsin× s where s is maximum displacement along the inclined surface
1 1 1
(C) mv0 = mv + mv (by conservation of momentum) and mv 02  mv 2  mv 2  mgh
2 2 2
(D) None of these
Q.223 How does the path of block look like as seen from ground.
(A) (B) (C) (D)

Page # 112
Q.224 What is the radius of curvature of it’s path at the highest point ?
v 02 cos 2  v 02 cos 2 
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D) None of these
g (sin  cos   sin 2 ) 2g (1  sin 2 )

You are to conduct a series of trials. For each trial the inclination of the plane is set to an angle , ranging
from 0º to 90º, and an object is released from rest at the top of the stationary inclined plane. The
coefficient of static friction between the object and the inclined plane is s. In each case below, predict
the observed outcome for the trial. In the following equation 'tumble' means 'tip over and rotate' and
'sliding' means NO tumbling.
Q.225 Case I : The object is a sphere and s = 0
(A) The sphere will roll without slipping for small  and slide down only for  greater than a certain non-
zero value
(B) The sphere will remain at rest for small  and roll without slipping only for  greater than a certain
non-zero value
(C) The sphere will slide down for all  > 0º
(D) The sphere will roll without slipping for all  > 0º
(E) None of the above
Q.226 Case II : The object is a cube and s = 0. In this experiment, the angle  is varied only between 0º and
45º
(A) The cube will slide down for all 45º >  >0º
(B) The cube will remain at rest for small  and slide down only for  greater then a certain non-zero
value
(C) The cube will roll without slipping for all 45º >  > 0º
(D) The cube will tumbe down for all 45º >  > 0º
(E) None of these
Page # 113
Q.227 Case III: The object is a cube and s is very large (s >>1)
(A) the cube will remain at rest for small  and slide down only for  greater than a certain non-zero value
(B) The cube will stay on the incline as if it were glued to it, for all 
(C) The cube will move relative to the inclined plane only for  = 90º
(D) The cube will tumble down only for  > 45º
(E) None of these
Two satellites A and B are revolving around the earth in circular orbits of radius
r1 and r2 respectively with r1 < r2. Plane of motion of the two are same. At
position 1, A is given an impulse in the direction of velocity by firing a rocket so r2
that it follows an elliptical path to meet B at position 2 as shown. At position 2, B 1
Earth
2
A is given another impulse so that velocities of A and B at 2 become equal and A r1
the two move together.
For any elliptical path of the satellite time period of revolution is given by Kepler's planetary law as T2
r r
 r3 where r (R) is semi major axis of the ellipse which is 1 2 in this case. Also angular momentum of
2
any satellite revolving around the Earth will remain constant about Earth's centre as force of gravity on
the satellite which keeps it in elliptical path is along its position vector relative to the earth's centre.
Q.228 When A is given its first impulse at that moment

(A) A, B and earth's centre are in same straight line
(B) B is ahead of A angularly
(C) B is behind A angularly
(D) none of these
Q.229 If the two have same mass
(A) A would have more potential energy than B while on their initial circular paths.
(B) A would have more kinetic energy than B while on their initial circular paths.
(C) Relative to Earth's centre, angular momentum of A when it is in elliptical path would be less than
angular momentum of B.
(D) During the whole process angular momentum of B would be more than angular momentum of A.
Q.230 If r2 = 3r1 and time period of revolution for B be T, then time taken by A in moving from position 1 to
position 2
3 3 T 2 T 2
(A) T (B) T (C) (D)
2 2 3 3 3
In two identical communicating vessel we poured water (see picture). In one of them we put an ice ball
of volume V = 100 cm3 which gets exactly half immersed in the water . The density of water w = 1000
kg/m3, the density of ice i = 900 kg/m3.
Page # 114
Q.231 Select the correct statement(s). Soon after placing the ice ball in left vessel.
(A) The volume of water flowing to the right vessel is 25cc.
(B) The volume of water flowing to the right vessel is 50cc..
(C) The ice ball is resting on the bottom of vessel.
(D) The ice ball is floating on the water surface.
Q.232 After a long time, select the correct statement(s)

(A) If ice melts, the level of water in both vessel will rise.
(B) If water freezes, such that ball's radius increases the level of water in both vessel will fall.
(C) If ice melts, the level of water in left vessel will rise and level of water in right vessel will fall.
(D) If water freeze such that ball radius increases, the level of water in left vessel will fall and level of
water in right vessel will rise.
Q.233 Which of the following actions will raise the water level.
(A) Heating the system (B) Putting a coin on top of ice ball.
(C) Putting a coin in right vessel (D) Accelerating the system upwards.

A cube made of wood having specific gravity 0.4 and side length a is floated in a large tank full of water.
Q.234 Which action would change the depth to which block is submerged?
(A) more water is added in the tank (B) atmospheric pressure increases
(C) the tank is accelerated upwards (D) None of these
Q.235 If the cube is depressed slightly, it executes SHM from it's position. What is it's time period?
a 5a 2a 4 a
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D)
g 2g 5g 5 g
Q.236 What can be the maximum amplitude of it's vertical small oxillations ?
a
(A) (B) 0.4 a (C) 0.6 a (D) 0.2 a
2

Two ice cubes of side 10 cm, having cavity of volume 20 cm3 at centre of cube but filled with different
materials A and B respectively. The specific gravity of material A is 4.9 and specific gravity of material B
is 1.9. Now these cubes are placed in two different vessels of same base area as shown in figure. The
water level before putting blocks in vessels are same. Assume that ice melts uniformly from all sides and
with same constant rate in both the vessels. (specific gravity of ice = 0.9)
A B
h1 h2
Page # 115
Q.237 Find the ratio of initial submerged volumes of the blocks containing A and B respectively
49 49
(A) (B) 1 : 1 (C) (D) 4 : 1
46 19
Q.238 Choose the correct statement :
(A) Both cubes sink simultaneously
(B) A and B sink only after complete melting of ice.
(C) A sinks prior to B
(D) B sinks prior to A
Q.239 Choose the correct graph showing the variation of heights of water-level in two vessels with time
h h h h
h1 h1
h1 h1 h2
h2
(A) h2 (B) h2 (C) (D)
t t t t
O O O O

In a thermally insulated tube of cross sectional area 4cm2 there is a liquid of thermal expansion coefficient
10–3 K–1 flowing. Its velocity at the entrance is 0.1 m/s. At the middle of the tube a heater of power 10
kW is heating the liquid. The specific heat capacity of the liquid is 1.5 kJ/(kg K), and its density is 1500
kg/m3 at the entrance.
Q.240 Find rise in temperature of the liquid as it pass through the tube :
1000 1 500
(A) °C (B) °C (C) °C (D) None of these
9 9 9
Q.241 What is the density of liquid at the exit ?
(A) 1450 (B) 1400 (C) 1350 (D) None of these
Q.242 How much bigger is the volume rate of flow at the end of the tube than at the entrance in cubic meters?
1
(A) 9 × 10–5 (B) × 10–5
3
4
(C) × 10–5 (D) None of these
9
A prism shaped styrofoam of density styrofoam (<  water ) is held completely submerged in water. It lies
with its base horizontal. The base of foam is at a depth h0 below water surface and atmospheric
pressure is P0. Surface of water is open to atmosphere. Styrofoam prism is held in equilibrium by the
string attached symmetrically. as shown.(Take : styrofoam = f ; water = w ).

h0
 P 90°
90° L
Page # 116
Q.243 Net force exerted by liquid on the styrofoam is
(A) 2 w g 2 L (B) 2 w g 2 L
2L
(C)  w g (D)  w g 2 L
2
Q.244 Magnitude of force on any one of the slant face of styrofoam is


(A) (P0   w g (h 0 – 2))L (B) (P0   w g (h 0 – ))L
2
 
(C) (P0   w g(h 0 – ))L (D) (P0   w g (h 0 – ))L
2 2 2
Q.245 Now string is cut and styrofoam is allowed to come to surface. A point mass is to be placed symmetri-
cally on the upper surface of styrofoam such that it is in equilibrium with its base in horizontal plane. In
equilibrium position styrofoam has half of its slant length submerged. Surface tension of water is T,
contact angle is 0° . Determine mass m to achieve equilibrium.
Point mass
/2
f gL 2 3   f gL 2 3
(A)   w gL 2  2T [L  ] (B)   w gL 2  2T [L  ]
2 4 2 8
  f gL 2 3 T [ L  ]
(C)   w gL 2  (D) None of these
2 8 2

Consider PT graph of cyclic process shown in the figure. Maximum pressure
during the cycle is twice the minimum pressure. The heat received by the gas in
the process 1-2 is equal to the heat received in the process 3-4. The process is
done on one mole of monoatomic gas.
Q.246 What is the heat released in the process 2-3 ?

5RT0
(A) (B) RT0 (C) 1.5 RT0 (D) 2.5 RT0
3
Q.247 Correct PV diagram for the process is –
(A) (B) (C) (D)

Page # 117
Q.248 If the maximum pressure is P then what is the pressure at the point 5?
(A) 2P/3 (B) 4P/5 (C) 3P/4 (D) None

Consider a gas at temperature T occupying a volume V consisting of a mixture of two gases having Na
& Nb atoms of masses ma & mb respectively.
Q.249 Give an expression for the total pressure exerted by the gas
( N a  N b )kT 1.5( N a  N b )kT ( N a  N b )RT
(A) (B) (C) (D) none
V V V
Q.250 Suppose that Na = Nb the different atoms combine at constant volume to form molecules of mass ma +
mb. Once the temperature returns to its original value, what would be the ratio of the pressure after
combination to the pressure before?
(A) 1 (B) 1/3 (C) 1/2 (D) none

In the cylinder shown in the figure, air is enclosed under the piston. Piston mass M = 60 kg, cross-
sectional area of the cylinder S0 = 20 cm2 atmospheric pressure P0 = 105 Pa.  = 37º. The air temperature
is constant, the friction is negligible.
S0
... . ... .. .
. . . . ..
.... ...... ...... ...... .. .... ..
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
Q.251 What is the pressure of the enclosed gas?
(A) 3.4 × 105 Pa (B) 4 × 105 Pa (C) 4.75 × 105 Pa (D) 2.8 × 105 Pa
Q.252 What is the mass of the goods that must be put on the piston so that the volume of the gas becomes half?
(A) 56 kg (B) 80 kg (C) 110 kg (D) 92 kg

Two cylinder A and B having piston connected by massless rod (as shown in
figure). The cross-sectional area of two cylinders are same & equal to ‘S’. The
cylinder A contains m gm of an ideal gas at Pressure P & temperature T0. The
cylinder B contain identical gas at same temperature T0 but has different mass.
The piston is held at the state in the position so that volume of gas in cylinder A
& cylinder B are same
and is equal to V0.
The walls & piston of cylinder A are thermally insulated, whereas cylinder B is maintained at temperature
T0 reservoir. The whole system is in vacuum. Now the piston is slowly released and it moves towards left
V0
& mechanical equilibrium is reached at the state when the volume of gas in cylinder A becomes . Then
2
(here  for gas = 1.5)
Page # 118
Q.253 The mass of gas in cylinder B
(A) 2 2 m (B) 3 2 m (C) 2 m (D) none
Q.254 The change in internal energy of gas in cylinder A
PV0
(A) ( 2 – 1) PV0 (B) 2( 2 – 1) PV0 (C) (D) none
( 2  1)
Q.255 If work done by gas in cylinder B isW B & work done by gas in cylinder A is WA then
(A) WA = –WB (B) |WA| > |WB|
(C) |WA| < |WB| (D) we can’t say anything
Q.256 What will be the compressive force in connecting rod at equilibrium

(A) PS (B) 2 PS (C) 23/2 PS (D) none
The figure shows P–V diagram of a thermodynamic cycle
Q.257 The work done in the cycle is

(A) 2P0V0 (B) 3P0V0 (C) P0V0 (D) 6P0V0
Q.258 If TA, TB, TC and TD are the respective temperature at A, B, C and D. Then, choose the correct
statement if
TA = T0
(A) The maximum temperature during the cycle occurs at C.
(B) TD = 3T0 (C) TB = 2T0 (D) all the above
Q.259 Identify the diagram which correctly represents the heat inflow and outflow of the system
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.260 Choose the correct P–T diagram for the given cyclic process.
Q.261 Choose the correct V–T diagram for the given cyclic process.

Page # 119
There is a cubical cavity inside a conducting sphere of radius R. A positive point
charge Q is placed at the centre of the cube and another positive charge q is
placed at a distance l (>R) from the centre of the sphere. The sphere is earthed
Q.262 Charge induced on the inner surface of cavity is

(A) –Q, uniformly distributed (B) –Q, non-uniformly distributed
(C) –(Q+q) non-uniformly distributed (D) none
Q.263 Net charge on the outer surface of conducting sphere is

(A) +Q (B) Q – qR/l (C) –qR/l (D) none
Q.264 Potential at a point inside the cavity is

(A) zero (B) positive (C) negative (D) can not be determined.

Figure shows a schematic view of an electrostatic analyzer. It can sort out charged particles by speed
and charge to mass ratio. Spacecraft use such analyzers to characterize charged particles in interplanetary
b
space. Two curved metal plates establish an electric field given by E = E0   where E0 and b are
r
positive constants with unit of electric field and length. The field points toward the centre of curvature
and r is distance from centre. There is no influence of gravity. Proton (charge +e mass 'm') enters along
y-axis and exits along x-axis while moving along a circular path.
y
Analyzer
Exit
x
Electric field b
a
r
Proton beam
Q.265 Speed with which proton is to be projected is 'v' and centripetal acceleration of electron is 'ac' is given
by respectively. Mark the correct statement
eE 0 b 2e  b  2eE 0 b e b
(A) v = ; ac = E0   (B) v = ; ac = E0  
m m r m 2m  r 
eE 0 b 2e  b  eE 0 b e b
(C) v = ; ac = E0   (D) v = ; ac = E0  
2m m r m m r
Page # 120
Q.266 Mark the INCORRECT option :
(A) Work done by electric field on proton is zero.
2eE 0 b
(B) If v = proton may strike outer surface of analyzer..
m
2eE 0 b
(C) If v = proton may strike inner surface of analyzer..
m
(D) If an electron is released with zero initial velocity from inner surface of analyzer it will strike outer
2eE 0 b  b 
surface with velocity v  n  , where me is mass of electron.
me a
Q.267 Mark the correct option.

(A) If E0 is made larger then in order to maintain same trajectory initial speed has to be decreased.
(B) If proton enters closer to the inner surface it will require smaller speed to follow circular trajectory.
(C) It does not matter where the protons enter the device it requires same speed to follow circular
trajectory.
(D) A deuteron (charge +e, mass 2m) will require greater speed as compared to proton to follow
circular trajectory.

There is a uniformly charged ring having radius R. An infinite line charge
(charge per unit length ) is placed along a diameter of the ring (in gravity
free space). Total charge on the ring Q = 4 2R . An electron of mass m
is released from rest
on the axis of the ring at a distance x = 3 R from the centre.
Q.268 Magnitude of initial acceleration of the electron.
e  3 2 2  e  3 2 2 
(A)  mR   (B)  mR  
 4 6   4 6 
0   0  
e  3 2 2 
(C)  mR   (D) none
 4 3 
0  
Q.269 The distance from centre of ring on the axis where the net force on the electron is zero.
(A) 2R (B) 2 R (C) R (D) none of these
Q.270 Potential difference between points A (x = 3 R) and B (x = R) i.e. (VA – VB) is
  1  ln 3    1  ln 3 
(A) – 1    (B) 1   
 0  2 4   0  2 4 
  1  ln 3 
(C) – 1    (D) none
 0  2 4 
Page # 121
There is an insulator rod of length L and of negligible mass with two small balls of mass m and electric
charge Q attached to its ends. The rod can rotate in the horizontal plane around a vertical axis crossing
it at a L/4 distance from one of its ends.
Q.271 At first the rod is in unstable equilibrium in a horizontal uniform electric field of field strength E. Then we
gently displace it from this position. Determine the maximum velocity attained by the ball which is closer
to the axis in the subsequent motion.
2QEL 2QEL QEL 4QEL
(A) (B) (C) (D)
m 5m 5m 5m
Q.272 In what position is the rod to be set so that if displaced a little from that position it begins a harmonic
oscillation about the axis A?
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Q.273 What is the time period of the SHM as mentioned in previous question ?
mL 2mL 5mL 5mL
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
QE 3QE QE 4QE

It is possible to take a high quality photograph of a very fast moving object by illuminating the object for
quite a small fraction of a second. You may have come across photographs of a bullet penetrating a
banana or an apple in many text books or magazines. This is called 'Stop action' photography because
the fast moving object travels a very short distance during the time of illumination. Harold Edgerton, the
inventor of stroboscope, was a pioneer of this kind of photography.
A normal photographic plate works properly if it receives an energy of 4J during the exposure. To
release this energy in a very small fraction of time, huge amount of power is required. Such huge power
can not be generated directly from a battery because of its high internal resistance. To produce such
power a capacitor is used. The time in which a capacitor discharges can be very short. Although, theo-
retically it would take a long time for a capacitor to discharge completely, it discharges almost com-
pletely in about 10 time constants. Consider the following situation. A capacitor of 200µF, storing 4J
energy is made to discharge through a flash light in 2ms. This setup is used to take the picture of a bullet
moving at a speed of 100 m/s. Assume that the flash light acts as a resistor and there is no other resis-
tance in the circuit.
Q.274 If we use a lens of power 10 diopters, the lens to photographic plate distance is 15 cm and the bullet
moves perpendicular to the principal axis, what is the distance covered by bullet as seen on photo-
graphic plate.
(A) 1 cm (B) 5 cm (C) 10 cm (D) 20 cm
Page # 122
Q.275 What is the order of energy delivered to the flash light in 0.2 ms (approx.).
(A) 0.4 J (B) 1.83 J (C) 2.74 J (D) 3.45 J
Q.276 What is the initial current in the circuit
(A) 200 A (B) 120 A (C) 700 A (D) 3700 A

All bodies, no matter how hot or cold, continuously radiate photons. At a given temperature, the inten-
sities of the electromagnetic waves emitted by an object vary from wavelength to wavelength throughout
the visible, infrared, and other regions of the spectrum. Figure illustrates how the intensity per unit
wavelength depends on wavelength for a perfect blackbody emitter. Although this figure can strictly be
applied only to a black body, yet this will approximately describe the behavior of many of the self
radiating systems. For example, sun has an approximate temperature of 6000K. It is not a black body;
it has an emissivity of nearly 0.6. But its peak almost occurs at a wave length that predicted by Wein's
law. Suppose we have a bulb of power 100W. It emits only about 5W as visible light, rest is emitted as
infrared radiation. Assume that the bulb filament has a surface area of 10 mm2. (hc = 1250 eV-nm).
Visible
per unit wavelength
Radiation intensity
6000K
4000K
0 500 1000 1500

Wavelength(nm)
Q.277 What is the approximate temperature of the filament ?

(A) 500 K (B) 350 K (C) 2500 K (D) 10000 K
Q.278 Assume that the light emitted by the bulb in the visible region is entirely of wavelength 500 nm. What is
the number of photons emitted per second in the visible region ?
(A) 1.25 × 1019 (B) 5 × 1019 (C) 2.5 × 1019 (D) 4 × 1019
Q.279 If we want of increase the number of photons emitted by the bulb in the visible region without changing
the wattage, which method would be most appropriate ?
(A) increasing emissivity by a factor of 2
(B) increasing the radius of the filament by a factor of 2 and the length by a factor of 4.
(C) decreasing the radius of the filament by a factor of 2 and the length by a factor of 4.
(D) doubling the voltage and decreasing the length of the filament by a factor of 2.
Q.280 Which of the following resistances would have maximum surface temperature. All of them have a surface
area of 10 mm2 and same emissivity.
2
1
3
4
100V
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
Page # 123
A fixed resistor is cannected in parallel with a variable resistor, both are connected to a real battery
(internal resistance is not negligible). Originally the fixed and variable resistors have the same resistance
Q.281 As the resistance of the variable resistor is decreased, the current through the fixed resistor
(C) remains the same (D) cannot be determined without more information
Q.282 As the resistance of the variable resistor is decreased, the rate at which energy is transferred to the fixed
resistor
(C) remains the same (D) cannot be determined without more information
Q.283 If the resistance of the variable resistor is decreased slightly, the rate at which energy is transferred to the
variable resistor
(A) increases
(B) decreases
(C) remains the same
(D) cannot be determined without more information

All bulbs consume same power. The resistance of bulb 1 is 36.
3 2
4 1
Q.284 What is the resistance of bulb 3 :

(A) 4 (B) 9 (C) 12 (D) 18
Q.285 What is the resistance of bulb 4 :
(A) 4 (B) 9 (C) 12 (D) 18
Q.286 What is the voltage output of the battery if the power of each bulb is 4W :
(A) 12V (B) 16V (C) 24V (D) None of these


A beam of electrons has radius r and contains 'n' electrons per cubic meter moving with velocity v along
the beam (figure). Assume that a beam that is much longer than its diameter forms a cylinderically sym-
metric distribution of charge and current. The beam expands if the electric force exceeds the magnetic
force. So long as the expansion is slow, the approximations of cylindrical symmetry and static fields
remain valid.
–e  –e 
v v
–e  –e  r
v v
Page # 124
Q.287 What is electric field produced on the edge of the beam?
 ne r  ne r
(A) E  r̂ (B) E  r̂
4 0 2 0
  ner   ner
(C) E  r̂ (D) E  r̂
4 0 2 0
Q.288 What is net force on the electron at the edge of the beam?
2ne 2 r ne 2 r
(A) (1  µ0  0 v 2 )r̂ (B) (1  µ 0 0 v 2 )r̂
0 2 0
4ne 2 r ne 2 r
(C) (1  µ0  0 v 2 )r̂ (D) (1  µ 0 0 v 2 ) r̂
0 4 0
A very small circular loop of radius a is initially coplanar & concentric with a much larger circular loop
of radius b (> > a). A constant current I is passed in the large loop which is kept fixed in space & the
small loop is rotated with angular velocity  about a diameter. The resistance of the small loop is R & its
self inductance is negligible. The current in the larger loop is clockwise.
a b

I
Q.289 Find the current in the small loop as a function of time.

a 2 0 I sin t a 2 0 I cos t b 2 0 I sin t b 2 0 I cos t
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2bR 2bR 2aR 2aR
Q.290 Calculate how much torque must be exerted on the small loop to rotate it.
2 2
  b 2 0 I sin t    b 2 0 I 
(A)   (B)  sin t cos t
R 2b  R  2b 
2
  a 2 0 I sin t 
(C)   (D) None of these
R 2b 
Q.291 At the moment both the loops are in the same plane
(A) the induced current in small loop is zero.
(B) the induced current in small loop is clockwise.
(C) the induced current in small loop is in anticlockwise direction.
(D) the induced current is clockwise or anticlockwise depending on sense of angular velocity vector.
Page # 125
A circuit is shown below.
A
B
R R
Q.292 If A is an ideal ammeter, B an ideal Battery of voltage V, and C an ideal voltmeter, what will be the
reading of C
reading of A ?
R
(A) R (B) 2R (C) (D) 0
2
Q.293 If A is a capacitor, B is an ideal ammeter and C is an ideal battery of voltage V, what is the voltage across
the capacitor ?
V
(A) V (B) (C) 2V (D) 0
2
Q.294 If B is an inductor of inductance L, A an ideal battery of voltage V and C an ideal battery of voltage 2V
each connected so that the anode is facing left, what is voltage across B as soon as the circuit is connected:
V 3V
(A) (B) V (C) (D) 0
2 2
The spark plug in an automobile engine is an R-L circuit as shown in figure. The circuit that provides the
spark uses an inductor as the energy source. Initially switch is closed and allows current to build through
the inductor. When the switch is open the current decreases rapidly through inductor and a large emf is
induced by inductor. Given  = 12V, L = 10 mH, Rc = 10, Rp = 7k
SW
L
 Spark plug
RP
RC
Q.295 If switch must be closed for up to three time constants. Find this time
(A) 3 ms (B) 1.5 ms (C) 6 ms (D) 1/3 ms
Q.296 The spark occurs in the spark plug because

(A) Spark plug short circuits the inductor.
(B) Spark plug short circuits the battery.
(C) Due to large induced emf generated by inductor air in the gap in spark plug gets ionized.
(D) Spark produced is due to conversion of magnetic field energy of inductor to visible electromagnetic
radiations.
Page # 126
Q.297 What is maximum heat dissipated in the spark plug ?
(A) 3.5 mJ (B) 14.4 mJ (C) 7.2 mJ (D) 6 mJ
An object AB is seen by the eye lens. The length A’B’ of the image formed on the retina by the eye lens
is dependent on ‘’ because radius of the eye is constant for a person during observation of an object
R  1.25 cm. An object of fixed height will appear to be of different heights as seen from different
distances because of different values of ‘’. Stars are of very large size but they appear to be very small
because they are at very-very large distances. ‘’ is called angle of vision or visual angle.
For larger ‘’, the object will appear larger,  depends on both ‘h’ and ‘d’. If ‘’ is very small then the
object is not visible to us. To increase ‘’ the object should be kept nearest to the eye but then the object
cannot be seen clearly because in that case the eye lens cannot adjust its focal length to make the image
on the retina. The objects infront of the eye can have a minimum distance ‘D’ from the eye for their image
to be formed on retina. ‘D’ is called LEAST DISTANCE OF CLEAR VISION. D  25 cm for average
grown-up person. If an object is kept from distance ‘D’ to ‘’ from a defect free eye then its image can
be formed on retina and it will be clearly visible. Sometimes an object kept in this range forms a very
small angle and hence cannot be seen like dust particles, bacteria etc. To increase their ‘’ microscope
(for small object near the eye) or telescope (for large objects but far away) is used. A simple microscope
is a converging lens (for example lens used by watch repairer). The image formed by this lens acts as the
object for the eye. Their performance is represented by a parameter called ‘angular magnification’ or
‘magnifying power’. It is represented by ‘m’

m
max
here  = angle of vision of the image formed by the optical instrument (like microscope or telescope)
max = maximum angle of vision that an object can subtend on the eye when no optical instrument is used
(for example if the object is kept at ‘D’ then the ‘’ is maximum).
For this passage we will assume that eye is a thin lens at the front of the eye.
Q.298 The minimum focal length of the eye lens is
(A) 1.2 cm (B) 2.5 cm (C)  (D) 25/11 cm
Q.299 If the eye is kept very close to a converging lens (focal length = 10 cm) and at the optical centre of the
lens and an object is kept at distance ‘d’ then the maximum distance ‘d’ of the object from the lens so
that its image can be seen clearly by the defect free eye is:
(A) 10 cm (B) 25 cm (C) 50/3 cm (D) 50/7 cm
Q.300 The value of angular magnification of this simple microscope (mentioned in the previous question) is
(A) 2.5 (B) 1.25 (C) 5 (D) 3.5
Page # 127
For a given optical system, the principal axis is x-axis and coordinates of object are (–30, +1, 0) and
coordinates of image are (+20, –2, 0). All coordinates are in cm.
Q.301 If the optical system is a concave mirror, it is located at what point ?
40 40
(A) origin (B) –80 cm (C)  cm (D) cm
3 3
Q.302 If the optical system is a convex lens, what is its focal length ?
100 100
(A ) 12 cm (B) 10 cm (C) cm (D) cm
3 9
Q.303 If the optical system is a spherical refracting surface, its centre of curvature is at what point ?
 40
(A) –15 cm (B) +25 cm (C) cm (D) –80 cm
3

Consider a transparent hemisphere (n = 2) in front of which a small object is placed in air (n = 1) as
shown.
n=2
• x R
O
Q.304 For which value of x of the following will final image of object at O be virtual
(A) 2R (B) 3R (C) R/2 (D) 1.5R
Q.305 What is the nature of final image of object x = 2R.
(A) Erect & magnified (B) Inverted & magnified
(C) Erect & same size (D) Inverted & same size
Q.306 Consider a ray starting from O which strikes the spherical surface at grazing incidence (i = 90° ). Taking
x = R, what will be the angle (from the normal) at which the ray emerges from the plane surface.
(A) 90° (B) 0° (C) 30° (D) 60°

In the front of the upper slit of YDSE apparatus, a thin film of a liquid of refractive index 1.40 is placed.
It is a hot day and the liquid starts evaporating from the surface. A beam of light at wavelength 560 nm
is incident onto the YDSE apparatus and the intensity I at the centre of the screen is monitored. Figure
gives intensity I as a function of time t. The intensity changes because of evaporation from the two sides
of the film. Assume that the film is flat and has parallel sides. Also assume that the film's thickness
decreases at a constant rate.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
t in sec.
Page # 128
Q.307 What can be the initial thickness of the film ?
(A) 7 µm (B) 4.9 µm (C) 7.7 µm (D) 9.1 µm
Q.308 If the maximum intensity is I0, then

I0 3I 0
(A) Intensity at t = 10 sec is (B) Intensity at t = 10 sec is
2 4
I0 I0
(C) Intensity at t = 5 sec is (D) Intensity at t = 5 sec,
4 2 2
Q.309 The rate of change of thickness can be

140 28 56
(A) nm/sec (B) 70 nm/sec (C) nm/sec (D) nm/sec
3 3 3

A 500 g teapot and an insulated thermos are in a 20°C room. The teapot is filled with 1000 g of the
boiling water. 12 tea bags are then placed into the teapot. The brewed tea is allowed to cool to 80°C,
then 250 g of the tea is poured from the teapot into the thermos. The teapot is then kept on an insulated
warmer that transfers 500 cal/min to the tea. Assume that the specific heat of brewed tea is the same as
that of pure water, and that the tea bags have a very small mass compared to that of the water, and a
negligible effect on the temperature. The specific heat of teapot is 0.17 J/g K and that of water is 4.18
J/g K. The entire procedure is done under atmospheric pressure. There are 4.18 J in one calorie.
Q.310 After the tea is added to the thermos, the temperature of the liquid quickly falls from 80°C to 75°C as it
reaches thermal equilibrium with the thermos flask. What is the heat capacity of the thermos?
(A) 9.5 J/K (B) 14 J/K (C) 95 J/K (D) 878 J/K
Q.311 An alternative method for keeping the tea hot would be, to place the teapot on a 10 pound block that has
been heated in an oven to 300°C. A block of which of the following substances would best be able to
keep the tea hot?
(A) copper (specific heat = 0.39 J/g K) (B) granite (specific heat = 0.79 J/g K)
(C) iron (specific heat = 0.45 J/g K) (D) pewter (specific heat = 0.17 J/ g K)
Q.312 If, after some of the tea has been transferred to the thermos (as described in the passage), the teapot
with its contents (at a temperature of 80°C) was placed on the insulated warmer, what would be the
temperature at the end of this 5 minute period? (Assume that no significant heat transfer occurs with the
surroundings)
(A) 80.7°C (B) 82.5°C (C) 83.2°C (D) 95.2°C

In a container of negligible heat capacity, 200 gm ice at 0°C and 100 gm steam at 100°C are added to
200 gm of water that has temperature 55°C. Assume no heat is lost to the surroundings and the pressure
in the container is constant of 1.0 atm.(Lf = 80 cal/gm, Lv = 540 cal/gm, sw = 1 cal/gm °C)
Q.313 What is the final temperature of the system ?

(A) 48°C (B) 72°C (C) 94°C (D) 100°C
Page # 129
Q.314 At the final temperature, mass of the total water present in the system, is
(A) 472.6 gm (B) 483.3 gm (C) 493.6 gm (D) 500 gm
Q.315 Amount of the steam left in the system, is equal to

(A) 16.7 gm (B) 12.0 gm
(C) 8.4 gm (D) 0gm, as there is no steam left

The energy-level scheme for the hypothetical one electron element Bansalium is shown in figure. The
potential energy is taken to be zero for an electron at an infinite distance from the nucleus.
n=4 –2eV
n=3 –5eV
n=2 –10eV
n=1 –20eV
Q.316 A sample of atoms Bansalium are in all the 3 excited state shown above. What is the possible wavelength
that can be emitted by atom in visible range ?
(A) 414 nm (B) 620 nm (C) 124 nm (D) 920 nm
Q.317 If a Bansalium atom is in ground state, which of the following photons cannot excite the atom to a higher
state ?
(A) 10 eV (B) 15 eV (C) 18 eV (D) 12 eV
Q.318 If photons emitted from Bansalium transitions n = 4  n = 2 and from n = 2  n = 1 will eject
photoelectrons from an unknown metal but the photon emitted from the transition n = 3  n = 2 will not,
what are the limits (maximum and minimum possible values) of the work function of the metal ?
(A) 8 eV <  < 10 eV (B) 5 eV <  < 10 eV
(C) 5 eV <  < 8 eV (D) 5 eV <  < 12 eV

The first nuclear reaction ever observed was by ernest Rutherford in 1919. It was triggered by -
14
particles incident on an isotope of nitrogen 7 N . He observed a proton was emitted along with another
14
element x. Let us assume that 7N nucleus was initially stationary. For this reaction to occur, -particle
must touch the nitrogen nucleus. The distance between their centres at this moment is d. For this prob-
14
lem, we will neglect the effect of outer electrons in 7 N . Symbols have their usual meanings.
Q.319 X is an isotope of
(A) Nitrogen (B) Oxygen (C) Fluorine (D) Carbon
Q.320 Value of d is
(A) R0(21/3 + 71/3) (B) R0(22/3 + 72/3) (C) R0(22/3 + 142/3) (D) R0(22/3 + 141/3)
Page # 130
Q.321 The minimum initial kinetic energy of -particle so that reaction can occur is
18ke 2 14ke 2 18ke 2 14ke 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
R 0 (22 / 3  14 2 / 3 ) R 0 (22 / 3  141 / 3 ) R 0 (22 / 3  141 / 3 ) R 0 (22 / 3  7 2 / 3 )

64
29 Cu
can decay by ¯ or + emission, or electron capture. It is known that 64
29 Cu
has a half life of 12.8
hrs with 40% probability of ¯ decay, 20% probability of  decay and 40% probability of
+
64 64 64
electron capture. The mass of 29 Cu
is 63.92977 amu while 30 Zn is 63.92914 amu and 28 Ni is
63.92796 amu.
Q.322 What is the half life for electron capture?

(A) 5.12 Hrs. (B) 32 Hrs. (C) 2.56 Hrs. (D) 16 Hrs.
Q.323 What is the Q value of ¯ decay?
(A) 0.587 MeV (B) 0.077 MeV (C) 1.686 MeV (D) 0.666 MeV
Q.324 If initially there was 1022 atoms of 2964Cu, what is the initial rate at which energy is being produced due
to + decay?
(A) 5.8 × 104 W (B) 3.2 × 103 W (C) 8.4 × 102 W (D) 1.6 × 104 W
De-Broglie hypothesized that material particles have wave like properties. Figure
shows a small particle in a box. The particle simply bounces back and forth at
constant speed. As particles also have wave like properties it can be considered m
v
to be a wave reflecting back and forth from the ends of the box. The reflections
will create a standing wave analogous to standing wave on a string tied at both
ends. L
Since a standing wave confined to a region can have only selected wavelengths, momentum of the
particle is quantized. We can safely assume that such a particle only has kinetic energy. This energy must
also be quantized.
Q.325 What is momentum of particle in nth mode of standing wave?
nh nh 2nh 2Ln
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2L L L h
Q.326 What is the particle's energy in nth state?
h 2n 2 h 2n 2 h 2n 2 4h 2 n 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8mL2 4mL2 2mL2 mL2
Q.327 Mark the incorrect option.
(A) confined particle has only certain discrete values of energy.
(B) Particle in box behaves as standing wave.
(C) The particle cannot be at rest.
(D) Matter waves are electromagnetic in nature.
Q.328 Bohr model is applied to signly ionized helium He+. Consider the lines that lie in the visible region of the
spectrum. Which of the following transitions can give a photon of visible light ?
(A) n = 5 to n = 4 (B) n = 7 to n = 4 (C) n = 4 to n = 3 (D) n = 8 to n = 3
Page # 131
REASONING TYPE
Q.329 Statement-1 : The numerical value (n) of a physical quantity is inversely proportional to size of unit (u)
being used to measure it.
Statement-2 : The magnitude of physical quantity does not change by changing the units.
(A) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is correct explanation for statement-1.
(B) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true and statement-2 is NOT the correct explanation for statement-1.
(C) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false.
(D) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true.
Q.330 Figure shows sequence of large number of photograph of on object moving vertically under gravity. A
motion picture of this photograph is run backward.
Statement-1: In time reversal sequence the gravitational acceleration will appear to be upward.
Statement-2: A time reversal operation changes every v to  v .
Q.331 Statement-1 : Two stones were projected simultaneously from same point with same speed at different
angles from horizontal as shown. They may collide at the point of intersection of their
paths.
Statement-2 : For two particles to collide they must be at the same point in space simultaneously.
Q.332 Statement-1 : During flight under action of gravity, the change in velocity of a projectile in same time
intervals is same. (Neglect air friction)
Statement-2 : Neglecting air friction, the acceleration of projectile is constant during flight.
Page # 132
Q.333 Statement-1 : A hot air balloon is being carried away due north, flags on its bucket will fly due South.
Statement-2 : The flag on a moving vehicle points in direction of wind flow relative to the vehicle.
Q.334 Two stones are thrown in same vertical plane from different floors of the same building simultaneously so
as to hit the ground simultaneously.
Statement-1 : They may collide in air.
Statement-2 : The two stones may have been projected with same horizontal component of speed.
Q.335 Statement-1: Tension in a massless string may be different at different points.

Statement-2: Net force on a massless object is zero.
Q.336 Statement-1 : A man is standing on a bathroom scale. Suddenly he squats (sits down) with acceleration
a. The scale reading will increase.
Statement-2 : Man pushes down on the scale while squatting.
Q.337 Figure shows a smooth cart on a smooth surface (with small wheels) with an atwood machine on it. An
external force P acts on cart. Following statements are based on given situation. The system starts from
rest.
m2
m1
P
Statement-1 : The magnitudes of velocities of blocks m1 and m2 with respect to pulley are same.
Statement-2 : If the string connecting the two blocks is to remain taut, relative to the centre of the
pulley, velocities of blocks must be equal and opposite.
Page # 133
Q.338 Statement-1 : A man can not walk by himself on frictionless floor.
Statement-2 : In the absence of friction we can not push the floor tangentially backward.
Q.339 Statement-1 : A horse can pull a cart on a horizontal surface only if it exerts force greater than limiting
static friction.
Statement-2 : An external force exceeding limiting friction is required to make a block slide on rough
horizontal surface
Q.340 Statement-1 : Two particles of mass 1 kg and 3 kg move towards each other under their mutual force
of attraction. No other force acts on them. When the relative velocity of approach of the
two particles is 2 m/s, their centre of mass has a velocity of 0.5 m/s. When the relative
velocity of approach becomes 3 m/s, the velocity of the centre of mass is 0.75 m/s.
1 2 1 2
Statement-2 : The total kinetic energy as seen from ground is v rel  mv c and in absence of
2 2
external force, total energy remains conserved.
Q.341 Statement-1 : Two particles acted by same net force for same time always have same change in kinetic
energy.
Statement-2 : Two particles acted by same net force having same displacement always have same
change in kinetic energy.
Q.342 Statement-1 : Two particles acted by same net force for same time always have same kinetic energy.
Statement-2 : Two particles acted by same net force having same displacement always have same
kinetic energy.
Q.343 Statement -1 and 2 are on a situation of a frog jumping vertically up on a rigid floor.
Statement-1 : Due to work done by normal reaction of floor frog gains kinetic energy.
Statement-2 : Normal reaction by ground accelerates centre of mass of frog.
Page # 134
Q.344 Statement-1 : If the centre of mass of a system is at the origin then the total mass to the right of
origin is same as total mass to left of origin.
mi xi
Statement-2 : xcm = mi
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True, Statement-2 is a correct explanation for statement-1
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True, Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True
Q.345 Statement-1: In centre of mass frame the linear momentum of system is conserved only if no external
forces are present
Statement-2: In presence of external force, the centre of mass has acceleration in inertial frame equal

 Fext
to
m total
Q.346 Statement-1 : If we want to throw a bottle from a moving train so that danger of being broken on
hitting ground is least. We should throw bottle in forward direction.
Statement-2 : While jumping out from side of a moving carriage it is safer to jump in forwards direction.
Q.347 Two blocks are connected by a spring and given velocity v1 and v2 as shown in figure when spring is
unstretched.
m1 m2
v1 v2
Statement-1 : In centre of mass frame, both the blocks come to rest simultaneously.
Statement-2 : Momentum of a system in centre of mass frame is always zero.
Q.348 Statement-1 : Total kinetic energy during an elastic collision between two isolated bodies, is always
constant.
Statement-2 : Total linear momentum during a collision between isolated bodies, is always constant.
Page # 135
Q.349 Statement-1 : If the resultant of all the forces acting on a system is zero then the torque on the
system about any point is same.
Statement-2 : If the resultant of the forces acting on a system is zero then acceleration of its centre of
mass is zero.
Q.350 Consider the arrangement shown in figure. The block is initially at rest. Now  is slowly increased
(consider 0 <  < 90°)

Statement-1 : If sliding starts before toppling and  is kept on increasing even after that then block
won't topple thereafter.
Statement-2 : Line of action of resultant normal force shifts to keep the block from toppling.
Q.351 A thin walled hollow spherical shell of mass m and radius Shell
r starts from rest and moves along atrack as shown in
A
figure assume that shell successfully negotiates the loop. h0
Statement-1: Normal reaction at A is greater when friction is absent on the track as compared to the
case when sphere executes pure rolling.
Statement-2: Due to frictional torque shell have larger translational velocity at A in case of pure rolling.
F y
Q.352 Figure shows a yo-yo placed on a rough surface friction is sufficient
x
for pure rolling. After force F acts pure rolling begins.
Statement-1: Angular acceleration of yo-yo is in clockwise sense.
Statement-2: Torque due to F must be larger than the torque due to friction.
Page # 136
Q.353 Statement-1 : Friction is necessary for a body to roll purely on a level horizontal ground.
Statement-2 : When the body is rolling purely, the velocity of the point of contact should be zero
relative to the surface in contact.
Q.354 Statement-1: When a sphere is rolling without sliding it is possible that no point on it is at rest
Statement-2: For rolling without sliding vCM = R ( & R have usual meaning & vCM is w.r.t.
ground)
Q.355 Figure shows a rigid body that is mirror symmetric about a plane and rotates about an axis perpendicular
to that plane.

Plane of symmetry
  , where
Statement-1 : Angular momentum of above mentioned rigid body can be expressed by L  I
I is moment of inertia about rotation axis.
  can be applied only for those rigid bodies that have rotational symmetry about
Statement-2 : L  I
an axis and rotate about that symmetry axis.
Q.356 Consider a semicircular ring with mass m and radius R as shown in figure.
A
R O
Statement-1 : The moment of inertia of semi - circular ring about an axis passing through A and
perpendicular to plane is 2mR2.
Statement-2 : According to parallel axis theorem : I A  I cm  mR 2
Page # 137
Q.357 Statement-1 : For the calculation of gravitational force between any two uniform spherical shells, they
can always be replaced by particles of same mass placed at respective centres.
Statement-2 : Gravitational field of a uniform spherical shell out side it is same as that of particle of
same mass placed at its centre of mass.
Q.358 Statement-1 : Assuming zero potential at infinity, the gravitational potential at a point can never be
positive.
Statement-2 : The magnitude of gravitational force between two particles has inverse square dependence
on the distance between two particles.
Q.359 Statement-1 : Period of revolution of satellite in circular orbit around earth is inversely proportional to
its orbital speed.
2r
Statement-2 : Period of revolution in uniform circular motion is given by T = where r is radius of
v
orbit and v is speed.
Q.360 Statement-1 : It takes more fuel for a spacecraft to travel from the earth to moon than for the return trip.
Statement-2 : Potential energy of spacecraft at moon’s surface is greater than that at earth surface.
Q.361 A block of ice on earth floats on water with 9/10 of its volume submerged.
Statement -1 : On moon the block of ice would float on water with less than 9/10 of its volume
submerged.
Statement -2 : The acceleration due to gravity on moon surface is less than that on earth.
Q.362 Statement-1 : When an object is completely submerged in a liquid, the buoyant force and weight of
object are action reaction pair.
Statement-2 : Magnitude of Buoyant force equals the weight of fluid displaced by object.
Page # 138
Q.363 Statement-1 : Coefficient of viscosity of a liquid decreases while that of a gas increase, with increasing
temperature.
Statement-2 : Density of a liquid and that of a gas vary in opposite manner with increase in temperature.
Q.364 In a standard resonance column experiment assuming negligible end correction.
Statement-1: The length of air column in first and second resonances are in ratio 1 : 3.
Statement-2: The wavelength at first and second resonance are in ratio 1 : 3.
Q.365 Two tuning forks produce a beat frequency of 2 Hz. in air. The same tuning forks are put in water.
Statement 1: The beat frequency in water is higher than in air.
Statement 2: The velocity of sound in water is higher than in air.
Q.366 Statement-1 : Due to the motion of listener, the frequency of the sound waves (as received by
listener)emitted by stationary source is affected.
Statement-2 : Due to the motion of source, wavelength of the sound waves (emitted by source) as
received by stationary listener is affected.
Statement-3 : If recever and source both are moving, the observed frequency must be different from
the original frequency of source.
Treat motion of source or listener as always along a line joining them for all above cases.
(A) All the three statements are correct (B) Only all three statements are wrong
(C) Only Statements-1 and 2 are correct (D) Only Statements-2 and 3 are correct
Q.367 Statement-1 : If the atmospheric pressure increases, sound travels faster in room.
P
Statement-2 : Vsound =

Q.368 Statement-1 : The level of water (initially at 0°C ) in a vessel (which does not expand on heating)
begins to decrease on putting it on a gas stove.
Statement-2 : Density of water initially increases when its temperature rises from 0°C.
Page # 139
Q.369 Statement-1 : At a steelworks, molten iron is heated to 1500°C to remove impurities. It is accurate to
say that molten iron contains more heat than solid iron.
Statement-2 : Solid iron at melting point needs to be supplied heat corresponding to its latent heat of
fusion for phase change.
Q.370 Statement -1 : Evaporation cools our body.
Statement -2 : When a body radiates, some energy is lost to the surroundings.
Q.371 Two identical objects A and B are at temperature TA and TB respectively. Both objects are placed in a
room with perfectly absorbing walls maintained at temperature T (TA > T > TB).
Statement-1 : The objects A and B attain the temperature T eventually.
Statement-2 : A only emits radiation while B only absorbs until radiation both attain the temperature T
Q.372 Statement-1 : A body is emitting primarily red light. As the temperature of body is increased it may
emit primarily yellow light.
Statement-2 : Rate of radiation emitted by a body increases as the temperature increases.
Q.373 Statement-1 : Two rigid, identical and uniformly charged non conducting spheres with same charge are
placed on a sufficiently rough surface, then spheres must be in equilibrium.
q0 q0
F F
f f
r
Statement-2 : If net force on a point charge is zero it is in equilibrium.
Q.374 Statement-1 : Suppose that a Gaussian surface encloses no net charge. Gauss’ law requires that electric
field equals zero for all points on the surface.
Statement-2 : If electric field equals zero everywhere on the surface, Gauss’ law requires that there
be no net charge inside.
Page # 140
Q.375 Consider a conductor with a spherical cavity in it. A point charge q0 is placed at the centre of cavity and
a point charge Q is placed outside conductor.
Statement-1 : Total charge induced on cavity wall is equal and opposite to the charge inside.
Statement-2 : If cavity is surrounded by a Gaussian surface, where all parts of Gaussian surface are
located inside the conductor,
 
 E.dA  0 ; hence qinduced = – q0
Q.376 Statement-1 : The maximum charge that can be given to a conductor of fixed volume depends on its
shape.
Statement-2 : If the electric field near the conductor is sufficient for dielectric breakdown of air, no
more charge can be transfered to it.
Q.377 Statement-1 : The electrostatic force between the plates of a charged isolated capacitor decreases
when dielectric fills whole space between plates.
Statement-2 : The electric field between the plates of a charged isolated capacitance decreases when
dielectric fills whole space between plates.
Q.378 Statement-1 : When a wire is stretched with in the proportionality limit such that its length becomes n
times that of its initial value, the resistance of wire may become n2 times of its initial
resistance.
Statement-2 : The poisson’s ratio of the wire’s material can be 1/2.
Q.379 Statement-1: Conductivity of a metallic conductor decreases with increase in temperature.

Statement-2: On increasing temperature, collision of electrons becomes more frequent and number of
free electrons in the metallic conductor decreases.
Page # 141
Q.380 Statement-1 : As the temperature decreases, the electrical resistivity in metallic conductors diminishes.
Statement-2 : Thermal oscillations of atoms which hinder motion of free electrons under the influence
of an external electric field become insignificant as the temperature decreases.
Q.381 Statement-1 : Knowing that rating is done at steady state of the filament, an electric bulb connected to
a source having rated voltage consumes more than rated power just after it is switched
on.
Statement-2: When filament is at room temperature its resistance is less than its resistance when the
bulb is fully illuminated
Q.382 Statement-1: When a battery is supplying power to a circuit, work done by electrostatic forces on
electrolyte ions inside the battery is positive
Statement-2 : Electric field is directed from positive to negative electrode inside a battery
Q.383 For the following situation of (a) and (b), current is same.
 
Statement-1 : In case of figure (a) and (b)  B ·d  for two loops shown will be different.
Statement-2 : In case of figure (a) and (b) magnitude of magnetic field at similar points on amperian
loop may be different.
 r  r
I I
(a) (b)
Q.384 Statement 1 : When lightning strikes a metal pipe, the pipe tends to contract.
Statement 2 : Parallel current attract each other.
(D) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Page # 142
Q.385 Statement-1 : Peak voltage across the resistance can be greater than the peak voltage of the source in
an series LCR circuit.
Statement-2 : Peak voltage across the inductor can be greater than the peak voltage of the source in
an series LCR circuit.
Q.386 Statement-1 : When resistance of rheostat is increased, clockwise current is induced in the ring.
Statement-2 : Magnetic flux through the ring is out of the page and decreasing.
Q.387 Statement-1 : The mutual inductance of two concentric conducting rings of different radii is maximum
if the rings are also coplanar.
Statement-2 : For two coaxial conducting rings of different radii, the magnitude of magnetic flux in one
ring due to current in other ring is maximum when both rings are coplanar.
Q.388 Statement-1 : Position of image approaches focus of a lens, only when object approaches infinity,
Statement-2 : Paraxial rays incident parallel to principal axis intersect at the focus after refraction from
lens.
Q.389 Statement-1 : The image focus (2nd focus) and the object focus (1st focus) for a biconvex lens are on
the opposite side of the lens.
Statement-2 : The centre of curvature of a biconvex lens are on the opposite side of the lens.
Page # 143
Q.390 Statement-1 : Light from an object falls on a concave mirror forming a real image. The complete
system is submerged deep inside water then the image will be formed at the same position
relative to the mirror.
Statement-2 : Formation of image by reflection does not depend on surrounding medium, provided it
is also formed inside surrounding medium.
Q.391 Statement 1: You see a geostationary satellite above the horizon. You desire to communicate with the
satellite by sending a beam of laser light. You should aim your laser slightly higher than
the line of sight of the satellite.
Statement 2: Light bends away from the normal while moving from denser to rarer medium.
Q.392 Statement 1: When the upper half of a converging lens is missing, a real image formed by the lens for
a real object will lack its lower half.
Statement 2: The real image formed by a thin lens for a real object will be always inverted.
Q.393 Statement 1: Paraxial rays are always parallel to the axis of a mirror or lens.
Statement 2: A parallel beam close to principal axis converges at the focal point.
Q.394 Statement 1: Light from two coherent sources that are not in phase does not produce an interference
pattern.
Statement 2: Incoherent sources do not produce a sustained interference pattern.
Q.395 Statement-1 : The quantity of heat in a solid body determines its temperature.
Statement-2 : Whenever heat is supplied to a solid body which is not undergoing phase change the
temperature of the solid body increases.
Page # 144
Q.396 Statement-1 : At a steelworks, molten iron is heated to 1500°C to remove impurities. It is accurate to
say that molten iron contains more heat than solid iron.
Statement-2 : Solid iron at melting point needs to be supplied heat corresponding to its latent heat of
fusion for phase change.
Q.397 Statement -1 : Evaporation cools our body.

Statement -2 : When a body radiates, some energy is lost to the surroundings.
Q.398 Two identical objects A and B are at temperature TA and TB respectively. Both objects are placed in a
room with perfectly absorbing walls maintained at temperature T (TA > T > TB).
Statement-1 : The objects A and B attain the temperature T eventually.
Statement-2 : A only emits radiation while B only absorbs until radiation both attain the temperature T
Q.399 Statement-1 : Colour of a glowing black body changes on increasing its temperature.
Statement-2 : Spectral emissive power associated with each wavelength does not increase in same
proportion on increasing temperature of the Black Body.
Q.400 Statement-1 : Two metallic spheres of same size, one of copper and the other of aluminium, heated to
the same temperature, will cool at the same rate when they are suspended in the same
enclosure.
Statement-2 : The rate of cooling of a body depends on the excess of temperature of the body over
the surroundings.
Q.401 Statement 1 : The smaller the wavelength of a photon, the more energy it has.
Statement 2 : The smaller the wavelength of a photon, the more momentum it has.
Page # 145
Q.402 Statement-1 : If an electron has the same wavelength as a photon, they have the same energy.
Statement-2 : by debroglie hypothesis, p = h/ for both the electron and the photon.
Q.403 Statement-1 : It is easier to remove an orbital electron from an atom, but quite difficult to remove a
nucleon from a nucleus.
Statement-2 : An electron is much lighter than a nucleon.
Page # 146
MULTIPLE OBJECTIVE TYPE
Q.404 The quantity/quantities that does/do not have mass in its/their dimensions (when we take standard 7
quantities as fundmental) is/are :
(A) specific heat (B) latent heat (C) luminous intensity (D) mole
Q.405 Although choice of standard quantity is arbitrary, however several criteria must be met if a standard is
to be useful as possible. choose the correct criteria.
(A) Measurements made at different times using the same standard can be meaningfully compared only
if standard does not vary with time.
(B) Measurements made at different places can be compared if standard is reproducible.
(C) The standard should be safe from all possible causes of damage.
(D) The standard should be readily accessible to every one who needs to use it.
Q.406 A boat is being rowed in a river. Wind is also blowing. Direction of velocity vectors of boat, water and
wind in ground frame are as shown in diagram.


v
vwater
boat

vwind
Mark the correct statement(s)
(A) Direction in which boat is being steered may be represented by arrow
(B) Direction in which boat is being steered may be represented by arrow
(C) Direction in which a flag on the boat may flutter may be represented by arrow
(D) Direction in which a flag on the boat may flutter may be represented by arrow
Q.407 Initially two particles A and B are present at (0,0) and (d,0) respectively. They start moving with speed
V = V î  Vˆj and V = – Vĵ . If R is magnitude of relative separation between them and T be the time
A B 0
when separation between them is minimum, then
d 2d
(A) T0 = (B) Rmin =
5V 5
(C) Graph of R versus time is straight line (D) Graph of R versus time is circle.
Q.408 A projectile is projected on the inclined plane as shown. V1 & V2 are components of it's initial velocity
along the incline and perpendicular to incline. and V3 & V4 are components of it's final velocity along the
incline and perpendicular to incline. {Here we are comparing the magnitudes only}
V3
V2
V4
 V1
(A) V1 > V3 (B) V1 = V3 (C) V2 = V4 (D) V2 > V4
Page # 147
Q.409 The position–time (x–t) graphs for two rabbits A and B moving from their carrot field O to their homes
P and Q respectively along straight line path (taken as x axis) are shown in figure below. Choose the
correct statement(s):
(A) A lives closer to the carrot field than B
(B) A starts from the carrot field earlier than B
(C) A and B have equal average velocities from 0 to t0.
(D) B overtakes A on the way
Q.410 Two balloons are simultaneously released from two buildings A
and B. Balloon from A rises with constant velocity 10 ms–1,
While the other one rises with constant velocity of 20 ms–1.
Due to wind the balloons gather horizontal velocity Vx = 0.5 y,
where 'y' is the height from the point of release. The buildings
are at a distance of 250 m & after some
time 't' the balloons collide.
(A) t = 5 sec.
(B) difference in height of buildings is 100 m
(C) difference in height of buildings is 500
(D) t = 10 sec
ˆ / s and an acceleration of 0.4 ˆi m/s2 , at what time will its
Q.411 A particle has an initial velocity of 4iˆ  4jm
speed be 5 m/s?
(A) 2.5 sec (B) 17.5 sec (C) 7 2 sec (D) 8.5 sec
Q.412 Two inclined planes (I) and (II) have inclination  and  respectively with horizontal,
(where,  +  = 90°) intersect each other at point O as shown in figure. A particle is projected from
point A with velocity u along a direction perpendicular to plane (I). If the particle strikes (II) perpendicu-
larly at B, then : (I) u
B (II)
(A) time of flight = u/g sin  A
(B) time of flight = u/g sin 
(C) distance OB = u2/2g sin 
(D) distance OB = u2/2g sin   
O
Q.413 A rocket drifting sideways in outer spaces from position “a” to position “b” with constant velocity. At
“b”, the rocket’s engine starts to produce a constant thrust at right angles to line “ab”. The engine turns
off again as the rocket reaches some point “c”. Assume that rocket is subjected to no other forces.
a b
• •
v
•c
(A) The path of rocket from point b to c will be

•b
c
•
(B) The path of rocket from point b to c will be
•b
•
(C) The path of rocket beyond c will be

•c
(D) The speed continuously increases from b to c.
Page # 148
Q.414 In the figure shown all the surface are smooth. All the blocks A, B and C are movable, x-axis is horizontal
and y-axis vertical as shown. Just after the system is released from the position as shown.
y
A
 x
B
C

Horizontal Surface
(A) Acceleration of 'A' relative to ground is in negative y-direction
(B) Acceleration of 'A' relative to B is in positive x-direction
(C) The horizontal acceleration of 'B' relative to ground is in negative x-direction
(D) The acceleration of 'C' relative to 'B' is directed along the inclined surface
Q.415 A book leans against a crate on a table. Neither is moving. Which of the following statements concerning
this situation is/are INCORRECT?
(A) The force of the book on the crate is less than that of crate on the book.
(B) Although there is no friction acting on the crate, there must be friction acting
on the book or else it will fall.
(C) The net force acting on the book is zero.
(D) The direction of the frictional force acting on the book is in the same
direction as the frictional force acting on the crate.
Q.416 Figure shows a man pulling on a string attached to a block kept on a rough block surface. Man is heavier
than block. Coefficient of friction is same for both block and man. Subscripts R, B and M denote rope
block and man respectively , taking string to be light. Mark the correct statement(s).

FA / B
Force on Force due to
(A) FR / B  FM / R always.
(B) Block begins to move earlier than man if man continues to increase his pull from zero.
(C) FR / B and FM / R can be action reaction pairs.
(D) Block can remain static if man walks with constant speed while letting string to pass through his
hand.
Q.417 A box is accelerating with acceleration = 20 m/s2. A block of mass 10 kg
placed inside the box and is in contact with the vertical wall as shown.
The friction coefficient between the block and the wall is  = 0.6 and
take g = 10 m/s2
(A) The acceleration of the block will be 20 m/s2
(B) The friction force acting on the block will be 100 N
(C) The contact force between the vertical wall and the block will be 100 5 N
(D) The contact force between the vertical wall and the block is only electromagnetic in nature
Page # 149
Q.418 Consider the following statements, regarding a girl who wants to jump vertically upward from a hard
horizontal floor. Symbolic representation of forces is given below.
  
FM = Force developed in leg muscles, FW = Weight , FN = Normal reaction.
 
(A) Total force on floor is FM  FW .

(B) Resultant force on girl is (– FM ) while girl is in contact with floor..

(C) Floor exerts a force FN on girl.
(D) The harder the girl pushes down, the greater the resulting acceleration of girl.
Q.419 A 10 kg block is at rest as shown on a horizontal surface having a coefficient of static friction of 0.7.
String-1 is horizontal and string-2 makes an angle of 30° with the vertical. A mass M hangs from string-
3. Which of the following statement(s) about this situation is/are true? (g = 10m/s2)
2
(A) The largest possible tension in string 1 is 70 N 10 kg
1 30°
(B) The ratio T1/T3 is equal to tan 30°
(C) The largest possible value of M is approximately 12 kg 3
(D) It is impossible to determine the largest possible value of M
M
Q.420 Monkey (1) is climbing up a light rope with acceleration of a1 = 2 m/s2 and monkey (2) is climbing upto
the same rope with acceleration of a2 m/s2. Choose incorrect options.
(1)
m1 = 50 kg
(2)
m2 = 50 kg
(A) Tension is same in all parts of rope. (B) a1 must be equal to a2

(C) a2 must be zero. (D) Two monkeys can have different velocities.
Q.421 A particle of mass m is going along surface of smooth hemisphere of radius R in vertical plane. At the
moment shown its speed is v. Choose correct option(s).
v2 mv 2
(A) mg – Ncos = m(gsin2 – cos) (B) N– mgcos=
R R
mv 2 v2
(C) mg – Nsin = (D) Nsin = m(gsincos – sin)
R R
Q.422 Block m1 is projected on a long plank of mass m2. Plank is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. There
is friction between block and plank, coefficient of friction is µ. Block m1 has initial velocity v01 and plank
has initial velocity v02 with (v01 > v02). Which of following graphs is correct.
m1 v01
m2 v02
a v a
(1) v
+µk m1 g v01 v01 +µk m1 g (2)
m2 (1) m2
(A) t (B) (C) (D) t
–µkg v02 v02 (2) –µkg
(2) t t (1)
Page # 150
Q.423 An object of mass m is slowly pushed some partway up a vertical loop ending at a point a height h < R
above the bottom. The coefficient of friction between the object and the track is a constant µ. Find work
that has to be done against friction.
(A) 2 mg (2hR – h2)1/2
(B) mg (hR – 2h2)1/2
h
(C) 4 mg (2hR – h2)1/2
(D) mg (2hR – h2)1/2 smooth part
Q.424 A block of mass 1kg kept on a rough horizontal surface (µ = 0.4) is attached to a light spring (force
constant = 200 N/m) whose other end is attached to a vertical wall. The block is pushed to compress the
spring by a distance d and released. Find the value(s) of 'd' for which (spring + block) system loses its
entire mechanical energy in form of heat.
(A) 4cm (B) 6cm (C) 8cm (D) 10 cm
Q.425 Consider the situation in which smooth ball of mass M is hanging in equilibrium with a string and a spring
as shown in figure. If another small ball of mass m collides it than which of the following are correct
statement(s)
FT = is tension force due to inextensible string.
FG = is gravitational force m
FT
FS = is spring force M
FN = is normal force due to collision between m and M. FS FG
(A) Tension force due to inextensible string FT is impulsive force
k
(B) Spring force FS is non impulsive force
(C) Gravitational force FG is conservative force
(D) Normal force due to collision between m and M, FN is contact force
LN
B
A
Q.426 Two identical blocks A and B are placed on two inclined planes
as shown in diagram. Neglect air resistance and friction h h
Read the following statement and choose the correct options
Statement I : Kinetic energy of 'A' on sliding to J will be Fixed Fixed
greater than the kinetic energy of B on falling vertically to M. J l K M 2l O
Statement II : Acceleration of 'A' will be greater than acceleration of 'B' when both are released to
slide on inclined planes.
Statements III : Work done by external agent to move block slowly from position B to O is negative
(A) Statement I is true (B) Statement II is true
(C) Statement III is true (D) No statement is true
Q.427 A particle initially at rest on a smooth horizontal surface, is acted on by a constant horizontal force at time
t = 0. Then if W = work done, t = time and v = speed of the particle, the nearly correct graph (s) is/are
W W
(A) (B)
O O
O t O v
2
v W
(C) (D)
O 2
O 2
O t  O t 
Page # 151
Q.428 A particle of mass m suspended by a string of length l revolves in a horizontal circle ( is the angle the
string makes with vertical). Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
lg sin 2 
(A) Tension in string = mg cos  (B) Speed v of particle =
cos θ
l cos θ F sin 
(C) Period T = 2 (D) Centripetal acceleration a = where F is
g m
tension
Q.429 For a curved track of radius R, banked at angle (Take v0 = Rg tan  )
(A) a vehicle moving with a speed v0 is able to negotiate the curve without calling friction into play at all
(B) a vehicle moving with any speed V > V0 is always able to negotiate the curve, with friction called into
play
(C) a vehicle moving with any speed V < V0 must have the force of friction into play
(D) the minimum value of the angle of banking for a vehicle parked on the banked road can stay there
without slipping, is given by  = tan–1 µ0 (µ0 = coefficient of static friction)
Q.430 On a train moving along east with a constant speed v, a boy revolves a bob with string of length  on
smooth surface of a train, with equal constant speed v relative to train. Mark the correct option(s).
v
v
(A) Maximum speed of bob is 2v in ground frame.

4mv 2
(B) Tension in string connecting bob is at an instant.

mv 2
(C) Tension in string is at all the moments

(D) Minimum speed of bob is zero in ground frame.
Q.431 A heavy particle is attached to one end of a string 1m long whose other end is fixed at O. It is projected
from its lowest position horizontally with a velocity V :
(A) If V2 > 5g the particle will describe complete circular motion in the vertical plane
(B) If V2 = 3.5 g the tension in the string will become zero after the string has turned through 120°
(C) If V2 = 2g, the tension in the string becomes zero the velocity of the particle also becomes zero
(D) If V2 = g the velocity of the particle becomes zero after the string turns through 60°
Q.432 A chain of length L and mass per unit length  is piled on a horizontal surface. One end of the chain is
lifted vertically with constant velocity by a force P.
(A) P as a function of height x of the end above the surface will be (gx + v2)
(B) no energy will loss in this process.
1
(C) work done by force will be gL2 + v2 L
2
1
(D) loss in energy gLv2
2
Page # 152
Q.433 Two students were given a physics problem for finding maximum extension of spring if blocks are im-
parted velocities v1 & v2 when spring is unstretched.
1 1
v1 m m v2
by Student A : m (v1 + v2)2 = kx2
2 2
1 1 1
by Student B : mv12 + mv22 = kx2
2 2 2
(A) Student A is correct, Student B is wrong (B) Student B is correct, Student A is wrong
(C) both are correct (D) both are wrong
Q.434 Consider a cart of mass M on a frictionless surface that can hold a full
tank of water with mass M. A fire-hose sprays water with a constant
ejection
dm
speed Vw at a constant mass rate r = and at an angle  relative to
dt
the horizontal.
V r cos 
(A) The acceleration at any time t of the cart while it is spraying water is given by w
M  rt
 M  V rt cos 
(B) The speed of the cart as a function of time  t   is w
 r  M  rt
 M
(C) The speed of the cart as a function of time  t   is Vw cos ln (M  rt )
 r 
(D) The external horizontal force that must be applied to keep the cart stationary while spraying water is
rVwcos
Q.435 Two blocks A and B of the same mass are connected to a light spring and placed on a smooth horizontal
surface. B is given velocity v0 (as shown in the figure) when the spring is in natural length. In the subsequent
motion.
(A) the maximum velocity of B will be v0
(B) as seen from ground, A can move towards right only
(C) the spring will have maximum extension when A and B both stop
(D) the spring will be at natural length again when B is at rest
Q.436 Two masses M and 3M collide on a horizontal frictionless surface as shown. Before the collision the
mass M has a velocity V1 in the y-direction. The mass 3M has a velocity (5/12)V0 making an angle  to
the x-axis as shown. After the collision the mass 3M comes to rest and the mass M moves along the x-
axis with the velocity V1' . (Given sin = 3/5) Neglect gravity..
y
5V
3M 0
12
 3M M
x x
V1
Before After
V1
M
3
(A) The speed V1 of mass M before collision is V
4 0
V0
(B) The speed V1 of mass M before collision is
4
V0
(C) The speed V1' of mass M after collision is
2
(D) The speed V1' of mass M after collision is V0
Page # 153
Q.437 Object A strikes the stationary object B with a certain give speed u head-on in an elastic
collision. The mass of A is fixed, you may only choose the mass of B appropriately for following cases.
Then after the collision :
(A) for B to have the greatest speed, choose mB = mA
(B) for B to have the greatest momentum, choose mB << mA
(C) for B to have the greatest speed, choose mB << mA
(D) for B to have the greatest kinetic energy, choose mB = mA
Q.438 Two equal uniform rods P and Q move with the same velocity v
as shown in the figure. The second rod has an angular velocity
 (<6v/l ) (clockwise) about G' in addition to v.
(A) If the ends A and A' are suddenly fixed simultaneously both
rods will rotate with the same angular velocity
(B) If the ends A and A' are suddenly fixed simultaneously, the rod Q will rotate with greater angular
velocity
(C) If the ends B and B' are suddenly fixed simultaneously both rods will rotate with the same angular
velocity
(D) If the ends B and B' are suddenly fixed simultaneously, the rod P will rotate with greater angular
velocity
Q.439 A uniform rod AB of length 7 m is undergoing combined rotational and 11m/s A
translational motion such that, at some instant of time, velocities of end point
A and centre C are both perpendicular to the rod and opposite in direction,
having magnitude 11 m/s and 3 m/s respectively as shown in the figure. Velocity
C 3m/s
of centre C and
angular velocity of the rod remains constant
(A) acceleration of point A is 56 m/s2
(B) acceleration of point B is 56 m/s2 B
(C) at the instant shown in the figure acceleration of point B is more than that of point A.
(D) angular velocity of the rod is 4 rad/sec
Q.440 A uniform thin flat isolated disc is floating in space. It has radius R and
R
mass m. A force F is applied to it a distance d = from the center in y
2
the y-direction. Treat this problem as two-dimensional. At the instant R
F
shown the : d x
(A) acceleration of the center of the disc is F/m.
(B) angular acceleration of the disk is F/mR.
(C) acceleration of leftmost point on the disc is zero
(D) point which is instantaneously unaccelerated is the rightmost point.
Page # 154
Q.441 A massless spool of inner radius r, outer radius R is placed against vertical wall and tilted split floor as
shown. A light inextensible thread is tightly wound around the spool through which a mass m is hanging.
There exists no friction at point A, while the coefficient of friction between spool and point B is µ. The
angle between two surfaces is .
g R
r
C
B
A

O
m
(A) the magnitude of force on the spool at B in order to maintain equilibrium is
2 2
r  r 1
mg    1  
 R   R  tan 2 
 r 1
(B) the magnitude of force on the spool at B in order to maintain equilibrium is mg1  
 R  tan 
cot 
(C) the minimum value of µ for the system to remain in equilibrium is
(R / r )  1
tan 
(D) the minimum value of µ for the sysem to remain in equilibrium is
(R / r )  1
Q.442 A constant external torque  acts for a very brief period t on a rotating system having moment of inertia I.
(A) The angular momentum of the system will change by t.

t
(B) The angular velocity of the system will change by
I
(t ) 2
(C) If the system was intially at rest, it will acquire rotational kinetic energy
2I
2
(t )
(D) The kinetic energy of the sytem will change by
I
Q.443 Which of the following statements is/are true
(A) work done by kinetic friction on a rigid body may be positive
(B) a uniform sphere rolls up an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the
incline. (only contact force and gravitational force is acting)
(C) a uniform sphere rolls down an inclined plane without sliding. The friction force on it will be up the
incline. (only contact force and gravitational force is acting)
(D) a uniform sphere is left from rest from the top of a rough inclined plane. It moves down the plane with
slipping. The friction force on it will be up the incline.
Q.444 A horizontal rod of mass 'M' and length 'L' is tied to two vertical string
symmetrically as shown in the figure. One of the strings at end Q is cut
at t = 0 and the rod starts rotating about the other end P. Then
(A) At t = 0, angular acceleration of rod about P is 3g/2L.
(B) At t = 0, angular acceleration of rod about C.M. of rod is 3g/2L. P Q
(C) At t = 0, acceleration of C.M. of rod is 3g/4 in downward direction.
(D) At t = 0, tension in the string at P is Mg/4.
Page # 155
Q.445 A particle of mass m is suspended from point O and undergoes circular motion in horizontal plane as
conical pendulum as shown in figure.
(A) Angular momentum of particle about point of suspension does not remains
constant.
(B) Angular momentum of particle about centre of circle remains constant.
2mg tan 
(C) Average force during half rotation is

(D) Average torque about axis OC during half rotation is zero

Q.446 A particle is moving with constant momentum P along line MN as shown in figure. Line AB is parallel to
MN. Mark the correct statements
y
B

P
45° x
O
N
(A) Angular momentum of particle about any point on line MN is zero.

(B) For any reference point on line AB angular momentum vector of particle is constant.
(C) For any reference point in xy-plane in third quadrant angular momentum vector of the particle is in
positive z direction
(D) For any reference point in xy-plane in third quadrant angular momentum vector of the particle is in
negative z direction
Q.447 Two wheels A and B are released from rest from points X and Y respectively on an inclined plane as
shown in the figure. Which of the following statement(s) is/are incorrect?
(A) wheel B takes twice as much time to roll from Y to Z than that of wheel A
from X to Z
(B) at point Z velocity of wheel A is four times that of wheel b
(C) acceleration of the wheel A is twice that of the wheel B
(D) both wheel take same time to arrive at point Z
Q.448 The system shown in the figure can move on a smooth surface. The spring is initially compressed by
6 cm and then released .
K=800 N/m
3kg 6kg

(A) the particles perform SHM with time period sec
10
(B) the block of mass 3 kg perform SHM with amplitude 4 cm
(C) the block of mass 6 kg will have maximum momentum 2.40 kg m/s
(D) none of these
Page # 156
Q.449 Initially spring is compressed by x0 and blocks are in contact when system is released , then block starts
moving and after some time contact between blocks breaks , then
k A B
smooth
M1 M2
(A) Blocks will separated at natural length of spring.

m1
(B) After seperation block A perform SHM of amplitude x0 .
m1  m 2
k
(C) After seperation maximum velocity of block A is x 0 .
m1  m 2
(D) After separation block A will perform SHM of amplitude x0.
Q.450 Three simple harmonic motions in the same direction having each of amplitude "a" and the same period
are superposed. If each differs in phase from the next by /4 then
(A) Resultant amplitude is (2 + 1)a
(B) Phase of resultant motion relative to first is 90°
(C) The energy associated with the resulting motion is (3 + 22) time the energy associated with any
single motion
(D) Maximum speed of resultant SHM will be more than double of the initial SHM's
Q.451 Starting from the mean position a body oscillates simple harmonically with a period of 2 s.
1
(A) Its kinetic energy will become 75% of the total energy after s
6
1
(B) Its kinetic energy will become 75% of the total energy after s
12
1
(C) Magnitude of its momentum will become half of initial after s
3
1
(D) Magnitude of its momentum will become half of initial after s
6
Q.452 A spring mass system is hanging from the ceiling of an elevator in equilibrium. The elevator suddenly
starts accelerating upwards with acceleration a, consider all the options in the reference frame of elevator.
1 k
(A) the frequency of oscillation is
2 m
ma
(B) the amplitude of the resulting SHM is
k
m (g  a )
(C) amplitude of resulting SHM is
k
 m
(D) maximum speed of block during oscillation is  k a
 
Page # 157
Q.453 Two point objects of masses m and 4m are at rest at an infinite separation. They move towards each
other under mutual gravitational attraction. If G is the universal gravitational constant, then at a separa-
tion r
(A) the total mechanical energy of the two objects is zero
10Gm
(B) their relative velocity is
r
4 Gm 2
(C) the total kinetic energy of the objects is
r
(D) their relative velocity is zero.
Q.454 A solid sphere of uniform density and radius 4 units is located with its
centre at the origin O of coordinates. Two spheres of equal radii 1 unit,
with their centres at A (– 2, 0, 0) and B (2, 0, 0) respectively are taken
out of the solid leaving behind spherical cavities as shown
in figure.
(A) the gravitational force due to this object at the origin is zero
(B) the gravitational force at the point B (2, 0, 0) is zero
(C) the gravitational potential is the same at all points of the circle y2 + z2 = 36
(D) the gravitational potential is the same at all points of the circle y2 + z2 = 4
Q.455 The spherical planets have the same mass but densities in the ratio 1 : 8. For these planets, the
(A) acceleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 4 : 1
(B) acceleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 1 : 4
(C) escape velocities from their surfaces will be in the ratio 2 : 1
(D) escape velocities from their surfaces will be in the ratio 1 : 2
Q.456 A particle at a distance r from the centre of a uniform spherical planet of mass M radius R (< r) has a
velocity of magnitude v.
GM
(A) for 0 < v < trajectory may be ellipse
r
GM
(B) for v = trajectory may be ellipse
r
GM 2GM
(C) for v trajectory may be ellipse.
r r
GM
(D) for v = trajectory may be circle
r
Q.457 In a solid sphere two small symmetrical cavities are created whose centres lie on a diameter AB of
sphere on opposite sides of the centre.
(A) The gravitational field at the centre of the sphere is zero.
(B) The gravitational potential at the centre remains unaffected if cavitiesare not present
(C) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane of diameter AB.
(D) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane perpendicular to the diameter AB.
Page # 158
Q.458 Curved surface of a vessel has shape of a truncated cone having semi
vertex angle 37°. Vessel is full of water (density  = 1000 kg/m3) upto a
height of 13 cm and is placed on a smooth horizontal plane. Upper surface
is opened to atmosphere. A hole of 1.5 cm2 is made on curved wall at a
height of 8 cm from bottom as shown in figure. Area of water surface in the
vessel is large as compared to the area of hole.
(A) Initial velocity of efflux is 1 m/sec
(B) Initial horizontal range of water jet from point B is 6.65 cm
(C) Horizontal force required to keep the vessel in static equilibrium is 0.15 N
(D) Horizontal force required to keep the vessel in static equilibrium is 0.12 N.
Q.459 A solid sphere of mass m, suspended through a string in a liquid as shown. The string has some tension.
Magnitudes of net force due to liquid on upper hemisphere and that on lower hemisphere are FA and FB
respectively. Which of the following is / are true.
(A) Density of material of the sphere is greater than density of liquid
(B) Difference of FB and FA is dependent of atmospheric pressure
(C) FB – FA = mg
(D) FB–FA < mg
Q.460 The mass of block is m1 and that of liquid with the vessel is m2. The block is suspended by a string
(tension T) partially in the liquid. The reading of the weighing machine placed below the vessel
(A) can be (m1 + m2)g (B) can be greater than (m1 + m2)g
(C) is equal to (m1g + m2g – T) (D) can be less than (m1 + m2) g
Q.461 A body floats on water and also on an oil of density 1.25. Which of the following is/are true?
(A) The body loses more weight in oil than in water
(B) The volume of water displaced is 1.25 times that of oil displaced.
(C) The body experiences equal upthrust from water and oil
(D) to make the body just sink, one will need 1.25 times load in case of oil than in case of water
Q.462 Each of the following system begins moving upwards with a constant acceleration. Select these cases in
which quantity will change due to this upward acceleration :
(A) time period of simple pendulum.
(B) fraction of floating body submerged in a liquid.
(C) time period of a spring block system.
(D) pressure on the base of a container containing liquid.
Q.463 Water jet coming out of a stationary horizontal tube at speed v strikes horizontally a massive wall moving
in opposite direction with same speed. Water comes to rest relative to wall after striking. Treating A as
cross-section of jet and density of water as . Select the correct alternative(s)
(A) force exerted on the wall is 2Av2
(B) force exerted on the wall is 4Av2
(C) rate of change of kinetic energy of water jet striking the wall is 8Av3
(D) rate of change of kinetic energy of water jet striking the wall is zero.
Page # 159
Q.464 Consider standing wave formed due to superposition of two plane waves having the same amplitude,
frequency and moving in opposite direction. Mark the correct statements :
(A) the energy of a standing wave transforms completely into potential energy and at some other instant
into kinetic energy during a part of complete cycle.
(B) kinetic energy and potential energy attain their maximum and minimum values simultaneously
(C) there is transition of energy from each node to its adjacent antinodes and back.
(D) the time averaged energy flux in any cross section of the wave is zero.
Q.465 In a resonance tube experiment, an 80 cm air column is in resonance with a turning fork in first overtone.
Which equation can represent correct pressure variation in the air column
(x = 0 is the top point of the tube, neglect end correction, speed of sound = 320 m/sec)
15 15
(A) A sin x cos 600t (B) A cos x sin 600 t
8 8
15 15
(C) A cos x sin 300 t (D) A sin x sin 300 t
8 8
Q.466 Two particles of a medium disturbed by the wave propagation are at x1 = 0 and x2 = 1 cm. The wave is
propagating in positive x-direction. The displacement of the particles is given by the equation:
y1 = (2sin3t)cm and y2 = 2sin(3t – /8)cm (t is in seconds)
(A) The frequency of wave is 1.5 Hz
(B) Wavelength of the wave can be 16 cm.
(C) Velocity of the wave can be 24 cm/s
 2 
(D) Wave equation can be y = (2) sin  (24 t  x ) cm.
 16 
Q.467 The particle displacement of a travelling longitudional wave is represented by  =  (x, t). The midpoints
of a compression zone and an adjacent rarefaction zone are represented by the letter ‘C’ and ‘R’. Which
of the following is true?
(A) |/ x|C = |/ x|R
(B) |/ t|C = |/ t|R = 0
(C) (pressure)C – (pressure)R = 2 |/ x|C x Bulk modulus of air.
(D) Particles of air are stationary mid-way between ‘C’ and ‘R’.
Q.468 A gas is filled in an organ pipe and it is sounded in fundamental mode. Choose the correct statement(s)
: (T = constant)
(A) If gas is changed from H2 to O2, the resonant frequency will increase
(B) If gas is changed from O2 to N2, the resonant frequency will increase
(C) If gas is changed from N2 to He, the resonant frequency will decrease
(D) If gas is changed from He to CH4, the resonant frequency will decrease
 2x1   x 
Q.469 Two coherent waves represented by y1 = A sin   t   and y = A sin  2 2  t   are
  4 2
  6
superposed. The two waves will produce
23
(A) constructive interference at (x1–x2) =2 (B) constructive interference at (x1–x2) = 
24
11
(C) destructive interference at (x1–x2) =1.5 (D) destructive interference at (x1–x2) = 
24
Page # 160
Q.470 Which of the following actions would make a pulse travel faster along a stretched string ?
(A) Move your hand up and down more quickly as you generate the pulse.
(B) Use a heavier string of the same length, under the same tension.
(C) Use a lighter string of the same length, under the same tension.
(D) Stretch the string tighter to increase the tension.
Q.471 A wave equation which gives the displacement along the y direction is given by
y = 10–4 sin (60t + 2x), where x and y are in meters and t is time in seconds. This represents a wave
(A) travelling with a velocity of 30 ms–1 in the negative x direction.
(B) of wavelength  m
(C) of frequency 30/ Hz
(D) of amplitude 10–4 m
Q.472 A hollow copper sphere & a hollow copper cube , of same surface area & negligible thickness, are filled
with warm water of same temperature and placed in an enclosure of constant temperature, a few degrees
below that of the bodies. Then in the beginning
(A) the rate of energy lost by the sphere is greater than that by the cube
(B) the rate of energy lost by the two are equal
(C) the rate of energy lost by the sphere is less than that by the cube
(D) the rate of fall of temperature for sphere is less than that for the cube.
Q.473 A thin cylindrical metal rod is bent into a ring with a small gap as shown
in figure. On heating the system
(A)  decreases, r and d increases (B)  increases
(C) d & r increases (D)  is constant,
Q.474 The extension produced in a wire of length L when under tension T is l.
One of the notes emitted by the wire when it is used in sonometer is (d
= density, Y = Young's modulus, mass per unit length = , area = A)
2 Yl 2 Yl 1 AYl 1 AYl
(A) f = (B) f = (C) f = (D) f =
3L3 / 2 d 3/ 2
L d 2L L 4L L
Q.475 A uniform cylinder of steel of mass M, radius R is placed on frictionless bearings and set to rotate about
its axis with angular velocity 0. After the cylinder has reached the specified state of rotation, it is heated
I
from temperature T0 to (T0 + T ) without any mechanical contact . If is the fractional change in
I

moment of inertia of the cylinder and  be the fractional change in the angular velocity of the cylinder
0
and  be the coefficient of linear expansion, then
I 2 R I 2  I 2R
(A)  (B) I   (C)   2T (D) 
I R 0 0 I R
Q.476 A U-tube filled with a liquid of volumetric expansion coefficient 10–5/°C lies in a vertical plane. The
height of liquid column in the left vertical limb is 100 cm. The liquid in the left vertical limb is maintained
at a temperature = 0°C while the liquid in the right limb is maintained at a temperature = 100°C. The
difference in levels in the two limbs is
(A) 0.1 cm (B) 0.2 cm (C) 0.2 mm (D) zero
Page # 161
Q.477 Due to thermal expansion, with rise in temperature
(A) metallic scale reading becomes lesser than true value ( of the metal is greater than  of the object)
(B) Pendulum clock becomes slower
(C) A floating body sinks a little more (assuming temperature of liquid remains unchanged)
(D) The apparent weight of a body in a liquid may decrease (assuming temperature of liquid remains
unchanged)
Q.478 Which of the following statements is/are correct?

(A) A real gas approaches perfect gas behaviour at high temperature and low pressure
(B) Molecules of ideal gas possess only translational kinetic energy at all temperatures
(C) An ideal gas would never condense into the liquid state
(D) The average translational kinetic energy per molecule at any given temperature is independent of the
type of ideal gas
Q.479 One mole of monoatomic gas is taken through cyclic process shown below. TA = 300 K. Process AB is
defined as PT = constant.
P
B C
3P0
P0 A
(A) Work done in process AB is –400 R.

(B) Change in internal energy in process CA is 900 R.
(C) Heat transferred in the process BC is 2000 R.
(D) Change in internal energy in process CA is –900 R.
Q.480 A metal cylinder of mass 0.5 kg is heated electrically by a 12 W heater in a room at 15°C. The cylinder
temperature rises uniformly to 25°C in 5 min and finally becomes constant at 45°C. Assuming that the
rate of heat loss is proportional to the excess temperature over the surroundings,
(A) the rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 20°C is 2W
(B) the rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 45°C is 12W
(C) the rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 20°C is 5W.
(D) the rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 45°C is 30W.
Q.481 Four identical rods which have thermally insulated lateral surfaces are
joined at point A. Points B,C,D & E are connected to large reservoirs.
If heat flows into the junction from point B at rate of 1 W and from point
C at 3 W inside, flows out from D at 5 W, which relation(s) is/are
correct for temperature of these
points ?
(A) TA < TE (B) TB = TC (C) TC > TD (D) TB = TE
Page # 162
Q.482 Which of the following quantities is the same for all ideal gases at the same temperature?
(A) the total translational kinetic energy of the molecules in 1 mole gas
(B) the kinetic energy of 1 gm
(C) the number of molecules in 1 mole
(D) the number of molecules in 1 gm
Q.483 Figure represents on the log–log scale pressure (P) dependence of
adiabatic compressibility (K) of two gasses. Mark the correct option/s.
(A) Line 1 & 2 may represent monoatomic and diatomic gas respectively.
(B) Line 1 & 2 may represent diatomic and monoatomic gasses respectively.
(C) Degree of freedom for the gas represented by line 1 is more than the degree
of freedom for line 2.
(D) Degree of freedom for the gas represented by line 2 is more than the degree of freedom for line 1.
 7  4
Q.484 Two moles of O2     at temperature T0 and 3 moles of CO2     at temperature 2T0 are
 5  3
allowed to mix together in a rigid closed adiabatic vessel. The resulting mixture finally comes in thermal
equilibrium. Then,
23T0 31T0
(A) final temperature of the mixture is (B) final temperature of the mixture is
14 19
14 19
(C) adiabatic exponent of the mixture formed is (D) adiabatic exponent of the mixture formed is
5 14
Q.485 In the given cyclic process from c to b 40 J heat is exchanged. From b to a, 130 J heat is exchanged, and
work done is 80 J. From a to c, 400 J heat is exchanged, then : P
c
(A) Work done in process a to c is 310 J
(B) Net work done in cycle is 230 J
(C) Net change in internal energy in cycle is 130 J a b
(D) Efficiency of cycle 57.5% V
Q.486 An insulating cylinder contains equal volumes of He and O2 separated by a massless freely moving
adiabatic piston as shown. The gas is compressed by moving the insulating piston so that volume of He
becomes half. Select the correct alternative(s).
L L
O2 He
Area = A
(A) Pressure in He chamber will be equal to pressure in O2 chamber

(B) Pressure in He chamber will be less then pressure in O2 chamber
(C) Volume of He chamber will be equal to volume of O2 chamber
(LA )
(D) Volume of O2 chamber will be .
(2) 25 / 21
Page # 163
Q.487 The following figure shows a block of mass m suspended from a fixed point by
means of a vertical spring. The block is oscillating simple harmonically and carries
a charge q. There also exists a uniform electric field in the region. Consider four
mg
different cases. The electric field is zero, in case-1, downward in case-2, k
q
mg 2mg
upward in case-3 and downward in case-4. The speed at mean
q q
m,q
position is same in all cases.
Select the correct alternative(s).
(A) Time periods of oscillation are equal in case-1 and case-3
(B) Amplitudes of displacement are same in case-2 and case-3
(C) The maximum elongation (increment in length from natural length) is maximum in case-4.
(D) Time periods of oscillation are equal in case-2 and case-4
Q.488 Two large thin conducting plates with small gap in between are placed
in a uniform electric field ‘E’ (perpendicular to the plates). Area of each +Q –Q
plate is A and charges +Q and –Q are given to these plates as shown in
the figure. If points R,S and T as shown in the figure are three points in R S T
space, then the
(A) field at point R is E (B) field at point S is E E

 Q   Q 
(C) field at point T is  E   A  (D) field at point S is  E  A  
 0   0
Q.489 A fixed point charge Q is at origin. At t = 0, a charge q with mass m is at x = a with leftward velocity V0
kQq
which satisfies = 3m V02 . The particle turns around and starts to move rightward at the position
a
b < a.
(A) the ratio b/a is 6/7 (B) the ratio b/a is 3/7
(C) the velocity of the particle at a large distance from the origin is 7 V0
(D) the velocity of the particle at a large distance from the origin is zero
Q.490 How does the total energy stored in the capacitors in the circuit shown in the figure change when first
switch K1 is closed (process-1) and then switch K2 is also closed (process-2). Assume that all capacitor
were initially uncharged ?
C C C
K2
C K1
U
(A) Increases in process-1

(B) Increases in process-2
(C) Decreases in process-2
(D) Magnitude of change in process-2 is less than that in process-1
Page # 164
Q.491 In the circuit shown, some potential difference is applied between A and B. If C is joined to D
(A) no charge will flow between C and D
(B) some charge will flow between C and D
(C) the equivalent capacitance between A and B will not change
(D) the equivalent capacitance between A and B will change.
Q.492 How does the total energy stored in the capacitors in the circuit shown in the figure change when first
switch K1 is closed (process-1) and then switch K2 is also closed (process-2). Assume that all capacitor
were initially uncharged ?
C C C
K2
C K1
U
(A) Increases in process-1

(B) Increases in process-2
(C) Decreases in process-2
(D) Magnitude of change in process-2 is less than that in process-1
Q.493 Figure shows an arrangement of four identical rectangular plates A, B, C and D each of area S. Find the
charges appearing on each face (from left to right) of the plates. Ignore the separation between the plates
in comparison to the plate dimensions.
a b c
+Q1 +Q2
A B C D
(A) Potential difference between plastes A & B is independent of Q1.

(B) Potential difference between plastes C & D is independent of Q1.
(C) Potential difference between plastes A & B is independent of Q2.
(D) Potential difference between plastes C & D is independent of Q2.
Q.494 For the given circuit, select the correct alternative(s)

C C
2 3 4
15C
(A) The equivalent capacitance between points 1 & 2 is
11
C C C
5C
(B) The equivalent capacitance between points 3 & 6 is
3 5
1 6
C C
15C
(C) The equivalent capacitance between points 1 & 3 is
14
14C
(D) The equivalent capacitance between points 3 & 5is 15
Page # 165
Q.495 A capacitor of capacity C0 is connected to a battery of emf V0. When steady state is attained a dielectric
slab of dielectric constant K is slowly introduced in the capacitor to fill the capacitor completely. Mark
the correct statement(s), in final stady state.
(A) Magnitude of induced charge on the each surface of slab is C0V0(K – 1)
(B) Electric force due to induced charges on any plate is zero.
K (C 0 V0 ) 2
(C) Force of attraction between plates of capacitor is
2 0 A
(K  1)C 0 V0
(D) Field due to induced charges in dielectric slab is 0 A
Q.496 A dielectric slab fills the space between the plates of a parallel-plate capacitor. The magnitude of the
bound charge on the slab is 75% of the magnitude of the free charge on the plates. The capacitance is
480µF and the maximum charge that can be stored on the capacitor is 2400L2 Emax, where Emax is the
breakdown field.
(A) the dielectric constant for the dielectric slab is 4
(B) without the dielectric, the capacitance of the capacitor would be 360µF.
(C) the plate area is 60 L2.
(D) if the dielectric slab is having the same area as the capacitor plate but the width half that of the
capacitor, the capacitance would be 192µF.
Q.497 A galvanometer has a resistance of 96  and full scale deflection of 100 A. It can be used as ammeter
provided a resistance is added to it. Pick up the correct range and resistance combination(s)
(A) 1.3 mA range with 25 K resistance in parallel
(B) 1.3 mA range with 8  resistance in parallel
(C) 2.5 mA range with 2.5  resistance in parallel.
(D) 2.5 mA range with 4 resistance in parallel
Q.498 When a galvanometer is shunted with 4 resistance, the deflection is reduced to one fifth. If the
galvanometer is further shunted with 2 wire, the deflection will be (the main current remains the same)
5
(A) of the deflection when shunted with 4 only
9
5
(B) of the deflection when shunted with 4 only
13
1
(C) of the original deflection only
13
1
(D) of the original deflection only
9
Q.499 In the circuit shown, which of the following statements is correct?
(A) When S is open, charge on C1 is 36 C
(B) When S is open, charge on C2 is 36 C
(C) When S is closed, the charges on C1 and C2 do not change
(D) When S is closed, charges on both C1 and C2 change
Q.500 In the circuit shown, capacitor is initially uncharged the switch is turned 2K
on at t = 0. Then, R1 10F
(A) at t = 0, current supplied by battery is 4 mA +
12V R2
(B) at t = 0, current in R3 is 2 mA – 2K
(C) in the steady state current supplied by battery is 3 mA 2K R3
(D) in the steady state current in R3 is zero

Page # 166
Q.501 In the circuit shown there is steady state with the switch closed. The switch is opened at t = 0. Choose
the correct option(s). (Given :  = 24V, C1 = 3F and C2 = 2F)
3
9 C1

S
C2 6
(A) The voltage across C1 before the switch is open is 12V.

(B) The voltage across C1 after a long time after the switch is open is 12V.
(C) The voltage across C2 after a long time after the switch is open is 24V.
(D) The voltage across C2 before the switch is open is 8V.
Q.502 In the circuit shown R1 = R2 = 10  and resistance per unit length of wire PQ = 1/cm and length PQ
=10 cm. If R2 is made 20  the to get zero deflection in galvanometer. S is midpoint of wire PQ.
R1 R2
12V
P Q
S
G
(A) The jockey at P can be moved towards right 2 cm.
(B) The jockey at Q can be moved towards right 2 cm.
(C) The jockey at S can be moved towards left a distance 5/3 cm.
(D) The jockey at all positions fixed and R1 should be made 20 
Q.503 An electric box contains three e.m.f. sources as shown in the figure
1
(A) emf of the electric box is V
3
(B) point B is at higher potential than point A
5
(C) internal resistance of the box is 
3
4
(D) terminal voltage for 2V source is V
3
Q.504 Two batteries A and B and three resistors are connected. Internal resistance of both batteries is 1  each
as shown. EMF of battery B is 5 V The potential difference between P and Q is zero. Which of following
is/are TRUE
(A) the current through 5  is 3 A
(B) the current through the battery A is 8 A
(C) the emf of the source A is 47 V
(D) the p.d. between O and P is 8 V
Page # 167
Q.505 For the circuit shown, the ammeter reading is initially I. The switch in the circuit then is closed.
Consequently: (Battery and ammeter are ideal).
(A) the ammeter reading decreases

(B) the potential difference between E and F increases
(C) the potential difference between E and F stays the same
(D) bulb 3 lights up more brightly
Q.506 Figure shows crossection view of a infinite cylindrical wire with a cavity, current density is uniform

j   j0 k̂ as shown in figure.
×× ×
× ×
× ×
×  x
× × × a
× ×
× × ×
(A) magnetic field inside cavity is uniform.


(B) magnetic field inside cavity is along a .

(C) magnetic field inside cavity is perpendicular to a
(D) If an electron is projected with velocity v0 ˆj inside the cavity it will move undeviated.
Q.507 Figure shows a square current carrying coil of edge length L. The magnetic field on the coil is given by
 B y B x
B  0 î  0 ĵ where B0 is a positive constant.
L L
y i
1
(A) If coil is free to rotate about x axis torque on the coil is given by iAB0 î .
2
1
(B) If coil is free to rotate about y - axis torque on coil is given by  iAB0 ĵ .
2
(C) Resultant force on coil is zero.
 
(D) Equation for the torque µ  B where µ is magnetic moment of coil is not valid on the coil.
Page # 168
Q.508 Charge is sprayed onto a large non conducting belt above the left hand roller.
The belt carries charge with a uniform surface charge density , as it moves with
a speed v between the rollers as shown. The charge is removed by a wiper at
right hand roller. For a point just above the sheet mark the
correct option.
0 v
(A) magnetic field is , out of the plane of the page, parallel to axis of roller..
2
(B) magnetic field is 0, out of the plane of the page, perpendicular to axis
 0
(C) electic field is perpendicular to the plane of sheet
2
(D) If an electron moves parallel to V just above the sheet it will experience an upward magnetic force.
Q.509 In the Hall effect, we have a current flowing in the presence of a uniform magnetic field, and we get a
potential difference across the conductor. Which is incorrect statement?
(A) a changing magnetic field produces an induced EMF
(B) charges are bent from their paths until an electric field is built up transverse to the wire, to stop them
from bending
(C) the charges in the wire are moving, so the electric fields are changing with time.
(D) the charges produced by the current repel each other, and produce a build up of charge on the
surface of the conductor.
Q.510 A long straight wire carries a steady current I1. Nearby is a rectangular loop that carries a steady current
I2. The directions of the two currents are shown in the figure.
Which statement is/are false ?

(A) The loop is attracted to the wire
(B) There is no net force on the loop from the wire
(C) The loop is attracted to the wire if I1 > I2; otherwise it is repelled
(D) The loop is repelled from the wire if I1 > I2; otherwise it is attracted
Q.511 Two concentric, coplanar, circular loop of wire, with different diameter carry current in the same sense
as shown in the figure. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
(A) the magnetic force exerted by the outer loop on a short portion of the inner loop is radially outward
(B) the magnetic force exerted by the outer loop on a short portion of the inner loop is radially inward
(C) the net magnetic force exerted by the outer loop on a whole inner loop is non zero and is radially outward
(D) the net magnetic force exerted by the outer loop on a whole inner loop is zero
Page # 169
Q.512 A charged rod having charge as shown is rotating with angular velocity  about on hinge at its centre.
At the instant shown rod is along x-axis. Consider effect of field at the instant shown.
y

–––––– ×++++++ x
(A) A magnetic field Bo î will slow down rod.
(B) An electric field E o ĵ will slow down rod.
(C) An electric field E o ( ĵ) will slow down rod.

(D) A magnetic field can not slow down the rod.
Q.513 A uniform magnetic field is directed out of the page. A charged particle, moving in the plane of the page,
follows a clockwise spiral of decreasing radius as shown. A reasonable explanation is :
(A) the charge is positive and slowing down (B) the charge is negative and slowing down
(C) the charge is positive and speeding up (D) the charge is negative and speeding up
Q.514 The circuit shown in figure consisting of three identical lamps and two coils is connected to a direct
current source. The ohmic resistance of the coils is negligible. After some time switch S is opened. Which
of the following statement(s) is/are correct for the instant immediately after opening the switch?
(A) All the lamps are turned off
(B) Brightness of B2 & B3 remains unchanged
(C) Brightness of B1 suddenly increases
(D) Insufficient data to draw any conclusion.
Q.515 A circular conducting loop of radius r0 and having resistance per unit length  as shown in the figure is
placed in a magnetic field B which is constant in space and time. The ends of the loop are crossed and
pulled in opposite directions with a velocity v such that the loop always remains circular and the radius of
the loop goes on decreasing, then
(A) Radius of the loop changes with r as r = r0 – vt/
(B) EMF induced in the loop as a function of time is e = 2Bv[r0 – vt/]
Bv
(C) Current induced in the loop is I =
2
Bv
(D) Current induced in the loop is I =

Page # 170
Q.516 A circuit consisting of a constant e.m.f. 'E', a self induction 'L' and a resistance 'R' is closed at t = 0.
The relation between the current I in the circuit and time t is as shown by curve 'a' in the fig. When
one or more of parameters E, R & L are changed , the curve 'b' is obtained .The steady state current is
same in both the
cases. Thenit is possible that :
(A) E & R are kept constant & L is increased
(B) E & R are kept constant & L is decreased
(C) E & R are both halved and L is kept constant
(D) E & L are kept constant and R is decreased
Q.517 Resonance occurs in a series L-C-R circuit when the frequency of the applied emf is 1000 Hz. Then :
(A) when f = 900 Hz, the circuit behaves as a capacitative circuit
(B) the impedance of the circuit is maximum at f = 1000 Hz
(C) at resonance the voltage accross L and voltage accross C differ in phase by 180°
(D) if the value of C is doubled resonance occurs at f = 2000 Hz
Q.518 In the diagram shown, a light ray is incident on the lower medium boundary at an angle 45° with the
normal. Which of the following statements is/are true?
3 = 2
(A) If 2 > 2 then angle of deviation is 45°
(B) If 2 < 2 then angle of deviation is 90° 
(C) If2 < 2 then angle of deviation is 135° 45°

1 = 2
(D) If2 > 2 then angle of deviation is 0°
Q.519 A point object is kept at (1, 0, 0). A circular plane mirror of radius 1m is kept in yz-plane such that its
centre is at the origin. The reflecting side faces positive x-axis. At which of the following points can the
image of the object be seen ?
(A) (–0.5, 0, 0.5) (B) (2, 2, 2)
(C) (1, 1.5, 1.5) (D) (1, –1, 1.5)
Q.520 Following are graphs of angle of deivation versus angle of incidence.
  
(a) (b) (c)

i
i < c i i
Based on the above graphs mark the correct options.
(A) Graph-a may be a part of the graph for ray of light that travels from denser to rarer medium.
(B) Graph-b may be for ray of light that is totally internally reflected from a denser to rarer medium
boundary.
(C) Graph-c may be a part of the graph for ray of light that travels from rarer to denser medium.
(D) Graph-b may be a part of the graph for ray of light that is reflected from a plane mirror.
Q.521 An object and a screen are kept at a distance of 120 cm. A lens of focal length 22.5 cm is kept between
them so that a real image is formed on the screen. Find the possible location(s) of the lens.
(A) 90cm from object (B) 30cm from object (C) 40cm from object (D) 80cm from object
Page # 171
Q.522 A luminous point object is placed at O, whose image is formed at I as
shown in figure. Line AB is the optical axis. Which of the following
statement is/are correct?
(A) If a lens is used to obtain the image, then it must be a diverging lens
and its optical centre will be the intersection point of line AB and
OI.
(B) If a lens is used to obtain the image, then it must be a converging lens and its optical centre will be the
intersection point of line AB and OI.
(C) If a mirror is used to obtain the image then the mirror must be concave and object and image subtend
equal angles at the pole of the mirror.
(D) I is a real image.
Q.523 The drawing shows a top view of a square room. One wall is missing and the other three are each
mirrors. From point P in the center of the open side, a laser is fired, with the intent of hitting a small target
located at the center of one wall. Identify vector in whose direction the laser can be fired and score a hit,
assuming that the light does not strike any mirror more than once.
Target
y
x
P
î ĵ
(A)  ĵ (B) î  ˆj (C)  î  ˆj (D)  î 
3 3
Q.524 The figure shows positions of object O and its diminished image I. This is possible if :
(A) a convex mirror is placed to the right of I
(B) a convex mirror is placed between O and I
(C) a concave lens is placed to the right of I Principal axis
(D) a concave lens is placed between O and I
O I
Q.525 In Young’s double slit experiment, phase difference between the waves at a point on screen having
intensity less than the average intensity on screen may be
(A) /4 (B) 2/3 (C)  (D) 7/8
Q.526 The drawing shows two cylinders. They are identical in all respects, except one is hollow. In a setup like
that in figure, identical forces are applied to the right end of each cylinder while the left end is fixed.
A B
(A) The elongation of A is morethan that of B

(B) The elongation of B is more than that of A
(C) The energy stored in B is more than in A
(D) The energy stored in A is more than that in B
Page # 172
Q.527 A uniform cylinder of steel of mass M, radius R is placed on frictionless bearings and set to rotate about
its axis with angular velocity 0. After the cylinder has reached the specified state of rotation, it is heated
I
from temperature T0 to (T0 + T ) without any mechanical contact . If is the fractional change in
I

moment of inertia of the cylinder and  be the fractional change in the angular velocity of the cylinder
0
and  be the coefficient of linear expansion, then
I 2 R I 2  I 2R
(A)  (B) I   (C)   2T (D) 
I R 0 0 I R
Q.528 Which of the following experiment in Photoelectric effect will support particle nature of light?
(A) Photocurrent is set up almost instantaneously even with faint light of sufficiently small wavelength.
(B) Existence of cutoff potential which depends upon wavelength of radiation incident on emitter.
(C) Existence of thresold wavelength for incident radiation above which no photocurrent can be set up.
(D) Existence of saturation current which increase with increase in intensity of radiation incident on
emitter.
Q.529 Which of the following are not dependent on the intensity of the incident radiation in a photoelectric
experiment?
(A) Amount of photoelectric current
(B) Stopping potential to reduce the photoelectric current to zero
(C) Work function of the surface
(D) Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
Q.530 Suppose frequency of emitted photon is fo when electron of a stationary hydrogen atom jumps from a
higher state m to a lower state n. If the atom is moving with a velocity v(<<c) and emits a photon of
frequency f during the same transition, then which of the following statements are possible.
(A) f may be equal to f0 (B) f may be greater than f0
(C) f may be less than f0 (D) f cannot be equal to f0
Q.531 Negative charge is revolving around a fixed positive charge in a circular orbit. If the classical idea of an
accelerating charge radiating energy is valid, then the negative charge will:
(A) spiral towards the positive charge, with increasing kinetic energy
(B) spiral towards the positive charge with potential energy decreasing at a faster rate than increase in its
kinetic energy.
(C) spiral away from the positive charge and finally escape from the binding of the positive charge
(D) revolve around the positive charge with increasing frequency of revolution.
Q.532 The figure shows electronic wave function for a hydrogen atom.
(A) The quantum number of this state is 6
(B) The wavelength of this electron is 6r0 (r0 is radius of ground state)
(C) It can go to ground state by emitting 3 different photons
(D) On deexcitation it emits at least one line in infra red region of spectrum.
Q.533 If the accelerating voltage across an x-ray tube is doubled
(A) The wavelength of characteristic lines are halved.
(B) The minimum wavelength of x-rays is halved
(C) The x-rays are probably becomes more penetrating
(D) The target metal will get heat up earlier.
Q.534 92U235 is ‘’ (Alpha) active. Then in a large quantity of the element:
(A) the probability of a nucleus disintegrating during one second is lower in the first half life and greater
in the fifth half life
(B) the probability of a nucleus disintegrating during one second remains constant for all time.
(C) more than half of U235 will remain even after the average life
(D) the energy of the emitted ‘’ particle is less than the disintegration energy of the U235 nucleus.
Page # 173
MATCH THE COLUMN TYPE
Q.535 On LHS certain observations regarding a moving elevator are given. On RHS possible deductions about
motion of elevator are given. More than one option may be correct
Column I Column II
(i) when he drops a coin it takes lesser time (A) lift is going down with increasing speed
as compared to the same event on ground (B) lift is going up with increasing speed
(ii) instantaneous velocity (C) lift is going down with decreasing speed
of two blocks connected (D) lift is going down with constant speed
by inextensible string
going over the pulley w.r.t.
ground are as indicated
x2
Q.536 Trajectory of a particle in a projectile motion is given by y = x – , where x and y are in meters. Match
80
the column-1 and column-2.
Column-I Column-II
(A) x coordinate at height of 15 m (P) 20 m
(B) vertical distance of particle from (Q) 80 m
point of projection at x = 100 m.
(C) Horizontal range (R) 60 m
(S) 25 m
Q.537 A block is placed on a rough horizontal surface having coefficient of friction . A

 mg 
variable force F = kt,  0  t   acts on it at an angle  to
 k sin  
the horizontal.
Quantities Variation as a function of time
(A) Normal reaction (P)
(B) Friction (Q)
(C) Acceleration (R)
(D) Velocity (S)

Page # 174
Q.538 Figure shows a block pressed against a rough vertical wall with a force F as shown in side view. Column-
I shows angle at which force F is applied and column-II gives information about corresponding friction
force. Match them.
F = 100 N
m
m = 7.5 kg
µ = 0.1

F
Column I Column II
(A)  = 37° (P) friction by wall on block is upwards
(B)  = 45° (Q) friction by wall on block is downwards
(C)  = 53° (R) friction by wall on block is static

(S) friction by wall on block is kinetic
Q.539 A bob tied to an ideal string of length  is released from the horizontal position shown. A peg P whose
height is adjustable, can arrest the free swing of the pendulum, as shown in Figure.
Peg
Column-I Column-II
2 2
(A) For what range of y will the string wind up on the peg, (P) y
5 3
remaining taut throughout the swing.
2
(B) For what range of y will the pendulum become (Q) 0<y<
5
projectile.
2
(C) For what value of y will mechanical energy (R) y
5
remain conserved for long time.
 2
(S) y
3 3
Page # 175
Q.540 Initially springs are in natural length. An application of external varying force F causes the block to move
slowly towards the wall, on smooth floor by a distance x.
S1 S2
k1 k2
F
m
Smooth
Column-I Column-II
(A) Work done by S2 on block (P) zero
1 k k 
(B) Work done by S2 on S1 (Q)   1 2  x 2
2  k1  k 2 
1  k1k 2  2
 x
(C) Work done by F on block (R) 2  k1  k 2 
1 k1k 22 x 2
(D) Work done by S1 on wall (S)
2 ( k1  k 2 ) 2
Q.541 In the system shown, there is some friction at all surfaces but it is not sufficient
to prevent slipping. Match the quantities in column I with their possible
direction(s) as shown in column II.
Column I Column II
(A) Acceleration of A
(B) Net force applied by A on B
(C) Acceleration of A relative to B
(D) Net force applied by ground on B
Q.542 Two men of mass 60 kg and 80 kg stand on a plank of mass 20 kg. Both of them can jump with a
velocity of 1 m/s relative to the plank. In each event shown in column-I, match the velocity of plank after
the event, given in column II 60 kg 80 kg
+
Ram Shyam
Smooth level ground
Column-I Column-II
17
(A) Ram alone jumps to the left (P) – m/s
40
1
(B) Shyam alone jumps to the right (Q) – m/s
2
3
(C) Ram jumps to left and shyam jumps to right simultaneously. (R) m/s
8
1
(D) Ram jumps to left and after that shyam jumps to right (S) – m/s
8
Page # 176
Q.543 In each situation of column-I a uniform disc of mass m and radius R rolls on a rough fixed horizontal
surface as shown. At t = 0 (initially) the angular velocity of disc is 0 and velocity of centre of mass of
disc is v0 (in horizontal direction). The relation between v0 and 0, and the initial sense of rotation is given
for each situation in Column-I. Then match the statement in Column-I with the corresponding results in
Column-II.
Column-I Column-II
0
(A) (P) The angular momentum of disc about
v0
(v0 > R 0) point A (as shown in figure remains
A
conserved.)
0
(B) (Q) The kinetic energy of disc after it starts
v0 rolling without slipping is less than its
(v0 > R 0) initial kinetic energy.
A
0
(C) (R) In the duration disc rolls with slipping,
v0
the friction acts on disc for sometime
(v0 < R 0) to right and for sometime to left.
A
0
(C)
v0
(v0 < R 0)
A
Q.544 A spool is lying on a rough horizontal surface. In the following question, some situations, are given in
column I and some conclusions or relevant data in column-II. Match the column I with column II
Column-I Column-II
F1
R r
(A) r  cos  (P) acm is towards left
R
F2
R
(B) r  cos θ 
r (Q) acm is towards right
R
F3
R
(C) r  r (R) friction acts towards left
cos  
R
R
(D) r (S) friction acts towards right
F4
Page # 177
Q.545 A copper rod (initially at room temperature 20ºC) of
non-uniform cross section is placed between a steam
chamber at 100º C and ice-water chamber at 0º C. A
and B are cross sections as shown in figure. Then match 100º 0º
Steam Ice Water
the statements in Column-I with column-II. (The Chamber Chamber
mathematical expressions in B
Column-I have their usual meaning in heat transfer). A
Column-I Column-II
 dQ 
(A) Initially rate of heat flow   will be (P) maximum at section A
 dt 
 dQ 
(B) At steady state rate of heat flow   will be (Q) maximum at section B
 dt 
(C) At steady state temperature gradient (R) minimum at section B
 dT 
  will be
 dt 
(D) At steady state rate of change of temperature (S) same for all cross sections
 dT 
  at a certain point will be
 dt 
Q.546 A satellite is in a circular equatorial orbit of radius 7000 km around the Earth. If it is transferred to a
circular orbit of double the radius,
Column I Column II
(A) angular momentum (P) increases.
(B) area of Earth covered by satellite signal (Q) decreases.
(C) potential energy (R) becomes double.
(D) kinetic energy (S) becomes half.
Q.547 Shown below is a cylinder of radius R floating in vessel containing liquids A and B. Neglecting atmospheric
pressure match the quantities mentioned in column-I with corresponding expression in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Net force exerted by liquid A of density  on the cylinder. (P) 9 gRh2
(B) Net force exerted by liquid B of density  on the cylinder. (Q) gR2h
(C) Net force exerted by liquids A and B on the left half of the curved part of cylinder. (R) 4gR2h
(D) Net force exerted by liquids A and B on the cylinder. (S) 3gR2h
Page # 178
Q.548 A sine wave y = A sin (2x – 2t + /3) is propagating in the medium. Match the description of the
motion of particles of the medium with entries in column I.
Column I Column II
1 1
(A) x  m, t  sec (P) Velocity is in positive y direction
3 3
1
(B) x  m, t  1sec (Q) Velocity is in negative y direction
3
1
(C) x  1m, t  sec (R) Particle is stationary
3
(D) x = 1m, t = 1 sec (S) Particle has positive displacement
(T) Particle has negative displacemnt
Q.549 A small pulse travelling with speed v in a string is shown at t = 0, moving towards free end. Select the
shape of string from column-II at moments shown in column-I.
L/2
x=0 v x=L
t=0
fixed end s<<L free end
L
Column-I Column-II
L
(A) t= (P)
v
2L
(B) t= (Q)
v
3L
(C) t= (R)
v
(S)
Q.550 The graphs show the standing wave on a string at two successive instants of time t1,t2. A, B, C are points
on the string (S0 is the maximum displacement amplitude of the standing wave) Column-II gives obser-
vations about net mechanical energy for the time interval between t1 & t2. Match the column
y
AB C
S0 t = t1=0
x
S0
y t = t2
x
The string is straight here
Column-I Column-II
(A) A (P) Kinetic energy at this element is increasing.
(B) B (Q) Energy is flowing towards right through this point.
(C) C (R) Energy is flowing left through this point.
(S) No net energy ever crosses this point
Page # 179
Q.551 Sound is travelling in a long tube towards right and the graph of excess pressure variation Vs position (at
some instant) is given below.
P Q R S T
Wave propagation
p
Match velocities in column-I with column-II. P,Q,R,S,T are medium particles inside the tube.
Column-I Column-II
(A) velocity is towards right (P) P
(B) velocity is towards left (Q) Q
(C) velocity is zero (R) R
(D) Speed is maximum (S) S
(T) T
Vw
Cart VS
Q.552
O1 O2
Observers O1 and O2 are at rest and the wall is moving with velocity Vw. Cart is moving with constant
velocity Vs towards wall. The source of sound is in the cart, the original frequency of the wave is f. Sound
has velocity C w.r.t. ground (medium is stationary). Then match the column-I with column-II
Column-I Column-II
 C  Vw  C  Vs 
(A) Wavelength received by O1 directly from cart (P)  
 C  Vw  f
C  Vs
(B) Wavelength received by O2 directly from cart (Q)
f
 C  Vw  C  Vs 
(C) Wavelength received by driver of the cart (R)  
 C  Vw  f
after reflection from wall.
C  Vs
(D) Wavelength received by O1 after (S)
f
reflection from wall (T) None of these
Page # 180
A B
Q.553
O
S A’ B’
The diagram shows plane wavefronts for sound wave travelling in air towards right Each of these wavefronts
represent successive pressure maxima for the pressure wave.Initially the source S, observer O and
medium are all at rest. The source is a large plane diaphragm and observer is a detector. Wave fronts
being considered in column-II have been emitted after the action in column-I has taken place.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Source starts moving towards right (P) distance between any two wavefronts
will increase.
(B) Air starts moving towards right (Q) distance between any two wavefronts
will decrease.
(C) Observer and source both move (R) the time needed by sound to move from
towards left with same speed. point A to B in space will increase.
(D) Source and medium (air) both (S) time needed by sound to move from
move towards right with same point A to B in space will decrease.
speed.
(T) frequency received by observer is increase.
Q.554 Entries in column I consist of diagrams of thermal conductors. The type of conductor & direction of heat
flow are listed below. Entries in column II consist of the magnitude of rate of heat flow belonging to any
of the entries in column I. If temperature difference in all the cases is (T1 – T2), then match the columns
Column I Column II
3R
T1 2R T2
R
(A) k0 (P) 6k 0 R (T1  T2 )

Thick cylindrical
shell, heat flow along axis
k 0 R
(B) (Q) (T1  T2 )
3 ln 2
(C) (R) k0R(T1 – T2)

Page # 181
3R
T1 T2
R
4k 0 R
(D) (S) (T1  T2 )
x ln 2
solid cylinder,
heat flow along axis,
variable k
k = k0(1+x/(3R))
Q.555 In column-I some situations have been described and in column-II corresponding graph is given. Match
the entries in column-I with appropriate entries in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) A ball is thrown up on rough inclined plane. (P)

It rolls up without slipping. During its upward
motion graph between angular speed and time.
(B) T1 and T2 (T1 > T2) is the temperature maintained (Q)

at two ends of lagged rod of uniform cross-sectional
area. In steady state variation of temperature of
a point on the rod with distance from higher
temperature end.
(C) A uniform rod is rotated in horizontal plane about (R)
one of its end. Variation of strain developed in rod
with distance from axis of rotation.
(S)
Q.556 We have three solid bodies of same material, A  a solid cube of edge length 'r' , B  a solid sphere
of radius 'r' and C  a solid hemisphere of radius 'r'. In column I, certain situations related to these
bodies are given. Match the appropriate outcome indicated in column II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) All 3 bodies are heated to same temperature (P) for C is highest
of 350 K and kept in a room at
300 K. Then rate of fall of temperature with (Q) for B is highest
time
(B) All 3 bodies are kept on a level ground. (R) for C is lowest
C is kept with base on ground. Height of
centre of mass from ground
(C) All 3 bodies are rotated about an axis passing (S) for one of the body is half
through their respective centre of mass. The axis of another body.
for cube and hemisphere is perpendicular to the
face and base respectively. Moment of inertia
Page # 182
Q.557 In each situation of column-I, a process A  B  C is given for an ideal gas. Match each situation of
column-I with correct result in column II.
Column-I Column-II
V
A
• C
Volume
(A) B (P) Temperature increases continuously
T
Temperature
V
C
Volume B
(B) (Q) Pressure first increases & then remains constant
•A
T
Temperature
P B C
•
Pressure
A•
(C) (R) Temperature first decreases & then increases
Volume
V
P
C• B
Pressure
A•
(D) (S) Pressure first decreases & then remains constant
Volume
V
(T) Volume increases continuously

Q.558 Column-I represents an Event / Setup followed by an explanation or a statement. Column II represent
remarks about event as well as explanation.
Note:(1) You have to mark events as possible / not possible followed by explanation correct/incorrect.
(2) If event turns out to be impossible do not evaluate explanation.
Column I Column II
Arbitrary shaped dA1
Gaussian surface
(A) dA2 (P) Possible

Cone with a point
q charge its vertex
Setup : A point charge lies outside an arbitrary Gaussian

surface as shown in figure.
Event : Flux through area element dA1 and dA2 has
same numerical value.
Explanation : Same number of field lines will cross through the two
surfaces as field lines due to a point charge are radial.
Page # 183
(B) (Q) Impossible
Setup : A pendulum bob is fixed to frame of an elevator. The pendulum

bob is released from horizontal position. When it swings and
reaches its lowest position, elevator begins to fall freely.
Event : Just after beginning of free fall, bob follows parabolic trajectory
with respect to ground.
Explanation : If string of a pendulum bob get slack
pendulum bob becomes an unconstrained object moving
under gravity
sphere
2
µ tan 
7
(C)  (R) Correct
Setup : A hollow sphere and a solid sphere of same mass and
radius are released simultaneously from an incline.
Event : Both the spheres reach the bottom at the same time with
same translational kinetic energy.
Explanation : Work done by friction and gravity is same
on solid as well as hollow sphere.
(S) Incorrect
Q.559 A spherical metallic conductor has a spherical cavity. A positive charge is placed inside the cavity at its
centre. Another positive charge is placed outside it. The conductor is initially electrically neutral.
Column I Column II
(Cause) (Effect)
(A) If outside charge is shifted to (P) distribution of charge on inner surface of
other position cavity changes
(B) If inside charge is shifted to (Q) distribution of charge on outer surface of
other position within cavity of conductor changes
(C) If magnitude of charge inside (R) electric potential at centre of conductor
cavity is increased due to charges present on outer surface of
conductor changes
(D) If conductor is earthed (S) force on the charge placed inside cavity changes
Page # 184
Q.560 Column I shows graphs of electric potential V versus x and y in a certain region for four situations.
Column II shows the range of angle which the electric field vector makes with positive x-direction.
Column I Column II
(V versus x) (V versus y)
(A) (P) 0  < 45°
(B) (Q) 45°  < 90°
(C) (R) 90°  < 135°
(D) (S) 135°   180°
Q.561 A circuit involving five ideal cells, three resistance (R1, R2 and 20) and a capacitor of capacitance
C = 1 F is shown. Match the conditions in Column-I with results given in Column-II.
[Assuming circuit is in steady state]
30V 10V 20V 12V

A• •B
C=1F
20 R1 R2
14V
K2 •d
• • • c
K1 •
Column I Column II
(A) K2 is open and K1 is in position C (P) Potential at point A is greater than potential at B
(B) K2 is open and K1 is in position D (Q) Current through R1 is downward
(C) K2 is closed and K1 is in position C (R) Current through R2 is upward
(D) K2 is closed and K1 is in position D (S) Charge on capacitor is 10 C.
Page # 185
Q.562 In the circuit, both capacitors are identical. Column I indicates action
done on capacitor 1 and Column II indicates effect on
capacitor 2. Select correct alternative.
Column I Column II
(A) Plates are moved further apart. (P) Amount of charge on left plate increases
(B) Area increased (Q) Potential difference increases
(C) Left plate is earthed (R) Amount of charge on right plate
decreases
(D) It's plates are short circuited (S) None of the above effects
Q.563 Some events related to a capacitor are listed in column-I. Match these events with their effect(s) is
column-II.
Column I Column - II
(Events) (Effects)
(A) Insertion of dielectric while battery (P) Electric field between plates changes
remain attached
(B) Removal of dielectric while battery is (Q) Charge present on plates changes
not present
(C) Slow decrease in separation between (R) Energy stored in capacitor increases
plates while battery is attached
(D) Slow increase of separation between (S) Work done by external agent is
plates while battery is not present positive
Q.564 Column-I Column-II
(A) Plates of an isolated, charged, parallel (P) Electric energy stored inside capacitor
plate, air core capacitor are slowly increases in the process.
pulled apart.
(B) A dielectric is slowly inserted inside (Q) Force between the two plates of the
an isolated and charged parallel plate capacitor remain unchanged.
air cored capacitor to completely fill the
space between plates.
(C) Plates of a parallel plate capacitor (R) Electric field in the region between
connected across a battery are slowly plates remain unchanged.
pulled apart.
(D) A dielectric slab is slowly inserted inside (S) Total electric energy stored inside
a parallel plate capacitor connected across capacitor decreases in the process.
a battery to completely fill the space
between plates. (T) Electric field in the region between
plates decreases.
Page # 186
Q.565 Column I gives physical quantities based on a situation in which an ideal cell of emf V is connected
across a cylindrical rod of uniform cross-section area and conductivity () as shown in figure. E, J,  and
i are electric field at, current density through, electric flux through and current through shaded cross-
section respectively as shown in figure. Physical quantities in column II are equal to those in column I.
Match the expression in Column I with the statements in Column II.
shaded cross
section
Column I Column II

(A) (P) Conductivity of rod
i
E
(B) (Q) Resistance of rod
J
(C) V (R) Resistivity of rod
V
(D) (S) Power delivered to rod

Q.566 A charged particle having non zero initial velocity is subjected to certain conditions given in column-I,
column-II gives possible trajectories of the particle. Match the conditions in column-I with the results in
column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) In only uniform electric field (P) the path of the charged particle may be a
straight line
(B) In only uniform magnetic field (Q) the path of the charged particle may be a
parabola
(C) In uniform magnetic and uniform (R) the path of the charged particle may be circular
electric field
(D) Subjected to a net force of (S) the path of the charged particle may be
constant magnitude helical with uniform pitch
(T) the path of the charged particle may be
helical with non-uniform pitch.
Page # 187
Q.567 Column-I shows some charge distributions and current distributions accompanied by their descriptions.
Column-II shows the instantaneous characteristics. Here  symbolizes the system on which results are
to be obtained.
Column I Column II
z

E
–
(A) +
+
+ y (P) Net force on  is zero.
+
x ++
++ + + + ++
+
Circular ring () half positive and other half negative

placed in a uniform electric field, with centre at origin.
z
–
––
(B) ––
–
+Q 
y (Q) Net force on  have no
– –
x ––  p x-component.
– r
–– –Q
Dipole () is placed infront of a long uniformly
negatively charged wire parallel to x-axis, such

that p is perpendicular to r and dipole is kept
parallel to z-axis.
z
i
(C) i y
(R) Net torque on  is along x-axis
i
x
A square current carrying coil () is placed in

xy-plane with centre at origin and sides parallel to
x-axis and y-axis, and a long wire placed parallel
above square on z-axis and parallel to x-axis.
y

B
(D) z
(S) Net torque on  is zero.
A circular current coil () with one half in yz-plane
other half in xz-plane, placed in a uniform magnetic
field in x-direction.
(T) Direction of magnetic dipole
moment or electric dipole
moment is in x-y plane.
Page # 188
Q.568 Column I shows four current configurations. Match each entry of column I with those axes in column II
along which the magnetic field at origin has positive component.
Column I Column II
[+ve component (>0) of
magnetic field at origin]
(A) (P) x
(B) (Q) y
(C) (R) z
(D) (S) none
Q.569 In column-I certain situations are shown. Column-II has different values of phase difference. Match
them
[Take 2 = 10 wherever required]
Column-I Column-II

(A) Phase difference between current through (P)
3
circuit and voltage across source
20 L =  Henry
~
V = 100 sin (2t) 
(B) Two pendulum of length 1m and 4m start (Q)
4
oscillating in same phase. The phase difference
between them after 1 sec. is.
Page # 189

(C) A progressive wave of frequency 100 Hz is (R)
2
travelling in a taut string with tension 100N
and mass/length 10gm/m. The phase difference
between two points at a distance of 0.5m. (S) 
Q.570 Column-I describe the value of variables indicated in column-II. Assume potential energy in gravitation
and electrostatics to be zero at infinity. If the quantity mentioned in column II is a vector, postive and
negative refer to the direction and increasing or decreasing refer to magnitude. Match the appropriate
entries.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Positive and increasing. (P) A body of mass m is projected upward from surface of
a planet. The gravitational potential energy of
the system
Q –Q
(B) Positive and decreasing. (Q)
L
In the situation shown, energy of the magnetic field just
after closing.
(C) Negative and increasing. (R) An air bubble is released from middle of a column of
viscous liquid. Upward direction is assumed to be
positive. The velocity of the air bubble
(D) Negative and decreasing. (S) A point source is moving along the principal axis of a
stationary convex lens. The direction of velocity of the
source is positive. The velocity of image
(T) Two balls of opposite charge are released in vacuum.
As time passes, their electrostatic potential energy
Q.571 A homogeneous magnetic field B is perpendicular to a sufficiently long track of width  which is horizontal.
A frictionless conducting resistanceless rod of mass m straddles the two rails of the track as shown in the
figure. Entire arrangement lies in horizontal plane. For the situation suggested in column-II match the
appropriate entries in column-I. The rails are also resistancesless.
B
D
A
C
Column-I Column-II
(A) A is a battery of emf V and internal (P) Energy is dissipated during the motion.
resistance R. The rod is initially at rest.
D
C
Page # 190
(B) A is a charged capacitor. The system has (Q) The rod moves with a constant
no resistance. The rod is initially at rest. velocity after a long time.
Q0
Q 0–
D
C
(C) A is an inductor with initial current i0. It (R) After a certain time interval rod will
is having no resistance. change its direction of motion.
i0
D
C
(D) A is a resistance. The rod is projected to (S) If a constant force is applied on the
the right with a velocity V0 rod to the right, it can move with a
constant velocity.
(T) The rod stops after some time
in absence of an external force.
Q.572 A spherical fish bowl of radius R is placed in front of a plane vertical mirror (M). The thickness of the
wall of the fish bowl is very thin. The centre (C) of the spherical bowl is at a distance of 3R from the plane
mirror. The bowl is filled with water and contains a fish (F). Fish (F) is at a distance of R from the centre
4
of the spherical bowl as shown in the figure. Refractive index of water is . Two surfaces are indicated
3
in the bowl as first surface (1) and second surface (2)
y
F C x
M 2 1
2R
3R
Column-I Column-II
Optical Event Nature of image
(A) Refraction at first surface (P) Virtual
(B) Refraction at second surface after (Q) Real

reflection from mirror
(C) Refraction at first surface after reflection (R) Magnified

from mirror and refraction from second
surface. (S) Diminished
Page # 191
Q.573 Consider the situation shown in column I a real object is moving towards a fixed optical component or an
optical component is moving towards a fixed object. Match the possible direction and magnitude of
velocity of image as shown in Column II. (All velocities in column I are equal to v0)
Column-I Column-II
O
(A) 2f (P)
O
(B) R (Q)
O
(C) 2f f (R) More than v0
(D) (S) Less than v0

Object is
fixed
(T) Equal to v0
Q.574 Light is incident at surface PQ of prism as shown in column I then match the column I with column II
(Surrounding medium is air in all cases)
Column I Column II
Q
A=100°
i = 45°
(A) (P) Total internal reflection takes place at

40° 40° Surface QR.
P R
µ= 2
Q
A=30°
i = 45°
(B) (Q) Light emerges normally from the surface QR

75° 75°
P R
µ= 2
Q
A=90°
i = 90°
(C) (R) Light emerges parallel to surface QR

45° 45°
R
P µ= 2
Grazing incidence
(S) When light ray passes through the prism
it is parallel to the base PR.
Page # 192
Q.575 An extended object is moving in front of concave mirror as shown in figure.

On L.H.S velocity of object and position is given. On R.H.S some
properties of image and its velocity is given. Consider velocity along x-
axis only.
Object Image
(A) +ve velocity and object is between (P) +ve velocity
focus and centre of curvature
(B) –ve velocity and object is between (Q) –ve velocity
focus and pole
(C) –ve velocity and object is beyond (R) size of image is increasing
centre of curvature
(D) –ve velocity and object is virtual (S) size of image is decreasing
Q.576 A bird in air is diving vertically over a tank with speed 6 cm/s. Base of the tank is
silvered. A fish in the tank is rising upward along the same line with speed 4 cm/
s. [Take: water = 4/3]
Column I Column II
(in cm/s)
(A) Speed of the image of fish as seen by the bird directly (P) 12
(B) Speed of the image of fish formed after reflection (Q) 4
from the mirror as seen by the bird
(C) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking upwards (R) 9
(D) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking downwards (S) 3
in the mirror
Q.577 In a standard Young's Double Slit Experiment light of wavelength  = 6000 Å is used, screen distance
(D) = 1 m and slit separation (d) = 0.5 mm. Intensity of light on screen emerging from slits are individually
I0 and 4I0. Column I indicates distance of certain point P on screen from central maxima. Match the
columns
Column I Column II
(A) y = 2 mm (P) Intensity = 7I0 at P
(B) y = 2.2 mm (Q) Intensity = 3I0 at P
(C) y = 2.6 mm (R) P lies between 2nd minima and 3rd maxima
(D) y = 2.8 mm (S) P lies between 3rd minima and 2nd maxima
Page # 193
Q.578 A ray of light is incident on a thin film. Two of the reflected rays are shown, and two of the transmitted
rays are shown in figure. Consider phase difference by comparing them with the phase of incident ray on
the film. Match statements about phase difference in column-I with the correct order of refractive indices
in column-II.
a b
n1
n2
n3
c d
Column-I Column-II
(A) Rays a and b have an extra phase difference over (P) n1 > n2 > n3
and above that due to extra optical path, caused
by reflection at various interfaces.
(B) Rays a and c have an extra phase difference over (Q) n2 > n3 > n1
(C) Rays a and d have an extra phase difference over (R) n3 > n2 > n1
(D) Rays b and c have an extra phase difference over (S) n1 = n3 > n2
(T) the specified extra
phase difference
is not possible
Q.579 Light from source S (| u | < | f |) falls on lens and screen is placed on the other side. The lens is formed by
cutting it along principal axis into two equal parts and are joined as indicated in column II.
Column I Column II
(A) Plane of image moves towards screen if | f | (P)

is increased
Small portion of each part near pole

is removed. The remaining parts are
joined.
(B) Images formed will be virtual (Q)
The two parts are separated slightly.

The gap is filled by opaque material.
Page # 194
(R)
The two parts are separated slightly.

The gap is filled by opaque material.
(C) Interference pattern can be obtained if (S)

screen is suitably positioned.
Small portion of each part near pole

is removed. The remaining parts are
joined.
Q.580 Three physical quantities are listed in column I and their values are listed in column II in random order.
Match the appropriate quantities.
Column I Column II
(a) binding energy of heavy nuclei per nucleon (i) 10 keV
(b) X-ray photon energy (ii) 7 MeV
(c) Photon energy of visible light (iii) 2 eV
Q.581 Then choose the correct option in which matching is correct.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Angular momentum of system (P) System : An electron revolving around
is conserved about centre of nucleus in hydrogen atom in ground state.
circular path. Event : A photon corresponding to first line of
lyman series is incident on it just before t = 0
and is absorbed.
(B) Mechanical energy of system (Q) System : A ball.

can increase for t > 0. Event : It is projected on a rough surface with
some angular velocity at t = 0 as shown
0 = v0/R
v0
(C) Kinetic energy of system reamins (R) System : A small ball. It is attached to a cord
constant. passing through a hole on a frictionless
horizontal surface and rotating as shown.
Event : The cord is slowly pulled inside by
an external agent at
 t = 0.
System particle
Page # 195
(D) Speed of system's centre of (S) System : An electric dipole free in space.
mass can increase for t > 0. Event : At t = 0 a charge is brought near it.
(Consider the centre of dipole as the centre of
the circular path.)
(T) System : A charged ball is revolving in a

circular path made on a smooth horizontal table.
Event : A uniform magnetic field is switched
on in vertically upward direction at t = 0 which
gradually increases in magnitude.
Q.582 Column I Column II

(A) -rays (P) Continuous energy distribution with dark lines in
between
(B) -rays (Q) Continuous energy distribution with sharp peaks in

between.
(C) Absorption spectrum of Hydrogen (R) Continuous energy distribution
(D) X-rays (S) Discrete energy distribution
Q.583 Q is energy released in the decay , mx is atomic mass of parent nucleus, my is atomic mass of daughter
nucleus and me is mass of electron, then match the following :
Column-I Column-II
(A) k capture (P) Q = (mx – my)c2
(B) – decay (Q) Q = (mx – my – me)c2
(C) + decay (R) Q = (mx – my – 2me)c2
(S) Q = (mx – my + 2me)c2
Page # 196
SUBJECTIVE TYPE
Q.584 In a given system of unit standard measurment of mass is 100 gm, standard measurement of length is 200
cm and standard measurement of time is 5 sec. 10 J energy in the given system of unit has value N,then
value of N is.
Q.585 Rain is falling with speed 12 2 m/s at an angle of 45° with vertical line. A man in a glider going at a
speed of v at angle of with respect to ground. find the speed (in m/s) of glider so that rain apears to
him falling vertically. Consider motion of glider and rain drops in same vertical plane.
u
n
Rai

Q.586 Two balls are fired from ground level, a distance d apart. The right one is fired vertically with speed V.

You wish to simultaneously project the left one at the appropriate velocity u so that it collides with the
right ball when they reach their highest point. For d = 10m, what should V (in m/s) be so that the speed
u is minimum ?
(use g = 10 m/s2)
u V
d
Q.587 An atwood machine is setup in an elevator moving upward at 5 m/s and slowing down at 2 m/s2. The
initial velocity of block B is 2 m/s upward and the acceleration of block A is 3 m/s2 downwards. Find the
time (in sec.) at which block B will return to its initial position. Assume the string remains taut and the
acceleration of the elevator does not change during the required time interval.
B
A
Q.588 A car is travelling in steady rain with constant acceleration in a straight line. When it begins to move the
driver sees that the raindrops make track at an angle of 37° with the vertical on the side window. After 20
sec., the raindrops make track at an angle of 53° with vertical in same direction. Find the acceleration of the
car in cm/s2. Rain is falling at 3 m/s.
Q.589 The acceleration-time graph of a particle is as shown in figure. Initial velocity of particle is 10 m/s.
Displacement of the particle (in m) at the end of 8 sec. is _____. Round off to nearest integer.
2
a(m/s )
t(s)
4 8
Page # 197
Q.590 A train is traveling at v m/s along a level straight track. Very near and parallel to the track is a wall. On the
wall a naughty boy has drawn a straight line that slopes upward at a 37° angle with the horizontal. A
passanger in the train is observing the line out of window (0.90 m high, 1.8 m wide as shown in figure).
The line first appears at window corner A and finally disappears at window corner B. If it takes 0.4 sec
between appearance at A and disappearance of the line at B, what is the value of v (in cm/s)?
v
B B B
A A A
37°
Q.591. All pulleys are massless. The string is light and inextensible. Find acceleration of center of pulley 'p' in m/
s2 .
Q.592. A certain person nicknamed "Raju", encountered an automatic staircase (i.e. escalator) at a shopping
complex, which was moving upward at a constant rate. Just for the fun of it he decided to walk up this
escalator at the rate of one step a second. Twenty steps brings him to the top. Next day he goes up at
two steps a second and reaches the top in 32 steps. How many steps are there in the escalator ?
Q.593. A man of mass 50 kg is standing on one end of a stationary wooden plank resting on a frictionless
surface. The mass of the plank is 100 kg, its length is 75 m and the coefficient of friction between the man
the plank is 0.2. Find the least possible time (in sec) in which the man can reach the other end starting
from rest and stopping at the other end.
50kg
 = 0.2
75m
100kg
=0
Q.594 A vertical rod of mass 4 kg is hanging on a rope and a 3 kg cat is grasping the bottom end of the rod. The
rope is cut off and the frightened cat begins to run up on the rod. While the rod is falling vertically, the cat
remains at the same height, with respect to the ground. If the acceleration of the rod is n (g/4) m/s2 then
what is value of n.
Page # 198
Q.595 A dog with mass M has its string attached to one end of a spring which runs
without friction along a horizontal overhead rod. The other end of the spring is
fixed to a wall. The spring constant is k. The string is massless and inextensible
and it maintains a constant angle  with the overhead rod, even when the dog
moves. There is friction with coefficient  between the dog and the ground.
What is the maximum distance (in
cm) that the dog moving slowly can stretch the spring beyond its natural length.?
Use: M = 30 kg,  = 37°, k = 400 N/m and  = 1/3
y
h
Q.596 Figure shows a block placed on a bracket. Bracket is placed
ug
Ro
on a smooth floor, it is pulled by a force F = 6N horizontally. v0
Block is projected with velocity v0 relative to bracket as shown Smooth
in figure. Find time in second after which it stops relative to
m M
bracket. Horizontal surface of bracket is smooth while vertical x F
surface is rough (Given : m = 1kg, M = 5kg, v0 = 5 m/s µ = 0.5)
(Round off nearest integer)
Q.597 Two identical cubes of mass 1.5M each are kept almost touching the faces on a smooth horizontal
surface. On top of them we neatly placed a smooth ball of mass M, which begins to move vertically
downwards, pushing the cubes sideways. Find the velocity of the ball (in m/s) just before impact on the
horizontal surface. The initial velocity of the ball is negligible. Radius of the ball is 5 m, side of Cube 2.5
m.
Q.598 A ring of mass m = 1 kg can slide over a smooth vertical rod. A light string
attached to the ring passing over a smooth fixed pulley at a distance of L =
0.7 m from the rod as shown in the figure. At the other end of the string mass
M = 5 kg is attached, lying over a smooth fixed inclined plane of inclination
angle 37°. The ring is held in level with the pulley and released. Determine the
velocity of ring (in m/s) when the
string makes an angle (  37°) with the horizontal. [sin37°=0.6]
Q.599 A man of height h0 = 2m is bungee jumping from a

platform situated at a height h = 25m above a lake.
One end of an elastic rope is attached to his foot and
the other end is fixed to the platform. He starts falling
from rest in vertical position. The length and elastic
properties of the rope are chosen so that his speed will h
have been reduced to zero at instant when his head
reaches the surface of water. Ultimately the jumper is
hanging from the rope with his head 8m above the water.
Find the maximum acceleration acheived during the jump
in m/s2 (take g = 10 m/s2)
Q.600 At what angle 0 (in degrees) with the horizontal, should a shell be fired if at the top of its trajectory its
path has a radius of curvature equal to twice the maximum height of the trajectory.
Page # 199
Q.601 Two beads connected by a light inextensible string are placed over fixed vertical rings as shown in figure.
If mass of each bead is 100 gms and all surface are frictionless if the tension (T) in the string just after the
beads are released from the shown position, then find 100T2 (in N2)
45°
45°
Q.602 An object A of mass 2 kg is moving on a frictionless horizontal track has perfectly inelastic collision with
another object B of mass 3 kg made of the same material and moving in front of A in same direction.
Their common speed after the collision is 4 m/s. Due to the collision the temperature of the two objects,
which was initially the same, is increased, though only by 0.006°C. The specific heat capacities of the
two objects are the same : 0.5 kJ/kg°C.What was the initial speed (in m/s )of the colliding object A
before the collision?
Q.603 A cart of mass M has a pole on it from which a ball of mass µ hangs from a thin string attached at point
P. The cart and ball have initial velocity V. The cart crashes onto another cart of mass m and sticks to it
(figure). If the length of the string is R, the smallest initial velocity (in m/s) for which the ball can go in
circles around point P is. Neglect friction and assume M, m >> µ. Given m = 1kg, M = 2kg, R = 2m.
P
R
µ
M V m
Q.604 Neglecting friction at the axle and the inertia of the two step pulley shown in figure find the acceleration
'a' of the falling weight P in (m/s2) (assume P = 2 kg, Q = 2 kg & r2 = 2 r1)
T2
T1 r1 r2
P
Q
1 2 M
Q.605 A uniform stick of mass m and length l with I = ml spins
12
around on a frictionless horizontal plane, with its CM stationary. A mass M is
placed on the plane, and the stick collides elastically with it, as shown (with l
the contact point being the end of the stick). What should be the ratio of m/ m
M be so that after the collision the stick has translational motion, but no
rotational motion ?
Page # 200
Q.606 Two equal masses are situated at a separation r0. One of them is imparted a
Gm
velocity v0= r0 perpendicular to the line joining them both are free to move.
Treating motion only under mutual gravitational force find the ratio of
maximum and minimum separation between them. [Hint: Solve in CM frame]
Q.607 A spherical planet has no atmosphere and consists of pure gold. Find the minimum orbital period T (in
sec.) for a satellite circling the planet. Take density of gold as 5 × 10 3 kg/m 3 and
20
G= 10 11 Nm 2 / kg 2
3
Q.608 Two particles of mass 'm' and 3m are initially at rest an infinite distance apart. Both the particles start
Gm
moving due to gravitational attraction. At any instant their relative velocity of approach is ,
d
where 'd' is their separation at that instant. Find .
Q.609 Two objects of equal volume V =1m3 and different densities d1= 500 kg/m3 and
d2 = 1000 kg/m3 are glued to each other so that their contact surface is flat and
has an area A = 0.1 m2. When the objects are submerged in a certain liquid,
they float in stable equilibrium, the contact surface being parallel to the surface
of the liquid (see the diagram). How deep (H in meters) can the contact surface
be in the liquid so that the objects are not torn apart? The maximum force that
the glue can withstand is F=250 N.(Neglect atmospheric pressure)
Q.610 The figure shows a pond full of water having the shape of a truncated cone. The depth of the pond is
30m. The atmospheric pressure above the pond is 1.0 ×105 Pa. The circular top surface (radius = R2)
and circular bottom surface (radius = R1) of the pond are both parallel to the ground. The magnitude of
the force acting on the top surface is the same as the magnitude of the force acting on the bottom surface.
Obtain R2 + R1 (in m).
R2
30 m
37°
R1
Q.611 A block of wood weighs 16kg in air. A lead block which has apparent weight of 28kg in water is
attached to the block of wood, and both of them are submerged in water. If their combined apparent
weight in water is 19kg, find the density of wooden block in kg/m3. Take density of water = 1000 kg/m3.
Page # 201
Q.612 Water (density 1gm/cc) is to be sucked upto point A. The area of the narrow tube is 1cm2 and the wide
portion is 100 cm2. In this situation, minimum work required to be done is w1. When the tube is inverted
and water is to be sucked upto point B, the minimum work required to be done is w2. Find (w2 – w1) in
Joule. Fill 100 (w2 – w1) in OMR sheet.
40 cm
10 cm
10 cm
B
Q.613 A block of wood is floating in water such that 1/2 of it is submerged in water when the same block is
floated in alcohol, 1/3rd of it's volume is submerged. Now a mixture of water and alcohol is made taking
equal volume of both and block is floated in it. What is the % of it's volume that is now submerged?
Q.614 A hole in the horizontal bottom of the container is closed by a hemispherical cap of radius R (see figure).
The vessel is filled with liquid of density d. Bottom is at a depth of H. Find the force with which the cap
presses down on the bottom of the vessel. Neglect atmospheric pressure. If the force is a N, fill 'a' in
the OMR sheet. (Take : d = 103 kg/m3, H = 1m, R = 30 cm)
H
R
Q.615 Two solid balls have different radii but are made of same material. The balls are linked together with a
long thin thread and released from a large height. At the terminal velocity, the thread is under tension. The
larger ball has a fixed mass, but we have choice of the smaller ball with different masses. At what ratio of
larger and smaller mass will this tension be maximum ?
Q.616 A U-tube having uniform cross-section but unequal arm length l1 = 100 cm and l2 = 50 cm has same
liquid of density 1 filled in it upto a height h = 30 cm as shown in figure. Another liquid of density
2 = 1/2 is poured in arm A. Both liquids are immiscible. What length of the second liquid (in cm) should
be poured in A so that second overtone of A is in unison with fundamental tone of B. (Neglect end
correction) A
1
1 2
h
Page # 202
Q.617 A point source of sound is located somewhere along the x-axis. Experiments show that the same wave
front simultaneously reaches listeners at x = –8 m and x = +2.0 m.
A third listener is positioned along the positive y-axis. What is her y-coordinate (in m) if the same wave
front reaches her at the same instant as it does the first two listeners ?
Q.618 In the given figure, a string of linear mass density 3 × 10–2 kg/m and length L = 1 m, is stretched by a
force F = (3 – kt) N, where k is a constant and t is time in sec. At the time t = 0, a pulse is generated at
the end P of the string. Find the value of k (in N/s) if the value of force becomes zero as the pulse reaches
point Q.
Q.619 In a resonance column apparatus, first resonance is obtained when the water filling beaker
(of cylindrical shape) is just empty as shown. The water filling beaker is lowered down and it is seen that
second resonance is obtained when beaker is filled upto brim. If the tuning fork has a frequency 420 Hz.
What is the velocity (in m/s) of sound in air?
2 cm
4 cm
10 cm
Beaker
Q.620 Shin Chan and his mother have a tin whistle each. The pipe length of Shin chan's tin whistle is 52 cm long
while the pipe length of mother's tin whistle is 50 cm long. They both play at the same time, sounding the
whistles at their fundamental resonant frequencies. They note that they are not in tune with each other.
The velocity of sound in air is 325 m/s. Assume the whistle is a pipe with one end open find the beat
frequency (in Hz) that is heard when both whistles are playing simultaneously. (Round off to nearest
integer)
Q.621 If the kinetic energy of pulse travelling in a taut string is K × 10–2 mJ then find the value of K.
(Given T = 10 N &  = 0.1 kg/m.
Q.622 Two cylinders of equal masses, one made of material A and the other of material B, are heated to 50°C
and placed on two large blocks of ice at 0°C. If both the cylinders have the same height, find the ratio
(hA/hB) of their maximum depth of penetration in the ice. Assume that no heat is lost to the surroundings
and change in gravitational potential energy is not considered.
SA = 0.2 cal g–1 (C°)–1 ; A = 4 g cm–3 ;
SB = 0.1 cal g–1 (C°)–1 ; B = 2 g cm–3
Page # 203
Q.623 In two calorimeters we poured 200 g of water each - at temperatures of +30 ° C and +40 ° C. From the
"hot" calorimeter 50 g of water, is poured into "cold" calorimeter and stirred. Then, from "cold" calorim-
eter 50 g of water is poured in "hot" and again stirred. How many times do you have to pour the same
portion of water back and forth so that the temperature difference between water in the calorimeters
becomes less than 3 ° C? Heat loss during the transfer and heat capacity of calorimeters is neglected.
Q.624 A composite rod is made from stainless steel and iron and has a length of Steel
0.5 m. The cross-section of this composite rod consists of a square
within a circle. The square is 1 cm on a side. ksteel = 14 W/m°C, kiron =
80 W/m°C. One end of the rod is at 78°C and other end is in melting Iron
ice. Find the amount of ice melted in 7 minutes (in gm).
(Take  = 22/7).
Q.625 A small sphere (emissivity = 0.9, radius = r1) is located at the centre of a spherical asbestos shell
(thickness = 5.0 cm, outer radius = r2). The thickness of the shell is small compared to the inner and
outer radii of the shell. The temperature of the small sphere is 800 K, while the temperature of the inner
surface of the shell is 600 K. The temperature of small sphere is maintained constant. Assuming that
r2
 10.0 and ignoring any air inside the shell, find the temperature (in K) of the outer surface of the
r1
17
shell. Take : Kasbestor = 0.085W/m°C,  = × 10–8W/m2k4
3
Q.626 A room is heated by a radiator that has a constant temperature T (unknown). When the outside temperature
is 260 K, the room temperature is 300 K. However, when the outside temperature drops to 240 K, the
room temperature is only 290 K. Estimate the radiator temperature T.
3 1/ 2
Q.627 One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken from state A to state B through the process P = T .
2
It is found that its temperature increases by 100 K in this process. Now it is taken from state B to C
1 1/ 2
through a process for which internal energy is related to volume as U = V .Find the total work
2
performed by the gas (in Joule), if it is given that volume at B is 100 m3 and at C it is 1600 m3.
[Use R = 8.3 J/mol-K]
Q.628 0.5 mole of an ideal gas is kept inside an adiabatic cylinder of length ‘L’ and cross-sectional area ‘A’
closed by massless adiabatic piston. The cylinder is attached with a conducting rod of length ‘L’, cross-
1 2
sectional area m and thermal conductivity 415.5 W/m-K, whose other end is maintained at 0°C.
900
The piston is moved such that the temperature of the gas remains constant at 27°C. Find the velocity
(in mm/sec) of piston when it is at height L/2 from the bottom of cylinder. Rod is well lagged and has
negligible heat capacity. R = 8.31 J/mol-K.
27°C
L
A k 0°C
L
Page # 204
Q.629 The narrow tube with one of its ends sealed as shown in the figure, is in a vertical plane. In the 3L long
horizontal part of the tube a mercury column of length L blocks some oxygen gas of length L. The outside
air-pressure of p0 equals with the pressure of a mercury column of height L. Increasing the temperature
of the surrounding, the volume of the blocked gas doubles while the gas absorbs Q = 7J of heat from its
surroundings. How much work (in joule) is done by the expanding gas?
2L
L L L
Q.630 0.01 moles of an ideal diatomic gas is enclosed in an adiabatic cylinder of
cross-sectional area A = 10–4m2. In the arrangement shown, a block of mass M
= 0.8 kg is placed on a horizontal support, and piston of mass m = 1 kg is
suspended from a spring of stiffness constant k = 16 N/m. Initially, the spring is
relaxed and the volume of the gas is V = 1.4 × 104 m3.
When the gas in the cylinder is heated up the piston starts moving up and the spring gets compressed so
that the block M is just lifted up. Determine the heat supplied (in Joule).
Take atmospheric pressure P0 = 105 Nm, g = 10m/s2.
Q.631 A sample of ideal gas is taken through the cyclic process shown in the figure. The temperature of the gas
at state A is TA=200 K. At states B and C the temperature of the gas is the same. What is the greatest
temperature of the gas in kelvins during the cyclic process?
Q.632 A diatomic ideal gas is taken through the cyclic process shown in the figure. In state 1 the pressure of the
gas is 100 kPa and its temperature is 350 K. In state 2 the pressure is 300 kPa. What is the efficiency of
the cycle in percent rounded to nearest integer. [Take ln 3 = 12/11]
Q.633 In a linear particle accelerator two large plane uniformly charged are placed parallel to each other as
shown in the figure.
y
V
Charge +250V
x
–q
–q x(cm)
–10 +10
x= –10cm x= +10cm –250V

figure also shows variation of potential between planes. A charged particle carrying a charge
q = 1.6 × 10–19 C and having mass m = 16 × 10–31 kg is released from rest at x = – 10 cm, determine
time taken (in ns) by particle to strike the other plane. Neglect relativistic considerations.
Page # 205
Q.634 A thin spherical soap bubble has surface tension S. It's surface is charged with charge Q, it's volume is V.
It is found that when Q2 = nSV, the excess pressure inside the bubble becomes zero. Find n.
Q.635 The visible portion of a lightning strike is preceded by an invisible stage in which a column of electrons extends
downward from a cloud to the ground. Assume the linear charge density along the column is 1.00 × 10–3 C/
m. Treat the column of charge as if it were straight and infinitely long. At what distance (in m) from the column
of electrons does the electric field have a magnitude of 3.00 × 106 V/m , the dielectric strength for air? This is
an estimate of the radius of a visible lightning bolt. (Round off to nearest integer) (value of  is 8.85 × 10–12
C2 /Nm2 )
–3
 = –1.00 × 10 C/m
1.00m
Gaussian
surface

Q.636 An electric field is given by E  4î  3( y 2  2)ˆj pierces gaussian cube of side 1 m placed at origin such
that one of its corners is at origin & rest of sides are along positive side of coordinate axis. If the
magnitude of net charge enclosed is no then n (in SI units) will be equal to
Q.637 The diagram shows a semicircular ring carrying uniformly distributed charge + 2C on it. The radius of
the ring is 4cm . A point charge + 2C is taken slowly from the point (0, 0, 8cm) to (0, 8cm, 0). The
magnitude of work done is equal to 4J. After fixing the charge at its new position, the ring is rotated in
anticlockwise sense about the X-axis as seen from (16cm, 0, 0) by an angle /2. What is the magnitude
of work done by electric field during the rotation of the ring?
y
Initial position of
z Point Charge
Q.638 A particle is uncharged and is thrown vertically upward from ground level with a speed of 5 5 m / s in
a region of space having uniform electric field. As a result, it attains a maximum height h. The particle is
then given a positive charge +q and reaches the same maximum height h when thrown vertically upward
with a speed of 13 m/s. Finally, the particle is given a negative charge -q. Ignoring air resistance, deter-
mine the speed (in m/s) with which the negatively charged particle must be thrown vertically upward, so
that it attains exactly the same maximum height h.
Page # 206
Q.639 A square loop of side ' l ' each side having uniform linear charge density '' is placed in 'xy'
 a
lane as shown in the figure. There exists a non uniform electric field E = (x + l)
l
î where a and l are constants and x is the position of the point from origin along x-
axis. Find the resultant electric force on the loop (in Newtons), if l = 10 cm,
 = 20 C/m and a = 5 × 105 N/C.
Q.640 A positive charge +q1 is located to the left of a negative charge -q2. On a line passing through the two
charges, there are two places where the total potential is zero. The reference is assumed to be at infinity.
The first place is between the charges and is 4.00 cm to the left of the negative charge. The second place
is 7.00 cm to the right of the negative charge. If q2 = –12 C, what is the value of charge q1 in C.
Q.641 The two ends of a rubber string of negligible mass and having unstretched length 24 cm are fixed at the
same height as shown. A small object is attached to the string in its midpoint, thus the depression (h) of
the object in equilibrium is 5 cm. Then the small object is charged and vertical electric field (E1) is
applied. The equlibrium depression of the object increases to 9 cm,
then the electric field is changed to E2 and the depression of object in
equilibrium increases to 16 cm. If the ratio of electric field (E2/E1) in the
second case to that of in the first case is

k
, find the value of k.
4
Q.642 2 conducting objects one with charge of +Q and another with –Q are kept on x-axis at x = –3 and
 4
x = + 4 respectively. The electric field on the x-axis is given by 3Q x 2   . What is the capacitance C
 3
1
of this configuration of objects. Fill (in F–1) in OMR sheet.
C
Q.643 In the connection shown in the figure the switch K is open and the capacitor is uncharged. Then we
close the switch and let the capacitor charge up to the maximum and open the switch again. Then
C
R1 R2
V0 K
(a) the current through R1 be I1 immediately after closing the switch;
(b) the current through R2 be I2 a long time after the switch was closed;
(c) the current through R2 be I3 immediately after reopening the switch;
I1
I 2 I3 (in ampere ) (Use the following data : V0=30 V, R1=10 k, R2=5 k.)
–1
Find
Page # 207
Q.643 An electrometer is charged to 3 kV. Then the electrometer is touched with an-initially neutral-metal ball,
mounted on an insulating rod, and then the metal ball is taken away and earthed. The process is done for
10 times, and finally the electrometer reads 1.5 kV. After this, at least how many times must the above
process be repeated in order that the electrometer reads less than 1 kV?
Q.644 Four uncharged capacitors are charged by 24 V battery as shown in the figure. How much charge (in
C) flows through S when it is closed?
Q.645 The figure shows four identical conducting plates each of area A. The separation
between the consecutive plates is equal to L. When both the switches are closed,
if charge present on the upper surface of the lowest plate from the top is written
xV0  0 A
as ,then what is the value of x ? Treat symbols as having usual meaning.
L
Q.646 Two identical potentiometer wires w1 and w2 of equal length l, connected

to a battery of emf p and internal resistance 1  through two switches
s1 and s2. A battery of emf  is balanced on these potentiometer wires
one by one. If potentiometer wire w1 is of resistance 2  and balancing
length is l/2 on it, when only s1 is closed and s2 is open. On closing s2
and opening s1 the balancing length on w2 is found to be 2l 3 ,then
find the resistance (in )of potentiometer wire w2.
R R R
Q.647 In the circuit shown below, all the three voltmeters are identical and V1 V3
have very high resistance. Each resistor has the same resistance. The V2
voltage of the ideal battery shown is 9V. Find the reading of voltmeter R R R
V3 (in volts).
V = 9 volt
Q.648 Figure shows a square loop 10 cm on each side in the x-y plane with its centre at the origin. An infinite
wire is at z = 12 cm above y-axis.
z
i1 = 65A 12 cm
D
y
A
C
10 cm i2 = 78A
B x
What is torque on loop due to magnetic force? If torque is expressed as x ×10–7 N-m, fill value of x.
Page # 208
Q.649 A long straight wire lies on y-axis and carries a current of 8 A in –y direction. In addition to the magnetic
field produced by the wire, a uniform magnetic field of 1.4 × 10–6 T î is also present. What is the
magnitude of net magnetic field at (1, 1, 1). Express your answer in a × 10–7 T and fill a in OMR sheet.
Q.650 At a certain place, the angle of dip is tan–1(4/5) and angle of declination is 37º. The earth’s magnetic field
has a horizontal component of 0.1 T at that point. A square coil of side 2 m is kept in a vertical plane such
that its normal points in the true north direction. If the coil is made of 4 rods each of mass 3 kg and the
coil is free to rotate about any axis. If the angular acceleration (in rad/s2) of the coil is k × 10–2, when a
current of 1 A passes through it. Find the value of k.
Q.651 The diagram shows a circuit having a coil of resistance R = 10  and inductance L connected to a
conducting rod PQ which can slide on a perfectly conducting circular ring of radius 10 cm with its centre
at 'P'. Assume that friction & gravity are absent and a constant uniform magnetic field of 5 T exists as
shown in figure. At t = 0, the circuit is switched on and simultaneously a time varying external torque is
applied on the rod so that it rotates about P with a constant angular velocity 40 rad/s. Find magnitude of
this torque (in µNm) when current reaches half of its maximum value. Neglect the self inductance of the
loop formed by the circuit.
Q.652 The L-shaped conductor as shown in figure moves a 10 m/s across a stationary L-shaped conductor in
a 0.10 T magnetic field. The two vertices overlap so that the enclosed area is zero at t = 0. The conductor
has resistance of 0.010 ohms per meter. What is current (in Amp.) at t = 0.10 sec. (Round off to nearest
integer.)
10 m/s
Q.653 The long, horizontal pair of rails shown in the figure is connected using resistance R. The distance
between the rails is , the electrical resistance of the rails is negligible. A conducting wire of mass m and
length  can slide without friction on the pair of rails, in a vertical, homogeneous magnetic field of
induction B.
B
R  F0
m P
A force of magnitude F0 is exerted for sufficiently long time onto the conducting wire, so that the
speed of the wire becomes nearly constant. The force F0 is now removed at a certain point P. What
distance
(in m) does the conducting wire cover on rails from point P before stopping?
(Given : F0 = 20N, m = 1.6 gm, R = 0.01,  = 10 cm, B = 0.1 T )
Page # 209
Q.654 A thin conducting rod of length l = 5m is moved such that its end B moves along the X-axis while end A
moves along the Y-axis. A uniform magnetic field B = 6k̂ T exists in the region. At some instant, velocity
of end B is 3 m/s and the rod makes an angle of  = 37° with the X-axis as shown in the figure. Then, at
this instant what is the emf induced (in volt) in the rod.
Q.655 A conducting frame is placed in a horizontal plane as shown in the figure. The two sides are parallel and
separated by a distance of 0.25 m. A massless conducting rod can slide without friction on the frame.
The total resistance of the circuit is 40 . The rod is connected to a 0.2 kg mass by a massless cord
which passes over a massless and frictionless pulley. A uniform magnetic field of 2 T points vertically
upward. The voltage of the battery is 100 V. Find the constant velocity in m/s with which the rod and
mass eventually move.
B = 2T
40 
0.25 m
100 V
0.2 kg
Q.656 A coil with 1500 turns, a radius of 5.0 cm and a resistance of 12 surrounds a solenoid with 240 turns/
cm and a radius of 4cm ; see figure. The current in the solenoid changes at a constant rate from 0 to 20
A in 0.10 s. Calculate the magnitude of the induced current (in mA) in the 1500 turn coil. (2 = 10
Neglect self inductance of the coil).
Q.657 An RLC circuit includes a 1.6 H inductor and a 250 F capacitor rated at 400 V. The circuit is connected
across a sine-wave generator whose peak voltage is 32V. What minimum resistance must the circuit
have to ensure that the capacitor voltage does not exceed its rated value when the generator is at the
resonant frequency? Fill 10R in OMR sheet.
Q.658 If an AC voltage 100 V is applied between points A and B, then current of 1 A and phase difference
between current and voltage will be = 37°. If the same voltage is applied between points B and C,
then current of 5 A and  = 53°. What will be the impedance (in ) in the chain, if the same voltage is
applied between points A and C? Round off to nearest integer.
A B C
Page # 210
Q.659 In the given LCR series circuit find the reading (in A) of the hot wire ammeter.
Q.660 A beam of light parallel to the principal axis is focused on a screen with the help of lens, forming a circular
spot with a diameter of A. If we put a plane-parallel glass plate of thickness h and refractive index n
between the lens and the screen, the diameter of the bright spot on the screen increases. The diameter of
the lens is d and focal length F. Find the new diameter in mm. (Take F = 10 cm, A = 1 cm, n = 1.5, d =
2 cm, h = 3cm.)
Q.661 Figure shows the path of a light beam in an isosceles prism with apex angle  = 60 ° (inside the prism
beam is parallel to the base). Find the angle of deflection in degrees. The refractive index of prism
material is 1.732.


Q.662 Along the main optical axis of a converging lens with focal length F = 5 cm two fireflies are moving
towards each other. They are on opposite sides of the lens. The speed of the fireflies is the same
V = 2 cm / sec. After what minimum time (in sec.) does the first firefly meet the image of the second, if at
the initial time they were at distances 20 cm and 30 cm from the lens respectively? Round off to nearest
integer.
Q.663 After all possible reflection and refractions the final image is located at a distance 'x' cm from air-glass
interface. Then value of 7x is
Object
Air 20cm
Glass
15cm
µ = 1.5
Concave mirror
f = 10 cm
Q.664 An insect at point 'P' sees its two images in the water mirror system as shown in the
figure. One image is formed due to direct partial reflection from water surface
and the other image is formed due to refraction, reflection & again refraction
by water mirror system in order. Find the separation (in cm) between the two
images.
Mirror M has focal length 60 cm.[Take w = 4/3]
Page # 211
Q.665 A plane mirror is suspended vertically at the center of a large thin-walled spherical flask filled with water.
The diameter of the flask is 10 inches. An observer whose eye is 35 inches from the mirror as shown in
figure tries to see an image of his own eye. What is distance of the image from the eye (in inches). The
4
effect of the thin glass walls of the flask may be neglected. Take µwater = .
3
Q.666 A light ray parallel to the x-axis strikes the outer reflecting surface of a sphere at a point (2, 2, 0). Its
center is at the point (0, 0, –1). The unit vector along the direction of the reflected ray is x î  yˆj  zk̂
yz
Find the value of .
x2
Q.667 A block of mass 'm' is attached to a spring. Block is released from rest, when spring is in natural length.
Block is along the principal axis of concave mirror and size of block is very small. When spring is in
natural length then block is at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror, distance (in cm) in which the image
formed by mirror oscillates is (mass of the block = 5 × 10–2 kg, spring constant k = 20 N/m.)
m ROC = 20 cm
Q.668 A vessel, whose bottom is flat and perfectly reflecting, is filled with water (index = 4/3) upto a
height = 40 cm. A point object in air above is moving towards the water surface with a constant
speed = 4 m/s. What is the relative speed of its final image (in m/s), as seen by the object itself, at a
moment when the object is 30 cm above the water surface?
Q.669 Interference fringes of yellow light of wavelength 6000 Å are formed by Billet split lenses. The distance
from source to lens is 24 cms. The focal length of lens is 15 cms. The lens halves are separated by
0.06 mm. The distance of source to screen is 200 cms. Calculate the fringe width(in mm). Round off the
answer to nearest integer.
Page # 212
Q.670 For an achromatic combination, three different lenses are combined. Dispersive power of their material
are 0.066, 0.055 and 0.040 and their main focal lengths are – 22 cm, –11 cm and 'f ' respectively then
find the value of ' f ' (in cm.)
Q.671 Find the total number of fringes formed on screen in the Lloyd's mirror arrangement shown.
Q.672 In a modified YDSE the source S of wavelength 5000Å oscillates about axis of setup according to the

equation y = 0.5 sin   t, where y is in millimeter and t in second. At what time t will the intensity at P,,
6
a point exactly in front of slit S1, be maximum for the first time ?
S1 P
d = 1mm x
S
S2
1m D = 2m
Q.673 A thin film of plastic (n = 1.56) is 0.25 µm thick. It is sandwiched between two glass slabs with refractive
indice of 1.58 and 1.52, respectively. White light (400 – 700 nm) is first incident normally on the slab for
which n = 1.58. Which visible wavelength (in nm) is missing in the reflected light ?
n=1.58
n=1.56
n=1.52
Q.674 Visible light of variable wavelength is incident normally on a thin sheet of plastic in air. The reflected light
has a minima only for  = 512 nm and  = 640 nm in the visible spectrum. what is the minimum thickness
(in µm) of the film (µ = 1.28) ?
Q.675 Visible light of variable wavelength is incident normally on a thin sheet of plastic in air. The reflected light
has a minima only for  = 512 nm and  = 640 nm in the visible spectrum. what is the minimum thickness
(in µm) of the film (µ = 1.28) ?
Page # 213
Q.676 A very fine hair-like fiber is stuck between two microscope slides. As a result of this, there is a wedge of
air between them. When the slides are illuminated normally (from above) with light of wavelength 550
nm, bright and dark interference bands are formed. The fiber is seen to lie at the position of fifth dark
band counting from the common edge. What is the diameter (in nm) of the fiber?
Q.677 A flat bottomed metal tank filled with water is dragged along a horizontal floor at the rate of 20 m/s. The
tank is of mass 100 kg and contains 900 kg of water and all the heat produced in the dragging is
conducted to the water through the bottom plate of the tank. If the bottom plate has an effective area of
conduction 1m2 and thickness 5 cm and the temperature of water in the tank remains constant at 50°C,
calculate the temperature of the bottom surface of the tank. Given the coefficient of friction between the
tank and the floor is 0.5 and K for the material of the tank is 100 J/m sec K.
Q.678 A rod PQ of length l = 1 m is pivoted at an end P and is freely rotating in a horizontal plane at an angular
speed  about a vertical axis passing through P. If coefficient of linear expansion of material of rod is 
= 2×10–4 / °C then calculate percentage change in its angular speed (in multiple of 10–1) if the temperature
of system is increased by T = 10°C.
Q.679 A capstan is a rotating drum (cylinder) over which a rope or cord slides in order to increase the tension
due to friction. If the difference in tension between the two ends of the rope is 500 N and the capstan has
a diameter of 10 cm and rotates with angular velocity 10 rad/s. Capstan is made of iron and has mass 5
kg, specific heat 1000 J/kg K. At what rate does temperature rise ? Assume that the temperature in the
capstan is uniform and all the thermal energy generated flows into it. Express your answer as x × 10–4
°C/s. Fill up value of x.
0
T< T0
T0
Q.680 In a slow reaction, heat is being evolved at a rate about 10mW in a liquid. If the heat were being
generated by the decay of 32P, a radioactive isotope of phosphorus that has half-life of 14 days and emits
only beta-particles with a mean energy of 700KeV, estimate the number of 32P atoms in the liquid.
Express your answer in form of A × 1015 and fill A in OMR sheet. Round off A to nearest integer.
[Take : ln 2 = 0.7]
Page # 214
Q.681 In a sample initially there are equal number of atoms of two radioactive isotopes A and B. 3 days later the
number of atoms of A is twice that of B. Half life of B is 1.5 days. What is half life of isotope A ?
(in days)
Q.682 The reaction 37 Li  11H  74 Be  10 n is endothermic. Assuming that Li nuclei is free and at rest. What
is the minimum kinetic energy (in keV) of incident proton so that this reaction occurs ? Take Q value of
this reaction as –1645 keV.
Q.683 Water kept in a porus pot evaporates through the walls of pot. Rate of evaporation is proportional to
volume of water. When water is kept in the pot 75% water get evaporated in 16 hrs.
A suction mechanism attached in the pot sucks water at the rate which is also proportional to volume of
water in the pot. Without evaporations, half of the water kept in pot is sucked in 24 hr. The pot is filled
with 16 kg of water, with evaporation and suction acting simultaneously, what amount of water (in kg)
will be left is pot after one day.
Q.684 An X-ray tube operated at a DC potential difference of 40 kV, produces heat at a rate of 3136 W.
Assume that 2% of energy of the electron is converted into X-rays. The number of electrons per second
striking the target is n x 1017 fill n in your OMR sheet.
Q.685 When the voltage applied to an X-ray tube increased from V1 = 15.5 KV to V2 = 31 KV, the wavelength
interval between the K line and the short wavelength cut-off of the continuous X-ray spectrum increases
by a factor of 1.3. Find the atomic number of the element of the target.
(Take : hc = 1240 eV nm and R = 1 × 107 /m)
Q.686 If the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron beam is 5 × 10–10 m, then what is the retarding potential, (in
volt) necessary to completely stop the beam. (Round off to nearest integer)
Q.687 The peak emission from a black body at a certain temperature occurs at a wavelength of 6200 Å. On
increasing its temperature, the total radiation emitted is increased 16 times. These radiations are allowed
to fall on a metal surface. Photoelectrons emitted by the peak radiation at higher temperature can be
bought to rest by applying a potential equivalent to the excitation potential corresponding to the transition
for the level n = 4 to n = 2 in the Bohr's hydrogen atom. The work function of the metal is given by

eV where  is the numerical constant. Find the value of .
100 Light source
Q.688 The figure below shows a vaccum tube containing electrodes made of
different metals, 1 and 2 whose work functions are 1 and 2.
The electrodes are illuminated simultaneously. The maximum
1 2
kinetic energy of photoelectrons reaching plate 2 is 1 eV and
maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons reaching plate 1 is 3
eV. Assume that photoelectron emitted from either plate do not + –
A
interact with each other. 1 = 1.5 eV and 2 = 0.7 eV. Find V0
wavelength (in nm) of the electromagnetic wave used.
Page # 215
Q.689 Figure shows the stopping potential versus the light frequency for a metal cathode used in a photoelec-
tric-effect experiment. Suppose this cathode is now illuminated with 6.63µW of 300 nm light and that the
efficiency of converting photons to photoelectrons is 10%. Take h = 6.63 × 10–34 Jsec, c = 3 × 108 ms–1
Vamp(V)
2.50
1.25
0
0 3 6 9 12
14
f × 10 Hz
What is the power (in watt) of emitted photoelectron beam assuming that on an average, each photo-
5Kmax
electron emitted has energy . Assume that anode potential is sufficiently positive. Express your
6
answer in form of 'X' × 10–9 W fill 'X' in OMR sheet after rounding off to nearest integer.
Page # 228

Q.1 B Q.2 B Q.3 D Q.4 A Q.5 A Q.6 B Q.7 D
Q.8 B Q.9 B Q.10 C Q.11 B Q.12 A Q.13 B Q.14 A
Q.15 C Q.16 B Q.17 C Q.18 C Q.19 B Q.20 B Q.21 A
Q.22 A Q.23 C Q.24 B Q.25 C Q.26 D Q.27 B Q.28 B
Q.29 C Q.30 A Q.31 D Q.32 B Q.33 A Q.34 A Q.35 C
Q.36 C Q.37 C Q.38 B Q.39 B Q.40 A Q.41 B Q.42 A
Q.43 D Q.44 A Q.45 D Q.46 B Q.47 B Q.48 A Q.49 A
Q.50 A Q.51 D Q.52 D Q.53 C Q.54 C Q.55 D Q.56 B
Q.57 B Q.58 A Q.59 B Q.60 B Q.61 C Q.62 C Q.63 B
Q.64 A Q.65 A Q.66 A Q.67 C Q.68 B Q.69 A Q.70 A
Q.71 C Q.72 C Q.73 C Q.74 A Q.75 B Q.76 C Q.77 A
Q.78 B Q.79 A Q.80 B Q.81 A Q.82 D Q.83 C Q.84 B
Q.85 B Q.86 B Q.87 C Q.88 C Q.89 A Q.90 A Q.91 B
Q.92 C Q.93 B Q.94 C Q.95 D Q.96 D Q.97 B Q.98 A
Q.99 C Q.100 A Q.101 C Q.102 C Q.103 A Q.104 D Q.105 B
Q.106 C Q.107 B Q.108 A Q.109 B Q.110 A Q.111 D Q.112 C
Q.113 A Q.114 D Q.115 A Q.116 C Q.117 B Q.118 A Q.119 B
Q.120 A Q.121 B Q.122 B Q.123 C Q.124 A Q.125 B Q.126 E
Q.127 B Q.128 C Q.129 D Q.130 B Q.131 B Q.132 B Q.133 A
Q.134 A Q.135 C Q.136 C Q.137 C Q.138 A Q.139 C Q.140 B
Q.141 D Q.142 A Q.143 B Q.144 A Q.145 C Q.146 D Q.147 B
Q.148 C Q.149 C Q.150 A Q.151 C Q.152 B Q.153 C Q.154 C
Q.155 A Q.156 D Q.157 D Q.158 C Q.159 C Q.160 B Q.161 B
Q.162 A Q.163 D Q.164 A Q.165 D Q.166 C Q.167 C Q.168 A
Q.169 C Q.170 D Q.171 C Q.172 B Q.173 B Q.174 C Q.175 C
Q.176 B Q.177 A Q.178 A Q.179 B Q.180 C Q.181 D Q.182 A
Q.183 B Q.184 C Q.185 A Q.186 B Q.187 B Q.188 D Q.189 A
Q.190 C Q.191 C Q.192 B Q.193 D Q.194 A
COMPREHENSION TYPE
Q.195 B Q.196 C Q.197 D Q.198 B Q.199 D

Q.200 A Q.201 D Q.202 A Q.203 A Q.204 A
Q.205 B Q.206 C Q.207 A Q.208 B Q.209 A
Q.210 B Q.211 D Q.212 A Q.213 A Q.214 A
Q.215 A Q.216 A Q.217 B Q.218 B Q.219 ABCD
Q.220 ABCD Q.221 B Q.222 D Q.223 B Q.224 D
Page # 229
Q.225 C Q.226 A Q.227 D Q.228 B Q.229 BC
Q.230 C Q.231 AC Q.232 AB Q.233 AC Q.234 D
Q.235 C Q.236 B Q.237 A Q.238 C Q.239 D
Q.240 A Q.241 C Q.242 C Q.243 C Q.244 D
Q.245 BD Q.246 B Q.247 D Q.248 C Q.249 A
Q.250 C Q.251 B Q.252 B Q.253 B Q.254 B
Q.255 C Q.256 C Q.257 A Q.258 D Q.259 B
Q.260 A Q.261 B Q.262 B Q.263 C Q.264 B
Q.265 D Q.266 C Q.267 C Q.268 A Q.269 C
Q.270 A Q.271 C Q.272 A Q.273 D Q.274 C
Q.275 D Q.276 A Q.277 C Q.278 A Q.279 C
Q.280 D Q.281 B Q.282 B Q.283 A Q.284 B
Q.285 A Q.286 B Q.287 D Q.288 B Q.289 A
Q.290 C Q.291 A Q.292 A Q.293 D Q.294 C
Q.295 A Q.296 C Q.297 C Q.298 D Q.299 A
Q.300 A Q.301 B Q.302 D Q.303 C Q.304 C
Q.305 D Q.306 A Q.307 BCD Q.308 BC Q.309 A
Q.310 C Q.311 B Q.312 C Q.313 D Q.314 B
Q.315 A Q.316 A Q.317 D Q.318 C Q.319 B
Q.320 D Q.321 C Q.322 B Q.323 A Q.324 B
Q.325 A Q.326 A Q.327 D Q.328 B
REASONING TYPE
Q.329 A Q.330 D Q.331 D Q.332 A Q.333 D

Q.334 D Q.335 B Q.336 D Q.337 B Q.338 A
Q.339 D Q.340 D Q.341 D Q.342 D Q.343 D
Q.344 D Q.345 D Q.346 D Q.347 A Q.348 D
Q.349 B Q.350 A Q.351 C Q.352 A Q.353 D
Q.354 C Q.355 C Q.356 C Q.357 D Q.358 B
Q.359 D Q.360 A Q.361 D Q.362 D Q.363 C
Q.364 C Q.365 D Q.366 C Q.367 D Q.368 A
Q.369 D Q.370 B Q.371 C Q.372 B Q.373 D
Q.374 D Q.375 A Q.376 A Q.377 D Q.378 A
Q.379 C Q.380 A Q.381 A Q.382 D Q.383 D
Q.384 A Q.385 D Q.386 C Q.387 B Q.388 D
Q.389 B Q.390 A Q.391 D Q.392 D Q.393 D
Q.394 D Q.395 D Q.396 D Q.397 B Q.398 C
Q.399 A Q.400 D Q.401 B Q.402 D Q.403 B
Page # 230

Q.404 ABCD Q.405 ABCD Q.406 ACD Q.407 AB Q.408 AC
Q.409 ABD Q.410 BD Q.411 AB Q.412 AC Q.413 BCD
Q.414 ABCD Q.415 ABD Q.416 ABD Q.417 ABCD Q.418 CD
Q.419 ABC Q.420 ABC Q.421 AB Q.422 C Q.423 D
Q.424 AC Q.425 ABCD Q.426 BC Q.427 ABCD Q.428 BCD
Q.429 AC Q.430 ACD Q.431 ABCD Q.432 ACD Q.433 D
Q.434 AD Q.435 ABD Q.436 AD Q.437 CD Q.438 BD
Q.439 ABC Q.440 ABC Q.441 AD Q.442 ABC Q.443 ABCD
Q.444 ABCD Q.445 ABCD Q.446 ABC Q.447 BCD Q.448 ABC
Q.449 ABC Q.450 ACD Q.451 AC Q.452 ABD Q.453 ABC
Q.454 ACD Q.455 BD Q.456 ABCD Q.457 AD Q.458 AD
Q.459 AD Q.460 ACD Q.461 BC Q.462 AD Q.463 BD
Q.464 ACD Q.465 A Q.466 ABCD Q.467 ACD Q.468 BD
Q.469 BD Q.470 CD Q.471 ABCD Q.472 BD Q.473 CD
Q.474 BC Q.475 AC Q.476 A Q.477 ABD Q.478 ACD
Q.479 ACD Q.480 AB Q.481 ACD Q.482 AC Q.483 BC
Q.484 AD Q.485 ABD Q.486 AD Q.487 ABCD Q.488 AD
Q.489 AC Q.490 ABD Q.491 AC Q.492 ABD Q.493 AB
Q.494 ABC Q.495 ABD Q.496 ACD Q.497 BD Q.498 BC
Q.499 ABD Q.500 ABCD Q.501 ACD Q.502 ACD Q.503 ABCD
Q.504 ABC Q.505 C Q.506 ACD Q.507 ABCD Q.508 AD
Q.509 ACD Q.510 BCD Q.511 AD Q.512 CD Q.513 A
Q.514 BC Q.515 ABD Q.516 AC Q.517 AC Q.518 AB
Q.519 BD Q.520 ABD Q.521 AB Q.522 BCD Q.523 ABCD
Q.524 BC Q.525 BCD Q.526 BC Q.527 AC Q.528 ABC
Q.529 BCD Q.530 ABC Q.531 ABD Q.532 BC Q.533 BCD
Q.534 BD
Q.535 [(i) B C; (ii) A C D] Q.536 [(A) PR (B) S (C) Q ]

Q.537 [(A) Q (B) S (C) P (D) R] Q.538 [(A) PS (B) PR (C) Q R]
Q.539 [(A) Q (B) PR (C) Q ] Q.540 [(A)-Q (B)-S (C)-R (D)-P ]
Q.541 [(A) Q (B) R (C) P (D) S] Q.542 [(A)-R (B)-Q (C)-S (D)-P ]
Q.543 [(A) PQR (B) PQR (C) PQ (D) PQR ] Q.544 [(A) PR (B) QR (C) R (D) Q R]
Q.545 [(A) PR (B) S (C) Q (D) S ] Q.546 [(A) P; (B) P; (C) P S; (D) Q S]
Q.547 [(A) Q (B) R (C)-P (D)-S] Q.548 [(A) QS (B) P (C) Q T (D) QS ]
Q.549 [(A) P ; (B) S ; (C) R ] Q.550 [(A) P Q (B) PS (C) P R ]
Page # 231
Q.551 [(A) P (B) R S (C) Q T (D) P R ] Q.552 [(A) Q (B) S (C) R (D) R]
Q.553 [(A) QT (B) PS (C) P (D) ST ] Q.554 [(A) R; (B) P ; (C) S; (D) Q ]
Q.555 [(A) P (B) P (C) Q ] Q.556 [(A) S (B) QRS (C) QS ]
Q.557 [(A) PQ ; (B) R S T ; (C) P Q T ; (D) Q ] Q.558 [(A) P R ; (B) Q ; (C) P S ]
Q.559 [(A) Q; (B) P S; (C) P Q R; (D)Q R] Q.560 [(A) S; (B) P; (C) R; (D) Q]
Q.561 [(A) PQS ; (B) PQRS ; (C) PQS ; (D) PQRS] Q.562 [(A) R (B) P Q (C) S (D) P Q ]
Q.563 [(A)-QR (B)-PRS (C)-PQR (D)-RS] Q.564 [(A) PQR (B) QST (C) ST (D) PR ]
Q.565 [(A) R ; (B) R ; (C) S ; (D) Q ]
Q.566 [(A) P Q (B) PRS (C) P T (D) PQRST ]
Q.567 [(A) PQRT (B) Q R (C) Q R (D) PQT ] Q.568 [(A) P R; (B) S; (C) P Q R; (D) P R]
Q.569 [(A) Q (B) R (C) S ] Q.570 [(A) QRS (B) S (C) P (D) T ]
Q.571 [(A) PQ ; (B) PQ ; (C) R ;(D) PST ] Q.572 [(A) PR (B) QR (C) QS ]
Q.573 [(A) PT (B) PS (C) QR (D) PR] Q.574 [(A) P (B) Q (C) RS]
Q.575 [(A) QR; (B) PR; (C) PS; (D) PR] Q.576 [(A) R; (B) S; (C) P; (D) Q]
Q.577 [(A) Q R; (B) P R; (C) P R S; (D) Q R S] Q.578 [(A)-QS (B)-QR (C)-PQ (D)-RS]
Q.579 [(A) PQ; (B) PQRS; (C) P] Q.580 [(a) (ii) (b) (i) (c) (iii) ]
Q.581 [(A) QR (B) RST (C) Q (D) PRST ] Q.582 [(A) R ; (B) S ; (C) P ; (D) QR]
Q.583 [(A) P (B) P (C) R]
SUBJECTIVE TYPE
Q.584 0625 Q.585 0015 Q.586 0010.00 Q.587 4 sec

Q.588 0007 Q.589 0197 Q.590 750 Q.591 40
Q.592 0080 Q.593 10 Q.594 7 Q.595 0020
Q.596 0010 Q.597 5 m/s Q.598 0 m/s Q.599 40
Q.600 0045 Q.601 50 Q.602 7 Q.603 0030
Q.604 0004 Q.605 0002 Q.606 3 Q.607 3000 sec.
Q.608 0008 Q.609 3m Q.610 0120 Q.611 0640
Q.612 0297 Q.613 40 Q.614 0720 Q.615 8
Q.616 0060 Q.617 4 Q.618 20 Q.619 336 m/s
Q.620 0006 Q.621 15 Q.622 4 Q.623 5
Q.624 1716 Q.625 0516 Q.626 340 Q.627 435
Q.628 0005 Q.629 0002 Q.630 0075 J Q.631 2400
Q.632 0013 Q.633 40 Q.634 0096 Q.635 6m
Q.636 0003 Q.637 0004 Q.638 0009 Q.639 6N
Q.640 0044 Q.641 0017 Q.642 119 Q.643 0750
Q.643 0006 Q.644 12 Q.645 3 Q.646 1
Q.647 0002 Q.648 0720 Q.649 10 Q.650 0005
Page # 232
Q.651 1250 Q.652 35 A Q.653 0320.00 Q.654 21
Q.655 0120 Q.656 3840 Q.657 0064 Q.658 0119
Q.659 0004 Q.660 12 mm Q.661 0060 Q.662 0006
Q.663 0010 Q.664 24 cm Q.665 0021 Q.666 0032
Q.667 0010 Q.668 0008.00 Q.669 5 mm Q.670 5 cm
Q.671 0012 Q.672 0001 Q.673 520 nm Q.674 0001
Q.675 0001 Q.676 1100 Q.677 100°C Q.678 0004
Q.679 0500 Q.680 0154 Q.681 0003 Q.682 1880 keV
Q.683 0001 Q.684 5 Q.685 26 Q.686 6
Q.687 0145 Q.688 400 Q.689 0221
Page # 233
1. [a] = T2
[x] = L
T2
[P] = ML–1T–2 =
[b]L
T2
[b] = = M–1T4
ML1T 2 L
[a ] T2
  1 4 = MT–2
[ b] M T
2. L = Ma Tb (ML2 T–2)C
a+c=0
2c = 1
1 1
c= ,a=
2 2
b = 2c = 0  b=1
3. Nrotations  P msd
P
1 rotation (100 divisions)  msd
N
1 P
45 division    45 msd (mm)
100 N
1 P
The reading shows two msd and 45 on the circular theremore reading = 2 mm +   45 mm
100 N
4. VS = 4, MS = 2.7
= MS + VS × LC
= 2.7 + 0.04 = 2.74
5. zero error = –(10 – 7) × 0.1 = – 0.3 mm
diameter = 77.0 + 8 × 0.1 – (0.3)
= 78.1 mm
x 36
6. = = 9
16 64
dx d 0.5  10 1 x 16
= =
x (1  ) 36  64 G
0.05  9 1
dx = = 
36  64 5120
1
x=9± 
5120
Page # 234
f u v
7. 2 = + u = v for optical bench
f u2 v2
1   2 2 dv 
 2 × d(f) = u  3  3  =0
f u v du  for min error
dv v3 v2
 =– 3 =– 2  v=u
du u u
for u = 2f, error is min.
 2 2  t 
8. a = [2î  6 tĵ  cos  k̂ ] m/s2
9 3
 
at t = 0, r = 0 and v  ( 2î  ˆj) m/s The position vector at t = 2 sec is

dv 2 2  t 
= [2î  6tĵ  cos  k̂ ]
dt 9 3
 t
v
  2 2  t  

 ˆ 0 
d v = 2 î  6 t ĵ 
9
cos   k̂  dt
3 
( 2 î  j)
 2 2 3   
v  ( 2î  ˆj) = 2 t î  3t 2 ĵ   sin   t k̂
9  3
 2 
v = ( 2î  ˆj) + 2 t î  3t 2 ĵ   sin   t k̂
3 3
 2 2   
v = [(2  2 t )î  (3t  1) ĵ  sin  t  k̂ ]
3 3 

 d r [(2  2 t )î  (3t 2  1) ĵ  2 sin   t  k̂ ]
v= =
dt 3 3 

r t
  2    
 dr =  [(2  2t )î  (3t  1) ĵ   3 sin 3 t k̂  dt
2
0 0
 ( 2 t  t 2 ) î  ( t 3  t ) ĵ  2   cos(t / 3) k̂
r =
3 /3
 ( 2 t  t 2 ) î  ( t 3  t ) ĵ  2 cos t k̂
r =
3
 (2  2  4)î  (8  2) ĵ  2 cos 2   1 k̂
r =  
  3  

r = 8î  10ˆj  3k̂
Page # 235
u 2 sin 2 100 2 1
9. R= = = 1000 m
g 10
R 2u cos 2
= + × 
R u sin 2
R 21
 =  R = 20 m
1000 100
980 m < R < 1020 m ]
10. Length of rope = const.

x + P + 2y + ( x  P' ) 2  P 2 = const.
dx 2dy 1 dx
dt
+0+
dt
+
2
( x  P' ) 2  P 2 × 2(x–P') dt = 0
v – 2v' + cos  v = 0
2v' = v(1 + cos)
v v
 v' = (1 + cos) = ( 1 + cos 60°)
2 2
3v
v' = Ans. ]
4
11. Here V = t  2 = 2–t for t  2  t–2 for 4 t > 2

x t
dx
V= or  dx   Vdt
dt 0 0
2 4
 (2  t ) dt   (t  2) dt = 4 meter Ans.
0 2
12. From fig:–

For time interval t = 0 to t = 1 sec
Slope of x-t graph is negative and increasing, so velocity increases in negative direction.
For t = 1 to 2 sec
The slope is +ve and decreasing, so velocity is decreasing in +ve direction and become zero at
t=2
So, (A) is correct.
vAW vAG
B
13.
vWG
A
Page # 236
14. P is point on plane for shell when it passes near edge of plateau for
greater angle of projection.
In region AP shell cannot hit
xmax = AP
Equation of trajectory for projectile
gx 2
2 (1 + tan )
y = xtan – 2
2u
for point E y = 0 & x = 960 m
10  (960) 2 10  960 2
 tan  × 2  (100) 2 – (tan)x + 2  (100) 2 = 0
2
 tan = 3/4, 4/3

for tan = 4/3, AP is least
Now, equation of trajectory becomes,
4 x 2  25 
y= x–  
3 2000  9 
for landing point on plane (P), y = –960 m
4 x2
 –960 = x–
3 720
solving we get acceptable solution x = 1440 m
AP = x – 960 = 480 m ]
15. Let distance between the buses be L

Velocity of man relative to bus moving in same direction = v – u
& velocity of man’s relative to bus moving in opposite direction = v + u
 v – u = L/(18 min) & v + u = L/(6 min)
On solving, we get u = v/2  v = 40 km/hr {u = 20 km/hr (given)}
18
& L= (40  20) = 6 km
60
Speed = distance/time  40 km/hr = 6 km/T  T = 9 min
16. Let the third particle be at point C at time t and has velocity V from figure.
Vt 6t 2t 1
= also, tan  = =
sin  sin( 45  ) 6t 3
on solving V = 3 2 m/sec
(B) is correct ]
Page # 237
17. From frame of Ball, i.e. frame of water, the velocity of both boats is constant for upstream & down-
stream.
Let velocity of boat A w.r.t. water = V1 = VA/w
& velocity of boat B w.r.t.water = V2 = VB/w
Let them move for time t0 & then turn back by then in water frame, A has travelled VA/w × t0
& B has travelled VB/w × t0
Let them come back in time t1 & t2 respectively.
VA / w  t 0
t1 = VA / w = t0
VB / w  t 0
t2 = VB / w = t0
Hence both are equal ]
dy dx
18. 2y + x = l  2 + = V1 ...(i)
dt dt
z2 + d2 = y2
dz y dy
 = [ d = const]
dt z dt
dy
 V2sin = ...(ii)
dt
V1
 2 = V sin 
2
V1
 V2 = 2sin ]
19. Maximum heat will be generated when the distance travelled by

the block with respect to the belt is maximum this will be the
case when the block attains zero velocity after covering a
distance  and then come  back.
a = g
v2 = u2 – 2a
0 = v 02 – 2  (g )
v0 = 2g
Page # 238
21. T1max = T2sin37
+ m2A = mg
amax = 2A = 2.5 m/s2 = g/4 T1min = (3/4)mg – mg/4 = mg/2
T1max
=2:1
T1 min
22.
Tsin = mgsincos ...(1)

Tcos = mgcos2 ...(2)
tan = tan
 = 
23. if railroad car is slowing down then (it is retarding) car will be non-inertial frame
and apply pseudo in forward direction. So in car frame particle will accelerate
horizontally.
Page # 239
F cos 

F sin 
24.
F sin  = T(2)
F cos  = W
T(2)
tan  =
W
W tan  W tan 30 W
T= = =
2 2  12
25. fsmax= mg
= 0.15 × 20 ×10
= 30 N
30 3
ablock = = m/s2
20 2
atruck = 2 m/s 2
1
arel = m/s2
2
1
d= a t2
2 rel
1 1
4 = × × t2
2 2
t = 4 sec.
1
so, distance travelled by truck = × 2 × 4 × 4 = 16 meter Ans.
2
26. for observer on cart

v rel = 0
 1
Srel  a rel t 2
2
  
Trajectory is straight line along a rel for observer on ground trajectory is parabola because v 0 and g
are at angle  initially.
27. Spring force does not change instantaneously.
Thus for m1 ; a1 = a0
for m2 FSp = m2a2 .....(i) instantaneously aftr F2 is withdrawn
Initially FSp – F2 = m2 a0
a2
FSp = F2 + m2a0 ......(ii) FSp
Page # 240
F2
from (i) and (ii) a2 = m  a 0
2
28. amax = sg = 0.2 × 10 = 2m/s2
u 4
tmin = a = = 2sec
max 2
2 9
29. U=– + 2
x x
dU 2 18
=+ 2  3
dx x x
dU 2 18
F=– =– 2  3
dx x x
F=0  x=+9
d 2U 4 54
2 =– 3
 4
dx x x
d 2U d 2U
at x = 9 = = [– 4+ 6 / 27] > 0  potential energy is minimum
dx 2 dx 2
 x4 x2 
30. V(x) =  4  2 
 
So when PE is minimum then KE
is maximum,
d
or (V(x)) = 0 x3 – x = 0
dx
x(x2 – 1) = 0
x = 0, ± 1
V(0) = 0 (maximum)
1
V(±1) =  (minimum)
4
 KEmax. = TE – PEmin.
1  1 9
. = 2 –   =
2
mVmax
2  4 4
2(9 / 4) 3
Vmax. = = m/s. Ans
1 Kg 2
31. N = mg
N + kx = 3mg
mg + kx = 3mg
2mg
x=
k
Page # 241
2 2
1  6mg  1  2mg  8mg 1
C.O.E. k  – k  – mg = mv2
2  k  2  k  k 2
36 m 2 g 2 4 m 2g 2 16 m 2g 2 1
– – = mv2
k k k 2
16 m 2g 2 m
1/ 2
k = mv2 v = 4g  
k
32. For equilibrium F = 0 and from F – x graph it is clear at x = 4 F = 0
from V – x graph
dV
it is clear that F = = 0 at x = z
dx
100 150
33. keq = = 60 N/m
250
2.5 3
F = keq x = 60 × = N
100 2
3
For left spring x1 =
2(100)
3
For right spring x2 =
2(150)
2 2
1 3  1 
(100)   
2  2   100 
2 2
150 3
So 1  3   1  = 100 = 2
(150)   
2  2   150 
34. By energy conservation
1   R  2  R  2 
    
mgR(1 + cos 30°) = k  3   6  
2  
12mg(2  3 )
 k=
2R
 
35. Work done in cyclie process for F , is zero therefore F1 is conservative (all uniform forces are conser--
vative)

Work done in a cyclic proces in case F2 is non-zero
A D
B C
wABCD = wAB + wBC + wCD + wDA
Page # 242
wAB = – FAB 
wBC = 0
wCD = + FCD 
wBA = 0
FBA  FCD
 wABCDA  0
at
at
36. at
at
Tangential acceleration is constant, but as speed increases centripestal acceleration increases therefor
magnitude of acceleration increases, & its angle with the radius decreases.
37. Conserving energy between points A & B,

R  1
mg   R (1  cos ) = mv2
4  2
Also EFD at point B will give, A
R/4
mv 2 B
mg cos  =
R 
1 1
 + (1 – cos ) = cos 
4 2
5 3
= cos 
4 2
5
 cos  =
6
R
 F
38. r
B  R/2 P A
value of F at any angular position ‘’ is given by

km
F= , here r is given by
r2
R
r= ( R cos   R / 2) 2  ( R sin ) 2 = R 2  R 2 / 4  R 2 cos  = 5  4 cos 
2
Page # 243
2 sin  sin  sin 
Also = i.e. sin  =
R r 5  4 cos 
For small angular displacement ‘d’ work done by this force dw = – F Rd cos (90 – ) = – F R sin  d
4 km R sin 
= 2 · 5  4 cos  d
R (5  4 cos )
 work done in moving bead from A to B
 
4km  d km 4 sin  d
w = –
R
 (5 sin
4 cos )3 / 2
= –
R
 (5  4 cos )3 / 2
0 0
9 9
km dt km t 1 / 2
=
R
 t3/ 2 =–
R 1/ 2
0 1
2km  1  4 km
=+   1 = –
R 3  3 R
 Energy provided at point A most be equal to this work done
1 4 km 8k
 m vm2 =  vmin =
2 3 R 3R
mv 2 0 = 37°
39. T – mg cos  = ............(1)
R 
and mg (cos  – cos 0) = 1/2mv2 ............(2)
m
T = mg(3 cos  – 2 cos 0)
 (cos  – cos 0)
20m/s v
60°
40.
 /2  /2
As net external horizontal force is zero, and inital velocity of system is also zero,
 mball × xball = mplank × xplank (backward)
distance travelled by the ball is its Range,
u 2 sin 2
R=
g
 (20) 2 3
 
2 10 2
Page # 244
v L
v
41. v
Total distance travelled by the successive balls balls for each pillar to be struck once is,
d = 2 (L – 10r)
2(L – 10r )
time taken, t =
v
considering force on any one pillar;
Total change in momentum = 2 mv
2mv
Favg =
t
2
2mv mv 2
=
2(L – 10r ) (L – 10r )
42. Since thre is no external horizontal force on whole system C.M. of wholen
system need move
m1 r1  m 2 r2
rCM = m1  m 2
M ( x  2)  3Mx
O=
4M
Mx – 2M + 3Mx = 0
4x = 2
x = 0.5 m
m
L L 16
2 2
m M m
43.
16 16
Along this axis

m 
L L
2 2
16
 m  L m  L 
    m
XCr =  16  2 16  2 L
m  3
8 45°
 L 
   from origin
8 2

r =
 L 

8 2
 (cos 45 î  son 45ˆj) =
L
8
 
î  ĵ
mL L2 
=+ =+ 2
·L = · L
M 4L 4
Page # 245
44. WD = k v2
1 m.6m m
mg = ( v1  v 2 ) 2  0
2 m  6m
7
 v1 + v2 = g
3
45.
p1f = m v1  mv0

 Ndt = | p | is same for both ~ 2mv0
p2f = mv2  2m v0
 p2f > p1f
k1 p12f m 2 (mv0 ) 2 . M M
 k2 = 2 = 2 =
p 2f m1 (2mv0 ) m 4m
k1 > k2
1 2F
46. F (x1 + x2) = k (m1 + m2)2 – (m1 + m2)
2 k
47. Fthrust – mg = ma Fthrust

m = 5000 kg a
a = 20 m/s2
 Fthrust = 150000 N mg
dm dm
Fthrust = Urel ×  (–800) × = 150000
dt dt
dm
  –187.5 kg/s
dt
48. There is no change in velocity  to the spring, at the moment of maximum extension relative velocity
along the spring is zero. Due to symmetry velocity of blocks is zero along spring at the moment of
maximum extension.
Let extension be x
Applying conservation of energy
 1  v 2  1 2
   kx = 2  mv 2 
2 m 1
 2  2   2 2 
m
kx2 = mv2  x=v
k
Page # 246
eV sin 60
49. tan 30° = tan 60
tan 30
e = tan 60 = tan230°.

a
T
51. m 2a
mg
Applying Newton's II law on

block ; mg – T = 2ma ...(i)
considering force and torque on the ring;
T × r – f × r = mr  ...(ii)
a = r ...(iii)
T + f = ma ...(iv)
Solving (ii), (iii) and (iv);
f=0
T = ma
 from (i)
g
a=
3
52. In this case, friction would oppose the motion of lowest point (point of contact)
   
v v v v
f1 f2 f3 f4 f '4
if v > r if v < r
53.
Ksystem = Kcm + Ksys/cm
wL
vcm = u 
2
2
1  wL  1 mL2
Ksys = m  u     w2
2  2  2 12
1 1 1 1 mL2 2
= mu2 + mw2L2 + muwL + w
2 8 8 2 12
1 1 1
= mu  muwL  mw L
2 2 2
2 8 6
Page # 247
54.
mg
for block,
mg – T = ma ...(i)
for rod;
 m 2
T ×  – mg × = × ...(ii)
2 3
a =  ...(iii)
from (i), (ii) & (iii) ; we get
3g
a=
8
A

u
A v
 60º A B
55.
60º
u
by constraints, ucos60º = v cos60º

 u=v
( v  ) rel
w

for a rigid body w is same about any point.
u 3
u u
60º 60º
u 3 2u sin 60º
w= 
 
v
( v  ) rel v
56. w =
30° 60°  
v
Page # 248
e1 2 gh e 2 2 gh
57.
e1  e 2
vcm = 2gh
2
( v cm ) 2 (e1  e 2 ) 2 h
hmax = =
2g 4
58.
  
a A = a A / cm + a cm
 v2
a cm = 
5R
 v2
2
a A / cm = R = 
R
  v2 v2  2

aA =  R    = 4v 

5R 
 5R
59. By conservation of momentum
mV1 + m(V1 + R) = mV0
 2V1 + R = V0 ...(1)
By applying conservation of angular momentum about O (O is a point of ground frame near the point of
collision)
Li = 0
  
Lf = –mV1R + mR2 [Only due to ring applying rcm  p  I cm  considering outward normal as +ve]
Li = Lf  V1 = R ...(2)
Solving (1) and (2)
V
= 0
3R
Page # 249
60. R is resultant of friction and normal reaction
Rsin53° = mg
Rcos53° = ma
 cos 53 
 g  =a
 sin 53 
 a = g × cot 53° = 3g/4
Other possiblity
R is resultant of friction and normal reaction
Rsin7° = mg
Rcos7° = ma
 cos 7  
 g  =a  a = g × cot 7° (This option is not given)
 sin 7  
61. Assume 3perpendicular axis Ix, Iy and Iz where Iz is diameter of the ring and Ix = Iy
MR 2 Iz Iy
2I + = 2MR2
2
45°
3 45°R
I= MR2
4
m C2
C1
62. [(/2) – x]
 
mx = m   x 
2 

x=
4
  3
S=  
4 2 4
f2
N2
N1
63.
mg
f1
N2 can only be balanced by f1

 1  0
but f2 can be zero, as in vertical mg can be balanced by N alone.
Page # 250
 d 
64. dF = 2T sin  
 2 
 AY  d  dF
2    T d T
dF    2 

a = dm  m 
 ·d 
 2 
2AY
=
m
2AY(R)
=
m·R
 AY2 
a=  R
 mR 
= (2) R
2 mR
T= = 2
 AY(2)
T  mR
t= =
4 2 AY(2)
 mR
Ans.
8 YA
O
65. l
66. vz – 0 because the slope of the position graph is zero. The negative value of x shows that the particle is
left of the equilibrium position, so the restoring force is to the right.
67. x = a cos t
v = – a sin t
T/6
 (a sin t ) 3a
0
<v>= =
T/6 T
 dt
0
Page # 251
68.
  k3   3k 3k
F = 4kx cos2 30°  a =   M 4  x4 x  2 = ,=
  M M
2 2 2 T1 
T = =  T= M  t1 = = M
 3k / M 3k 2 3k
T2 M
t2 = =
2 k
 M M
time period = t1 + t2 =   
 3k k 
M  1 
time period = t1 + t2 =  1  3  Ans.
k  
2c k
69. 2 =
mR m
2c
R=
k
70. In CM frame both the masses execute SHM with
k 2k
= =
µ m
Initially particles are at extreme
2k
distance = L0 + (L – L0 ) cos t
m
 MR 2   a 
71. I =  2  ×  
  R
d2x
a= = - 0.2 × 100 cos (10t) = –20 cos (10t)
dt 2
a
= = – 200 cos (10t)
R
5  (0.1) 2 5
=– × 200 cos (10t) = – × 2 × cos (10t) = –5 cos (10t)
2 2
max = 5 N × m
Page # 252
k 1200 –
72. w1 =
m1 = = 20 rad/s
3 
1200 20
2 = = rad/s
27 3
20
–= t
3
 +  = 20t
 20 
2 =  20   t
 3 
6 3
t= = sec
80 40

73. T
mg
mv 2 2
T – mg cos  = cos   1 –
 2
mv 2
T = mg cos  + v = r = 0 cos (t + )

mg 2 2
= mg + m02 2 cos2 (t + ) –  sin (t + )
2 0
 Tmax at mean and is never 0  (C)
m
74. t1 = 2
k1
4 2 m 4 2 m
 k1 = and k2 =
t12 t 22
1 1 1 t2  t2
= k + k = 1 2 2
k 1 2 4 m
1 t12  t 22
T = 2 m = 2  m
k 4 2 m
T2 = t12  t 22
Page # 253
75.
Force on this element

GM (dx )
dF =
x2
 Total force on the stick
F 3R
dx
 dF = GM  x2
0 R
3R
  1 1 1   2 
F = GM   = GM    = GM  3R 
 x R  R 3R   
CM of stick is rotating in a circle of radius 2R
 2 
 GM   = (2R)(2R)2
 3R 
GM
2 =
6R 3
R3 R
T = 26 = 26
gR 2 g
2 2
76. wE – wS = wS – wE =
T T
2 2 2 2 2
– = wS – =
8 24 T 24 8
2(3  1) 2  1 1
= wS = 2   
24 T  24 8 
2 1  3 
wS – wE = wS = 2  
T  24 
2 2 2( 4  1) 2 2
– = = wS =
6 24 24 8 6
Tsatellite = 6 hr
77. Conserving angular momentum, we have

mvR = mvr ...........(1) [v = speed when spaceship is just touching the planet]
Conserving energy, we have
1 1 GMm
mv2 = mv2 – .....................(2)
2 2 r
1/ 2
r  2 2GM 
Solving (1) & (2), we get, R = v 
v r 
Page # 254
m
3 4 R 3 m
78. m = 4 R × =
3 3 8 8
Gm Gm 4 Gm
g= 2 – 2 =
R 8R 2R 2
79. Conserving angular momentum, we have
mvR = mvr ...........(1) [v = speed when spaceship is just touching the planet]
Conserving energy, we have
1 1 GMm
mv2 = mv2 – .....................(2)
2 2 r
1/ 2
r  2 2GM 
Solving (1) & (2), we get, R = v 
v r 
V2
V1
4
10
80.
2
1 = rad/hr
1
2
2 = rad/hr
8
2 3
 T1  R  R2
  =  1    R2 = 4 × 104 km
 T2   R3  R1 = 4
2R 1 2 R 2
V1 = = 2 × 104 km/hr V2 = =  × 104 km/hr
1h 8h
Vrel  to line joining  104 km / hr 
at closest separation  = length of line journing = = rad/hr..
3 104 km 3
2
1  ve  GM e m GM e m
81. m   – R = 0 – (R  h )
2  2 e e
1  2gR e  mgR e2
m  – mgRe = –
2  4  (R e  h )
mgR e mgR e2
– mgRe = –
4 Re  h
3mgR e mgR e2
– =–
4 Re  h
3Re + 3h = 4Re
h = Re/3
Page # 255
2GM GM
82. ve = v0 =
R r
1  GMm   GMm 
Now KE = 0 – mv2 =    –  
2  R   r 
1 1 2
– mv2 = – mv e + mv02
2 2
v = ( v e2  2v 02 )1 / 2
4
83. GR = R2
3
4
 = G , which only depends on the density and the density of rock = density of earth
3
M
 = & GM = gR 2
4
R 3
3
R
T = 2 where R = 64 × 105 m
g
 T = 5024 sec
which is of the order of 1 hr
84. F1 = FB – (a2)gh
F2 = FB – (a2)g(2h)
85. From the figure, it is clear that the level of water in the right pan
remains the same thus pressure (& force) at the bottom of right vessel
is constant but that on the left pan increases. Thus water overflows
& the left side of the pan tips down.
h
86. R
force
gyds cos  dA
 gy dA
= g  dA
h
F1 = 2rg × h×
2
R
F2 = 3g ×R×
2
Page # 256
for equilibrium
h R
2g h  = 3g R 
2 2
R2
h2 = 3
2
3
h=R
2
87. Let volume of block = V1
Volume of concrete = V2
 Displaced volume of water = (V1 + V2)
Now, weight of the combination = Bouyant force
 0.5 × V1g + 0.25 × V2g = 1 × (V1 + V2) g
V1 3
 V2 =
1
m1 0.5  V1
 m2 = 0.25  V2 = 3/5
r 3
88.  tan 37 =
8 4 •
r = 6m r
F = (P0 + hg) r2
= (105 + 10 × 800 × 10) ×  × 36 37°
1.8 × 36 ×  × 105
= 2 × 107
23
42
19
89. 76 57
10 × 42 = 76 × L
10.5 cm × 1cm2 = 10.5
N
1 7R 2
90. Force due to pressure difference is F = R (v2 – v1 ) =
2 2 2
2 2
Now, F – f = Ma
M F
2 a
fR = MR2 ×
5 R
2 2 f
 f = Ma  f = F = R2  Mg = R2 Mg
5 7
R 2 1
 =   0.25
Mg 4
Page # 257
91. Fy = T × Projected length in y direction
F = (T1 – T2)R
92. Let coefficient of viscosity & thickness of film  & x respectively
Viscous force on element ring is
 wr  0 
dF =  (2rdr)  
 x 
d = (dF) r
R
2w  (2) w  4
 r .dr
3
 = = R
t 0  4x 
 R4
2 2 (8.5  0.8)g
93. v0 = r
g 
2 2 (2.5  0.8)g
nv0 = r
g 
n = 17/77
4 4 4
94. 100   r 3g – 500   r 3g – 6rv = 500   r 3a
3 3 3
B
0 .2
 6 110 3 v
3
200
v 6rv mg
18
11 m/s Ans.
2
95. v g = vg ..... (i)
3 1
3
v g = vg .....(ii)
4 2
v1 + v2 = 2vm
1   2
= m
2
Page # 258
 1   2 
v'   g = vg
 2 
v'  3g 4g 
 = vg
2  2 3 
12
v' = v
17
50t
P 
96. 200t
oberver
when source is at origin, the observer recieves the sound emitted by the source, when it was at P.
50 t 1
Such that cos = =
200t 4
 0 ( v) 90  200
 = v – v cos  =
s 50
200 –
4
 = 96 Hz
Direction of pulse propagation
97.
T
velocity of wave, v =

velocity (vp) of particles are in y direction
dy dy dy
vp =  v  mv
dt (dx / v) dx
1 1 1
mTv2 =   2av p   2am v
2 2 2
total kinetic energy , k =
2 2 2
m 2 Ta
=

Page # 259
displacement variation
98.
pressure variation
L 
it is clear from the figure that path difference represent phase difference.
3 2
7L 7
 path difference represents phase difference.
9 6
7L 7
Lets say amplitude of pressure variation be A then amplitude at will be A sin
9 6
 The ratio of pressure amplitude at Q to the maximum pressure amplitude is 1: 2

99. 3 = 3L  = 2L
2
  
y = A0sinkx sin  t   
 2 3
 2   L   5 
= A0 sin      sin  t  
 2L   2   6 
 5 
= A0sin  t  
 6 
100. y = f(x ± c · t) is the general wave equation

1
At t = 0, y = f(x)  y =
1 x2
1 1
y= = = f (x – 1)  f (x – ct) = f (x – 1) at t = 1  c = 1 m/s. ]
2  2x  x 2 1  ( x  1) 2
101. The figure shows the two waves at t = 6s and their superposition. The superposition is the point-by-point
addition of the displacements of the two individual wave.
Page # 260
T T
102. V1 = ; V2 =
 4
V2 < V1
 2nd is denser  phase change of 
wave reflected from denser medium
V1
V2  V1  V1
 6 2  6 = – 2mm
 Ar = V  V = V
2 1 2
 V1
2
 eqn  – (2mm) sin(5t – 40x) Ans.
103. Fz = 0
(T + dT) + µgdz – T = 0
dT = –µgdz .......... (i)
also T = µv2
dT = dµv2 + 2vdv dµ
As v is independent of z
dv = 0
2
dT = v dµ .......... (ii)
from equation (1) and (2) we get
z
d g


=– 2
v
 dz
0
or µ = µ0 e g / v z
2
v  v 0 cos 
104. f1 = f [ ] ...(1)
v
v  v0
f2 = f [ ] ...(2)
v
f1 v  v 0 cos 
 = >1 Ans.
f2 v  v0
 V 
105. fmax = f  V  V 
 s
f is the original frequency of source

V the speed of sound
Vs the speed of source
 V 
fmin = f  
VV 
 s
Page # 261
f max  f min
= 2% = 1/50
f
f V(2Vs ) V(2Vs ) 2Vs 1

 2 2   =
f V  Vs V 2
V 50
V
 Vs =
100
106.  = 2n
 2
 + d sin  = 2n
2 
2  1
d sin  =  2n   
  2
 1  1  1
sin  =  2n   = × 2  3 =
 2  2d 2 12
y 1
 =
(100) 2 12
144y2 = (100)2
100 25
y =
12 3
107. At time t
l' = (l –vt) = /4
C
 Fundamental frequency f0 =
4l
C
f0 = 4l  vt 
df C
 dt  ( v) = CV
4l  vt 2
4l 2
108. The distance between source and receiver is not changing, so there is no change in frequency. (A)
v vs f 0
109. n1 = f0 v  v – f0 = v  v
s s
v vs f 0
n2 = f0 – f0 v  v = v  v
s s
clearly n1 > n2
Page # 262
V
110. V = VY , = Y
V
 V 
Stress =  B
 V 
P = YB
F
= YB
R 2
F = Y B (R2)
F YB
tensile stress = = 2 Rt
2Rt
 YBR 
Tensile stress =   Ans.
 2t 
111. F – T = 3a
T = 2a
T = 2.5 × 109 × 4 × 10–8
T = 100 N
T = 2a
100 = 2a
a = 50 N
F = 5 × 50
F = 250 N
112. For ring just slides on to the steel rod the diameter of rod and ring should be equal to each other
and suppose due to  increment in temperature the diameter of both are equal then
4 (1+ s ) = 3.992 (1 +Brass )
4 + 4 × 11 × 10–6 ×  = 3.992 + 3.992 × 20 × 10–6 × 
4 + 44 × 10–6  = 3.992 + 79.84 × 10–6 × 
0.008 = 35.84 × 10–6 
8 103 8000
=  ;  = = 283
35.84 35.84
so if temperature increased by 223°C then ring will start to slide and this temperature will equal to
 = 30° +  = 30 + 253 = 283°C
 = 283°C  280°C
113. Density is maximum at 4°C.

vg ; (i) T v, r . sink
(ii) T  v  ; r  can not say
Page # 263
dr 1  r2  r1 
114.  dR =  4r 2K = 4K  
 r2 r1 
[R = thermal resistance]
 4K 4K
Q = =
 r2  r1   t 
   2
 rr  r 
 12 
mL 4K  4 3
=
 t  m    3  r 
time  
 2
r 
L  K 
 
time  t r  × constant
tr
time 
K
t
25 4 2r K s 1K s
  2 K
16 t r KL L
KL 8
 Ans.
Ks 25
dQ
115. For chamber: = k(1 – 0) = k(2 – 0)  1 = 2
dt
dQ
For heater = e1A( T14 – 14 ) = e2A( T24 – 42 )
dt
e1 > e2  T1 < T2
116. Rate of absorption = Rate of emission
Pab + Pab = Pem.
eA  T04 = eA  T14 = eA  TB4

TB = Remains constant as (T0 and T1 ) are constant.
117. As timeperature increases spectral intensity corresponding to all wavelengths increases but the wavelenght
with maximum spectral intensity decreases according to wein's displacement Law.
118. In process A B pressure is constant  v  T that is we will obtain straight line

In process BC temperature is increasing and volume is decreasing  A or B may be correct
but in process CA volume is constant and work done in path B to C is –4520 J  A is correct
Page # 264
t dp
119. =v
k dv
dv 1 dv v r t  v 3 z
dp = × = (r – 3) =
v k v v
t
p = (r – 3) ×
k
1
122. W= × 3v0 × P0 + 3v0 × P0
2
3
W= P v + 3v0P0
2 0 0
a
W= Pv
2 0 0
 3R 
U = nCvT = n   (T – Ti)
 2  f
3 3
U = nR (Tf – Ti) = [PfVf – PiVi]
2 2
3
U = [4P0V0 – 2P0V0]
2
U = 3P0V0
9 15
Q = U + W = P0V0 + 3P0V0 = PV
2 2 0 0
106
P0 = , V0 = 0.1
2
15 106
Q = × × 0.1 = 375000 J
2 2
Q = 375 kJ
123. For isothermal process Vf = 2V0  Pf = P0/2
V0 T0
For isobaric process Vf = V0/2, Tf = • T0 =
2  2V0 4
For P  V process
P–V must be straight line
T  V2  V–T must be parabolic
P T 
2 P–T must be parabolic
Page # 265
124. Let x mole of the gas dissociate at 1000 K
No. of mole of diatomic gas molecule = 1 – x
No. of moles of monatomic gas molecules = 2 × x
Energy of diatomic molecules = energy of monatomic molecule
5 3
 (1 – x) RT = 2x × RT T
2 2
 x = 5/11
Now new no. of moles = (1 – x) + 2x = 1 + x = (16/11)
nRT
P=
V
300R
Pressure initially at 300 K = Pi =
V
(1  x )R 1000 16 R
Pressure finally at 1000K = Pf = =  100 
V 11 V
PV
125. n=
RT
Final pressure & temperature is same hence volume will be in ratio of number of moles.
M M
126. PVv = PVv = ;V=
V 
v v
M M
P  =   
   
v
P P    P P
= v ;   = ; = (32)1.5
   P P
P
= (25)3/2
P
P
= 215/2
P
127. TS = 3mg
3mg  S
As = yS × S
2mg  b
Ab = yb × b
 s 3 s Ab yb 3 a
 b = × b × AS × yS = ×
2 2 b 2c
Page # 266
128. According to given condition,
u= 5gL & v= gL
mu 2
TL = mg + = 6mg
L
mv 2
TH = mg – =0
L
(TL – TH) = 6 mg i.e. independent of temperature
129. 1° R = 1°C
100 10
1° S = = °C
70 7
100 4
1° U = = °C
75 3
1°S > 1°U > 1°R
 x 2 > x3 > x1
131. P is black so it will abosrb more energy faster.
132. TB = TC
PB VB PC VC
=
nR nR
PBVB = PCVC
2P0 × V0 = P0 × VC
VC = 2V0
P0  2V0
TC =
nR
P0 V0
TA =
nR
3
U = – PV
2 0 0
 = –P0V0
5
Q = – PV
2 0 0
Page # 267
 qE 
133. Net downwards aceleration on body of mass m =  g   = anet
 m
If E = uniform electric field in downwards direction
2v 2v
If it hits after time t = = E
a net  qE 
 g 
m  planet
at maximum height vf = 0
v2f = v2i – 2aneth  In uniform field (Gravitation + Electric field time to reach highest point = t / 2 ]
 qE 
v2 = 2 g  h
 m 
V between ground and highest point
V = (E) h
2v  qE  2 v
anet =   g   
t  m t
q  2v 
E    g 
m  t 
m  2v 
E=   g  and h = (average velocity) × t
q t 
v
h= t
2
m  2v  v 
So V =   g  t 
q t  2 
mv  gt 
= v 
2q  2
Q R
134. Electric field on surface of a uniformly charged square is given by 4 R 3  3
0 0
Q R 3
Electric field at outside point is given by E = 
40 r 2 3 0 r 2
3
r 
 0 
r 2 17r0
| Er | = 0 – =
3 0  3r 
2 54 0
3 0  0 
 2 
Page # 268
135. QE = Mg
QE
QV 45°
=w
d
mg
wd
Q=
V
136. As R is comparable to r, so their is induced effect.
137. for r < a
KQ(3a 2  r 2 ) K ( Q ) KQ
V= 3 + +
2a b c
for a < r < b
KQ K ( Q ) KQ
V= + +
r b c
for b < r < c
KQ K ( Q ) KQ KQ
V= + + =
r b c c
for r > c
KQ k ( Q) kQ kQ
V= + + =
r r r r
1 2
138. E1 =  E2 =
0 0
 2 2 
 1  2 A
 2  = 0.08
 0 2 0 
 E 2 2 E 2  2 
 1 0 2 0 
A  2  2  = 0.08
 0 0 
0 0.08  2  36  109

A [25 × 1010 –9× 1010] = 0.08; A= = 3.6 × 10–2 m2
2 16  1010  1
2k
E1 =
>
P2 = 3 j ( 2) 2
>
139. P1= i
k 3
E2 =
( 2) 3
E= E12  E 22
k
= (3  4)
8
k
= 7
8
Page # 269
+ – 
140. +
E
B
4
  R 3
3
4 0  (2R ) 2
+
+
+
+ ++
141. ++
++
+
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ +
+
+
+ ++
143. Any charge body can attarct a newtral body due to induced charges. Opposite charge of rod is induced
on water and it gets attracted.
Qx Q / 16
144. E= +
4 40 x 2
R 3 3 0
3
dE
0
dx
Q  1 2  R
 4  3  3  at x =
0 R 16 x  2
E is miniumum.
2kp cos 
145. Er =
r3
kp sin 
E =
r3
E
kp y ^ E ^r
Ex = Er cos  – E sin  = 3 [2 cos2  – sin2 ] Er
r 
r
kp
Ex = 3 [2 – 3 sin2 ] 
r x
p
Page # 270
2
For the point = (1, 2 , 0) ; sin  = 3
Hence Ex = 0
146.
q +
C – 2R
147.
O i
2
q
V0 + 2 – 2iR – = V0
C
 q
i= –
R 2RC
dq
also i=
dt
q t
dq
   =  dt
q 
C
   0
 R 2RC 
q
 q 
ln   
 R 2RC  C
 1  =t
 
 2RC 
 2C  q  t
ln   = 
 C  2RC
q = 2C – Ce –t/2RC
q = C (2 – e–t/2RC)
Page # 271
148. (x + 13) × 3 = (27 – x) × 1
3x + 39 = –x + 27
x = –3
So V a – Vb = 27 – (x + 13)
= 17
149. Net charge under dotted box shown = –q1 + q1 = 0
Finally
VA = 25V
q1' = 25(4) = 100 C
q2' = 25(2) = 50 C
Net charge under the dotted box shown = –q1' + q2'
= –100 + 50 = –50 C
 The charge which flows = 50 C
150. After closing the switches,

Q0
Q0 q
q= C + – + –
2c + – + –
Q0 + – + –
+ – + –
2 C Q 0 2C 3C
Q0 Q0 V
 charge flown through S2 =  2C
2 3
5Q 0
=
6
charge flown through S1 = 0
7µF
3µF 5µF q2 56.25+q
q 56.25+q1
151.
30V 30V
qi = 56.25 µC
q2 56.25  q1
 ..... (1)
7 3
q2 56.25  q1  q 2
 = 30 ..... (2)
7 5
 q2 = 70 ; q1 = –26.25
 q = 43.75
Page # 272
0A (1.5 Q) 2 2.25 Q 2 d

152. C= Ui = =
d 2C 2C
9Q 2d
 Ui = 8  A
0
After connecting
Uf = 0
9Q 2
Heat = Ui – Uf =
d 0A
i
153. E=
A
kr 2 i
E=
R r 2
ki
E=
r
154. In the first diagram where A & B are there B is shot circurit only A in the
wait
= =
24
155. I= RG
1
R G
V = 24 – Potential difference across 1 
= 24 – 1 × I
24
V = 24 –
 1 1
   1
1/ R G 
1
For G    0
G
& V = 20 V
24
 20 = 24 –  R = 5
R 1
Page # 273
156. (1680 + r) I = 20
(2930 + r) I = 30
2 × 2930 + 2r = 3 × 1680 + 3r
r = 820
4 4 1 4
157. I' = I  = (given ) where G = 16
4G 4G 5
43
I
I" = 4  16 I’
G
3 I
2 4/3
1
I" = I 4
13
1 5
or I" = (51' ) = I' G G
13 13 I I” I I”
i 4
 G = 4 × i  G = 16W
5 5
4 2 4 4
In second case (i – i') × 16 = i' Req = 
3 24 3
i' 13i' 12
4i – 4i' =  4i =  i' = i
3 3 13
1 1
 i – i' = i= × 0.65 mA = 0.05 mA
13 13
158. Ma gnetic moment is in divection of –za×

and B  4î  3ˆj
4 3
B̂  î  ĵ
5 5

 = iA
= –(4×10–4× I0) k̂
τ̂    B̂
4 3
τ̂  ĵ – î
5 5
Thus the unit vector of the axis is ± τ̂
mv
160. R=
qB
q1 = –q2
m1v1 = m2v2
 R1 = R2
qB qB
But m1  m2  1 = 
m1 m2
  is not equal. So collision does not occur at diametrically opposite point.
Page # 274
161. Introducing two equal and opposite current I1 and also I2 between A & C.
Force on ABCA closed loop zero
Force on ADCA closed loop zero
Force on extra I1 & I2
F = (I1 + I2) lB = IlB
162. Suppose in 1st region radius of circular path is r1 & in region 2 this is r2.
 r1 > 5 & r2 > 5
r = mv/(qB)
rqBmin
so, vmin =
m
5 102 1.6 1019  0.01 8
 vmin = = × 107 m/s
9 1031 9
 0i
163.  x adx  M x i
2x
 0 a ( b  c)
M= n
2 c
165. Inductor behaves as a zero resistance wire after current has been a passed through it for a long time.
 when the switch is in position 1,
E
i=
R
When the position of witch is changed to 2, the resistance E thus the current through the circuit do not
chage.
E
 i=
R
1 2 1
166. Li = C2
2 2
C 9 1012 12 3
i= = 12 3 = 108
L 2.5 10 5
i = 7.2 × 10–4 A
N S N S
A
168.
S N N S
B
Page # 275
v2 v 2R
169. Pav = R =
2z12 2z 22
2
 1 
z 1 = ± z2   L + R =  L 
2 2 2  + R2
  C 
2L 1 1
 + 2 2 =0  C= = 25 C
C C 22 L
170. Consider the expression for the current rising exponentially in the LR circuit. The time constant is (L/R).
In this case the curve (1) is rising faster than curve (2) indicating that (L1 / R1) < (L2 / R2). However, in
both the cases the maximum current is the same and equal to (V/R1) or (V/R2). which means R1 = R2
45°
173.
1
 = A(H – 1) = 4 × = 2°
2
 total deviation = 90° (due to reflection) + 2° (due to prism) = 92°
but net deviation should be 90°
 due to reflection = 88° =  – 2i  i = 46°
i.e. mirror mut lurotated by 1° anticlockwise.
175. Vmax = V 2 = 2 WA
A
P
176. I1= I0 =
4d 2
P
I2 =
4(3d ) 2
P  1  10
I = I1 + I2 =
4d 2 1  9   9 I 0 Ans. ]
 
ci + dj
r
sin i
178. i
sin r
ai + bj
As aî  bˆj and c î  dˆj are unit vectors their x components represent sin 
Page # 276
1.5 sin i = 2 sin r
a = ×1.5 = 2 × c
a 4

c 3
3/2 3h/4
179.
 h/4
d1 d 2
apparent depth =   
1 2
h 3h h
 
4 4  3 2
2
3

2
2
 Xi 
180. Vi/m =   V
 X0 
0/m
Velocity of image and object are in same direction
I
S
181. Let the image distance from lens be y

I
1 1 1
–  O1 y O2
y – (24 – x ) 9
x 24 – x
1 1 1
– 
–y –x 9
1 1 2
 
x (24 – x ) 9
24x – x 2 9

24 2
2
x –24x + 108 = 0
x = 6 cm, 18cm
Page # 277
182.
I1 is first image of lens and object for mirror & I2 is image of mirror and object for second refraction at
lens.
For refraction at lens
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
– =  – – =
V (25) 20 V 20 25 100
V = 100 cm
For mirror
1 1 –1
+ =
V – 20 15
1 1
=–  V = –60 cm
V 60
For final refraction at lens (ray moving leftward)
1 1 1
+ =
V 60 20
1 3 1
=
V 60
V = 30 cm
Final magnification = (–4) × (–3) × (–1/2) = –6

Final image is real, inverted & enlarged.
183. for nearest minima

dsin = 8/3 i.e.  3sin = 8  sin = 8/9
8 17D
 tan  = D/x =  x=
17 8
184. S1O – S2O = ( – 1)t

2
 = (  1) t

I = Imax cos2(/2)
 (  1) t 
 I = I 0 cos 2   Ans.
  
Page # 278
185. On comparing optical path we get
 Z2 
t0 1  Z  + Z 2  F2 = t0 + F
 0
 0 tZ 2
 Z 2  F2 = Z 2 + F
0
2
 Z2  2
 Z2 + F2 =  02 t 2   + F2 + 2 t Z F
 2 0 Z2
 Z0  0
since t is very small

Z2
 Z2 = 20t 2 F  F = Z02 /(20t)
Z0
2
186.  = t ( – 1) ... (1)

6 <  < 7 ... (2)
  
I = I 0 cos2  
 2 
I = I0 / 2
   1  
 cos   = ±  = 2n ±
 2  2 2 4
 = 4n ± / 2 ... (3)
Solving equation (2) & (3) we get
 = 6.5 
from (1)
2
6.5  = t ( – 1) ... (4)

Introducing record film shifted the fringe pattern by one fringe with means.
t (1 – 1) =  ... (5)
Solving 4 & 5
4  9
 1 =
13
187.
for nearest minima

dsin = 8/3 i.e.  3sin = 8  sin = 8/9
8 17D
 tan  = D/x =  x=
17 8
Page # 279
10D
188. Position of 10th maxima = = 3 cm (w.r. to central maxima)
d
D 3
 cm
d 10
3
New fringe width = 10  
3
New position of 10th maxima =  10 = 2cm
10  1.5
 Position of central maxima = 2cm
 10th maxima = 4cm
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
189. 0() 5 4 3 2 1 0()
Hence there are 6 minimas of y-axis and 5 maxima of x-axis.

190.  = 2eV
hc
 8eV T2 = 2T1
1
If l1 is the wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity at T1 & T2 at T2;
Then 2 = 1/2 (by wein's displacement Law)
hc 2hc
  16ev
2 1
hc
 = 2ev  K.E.max = – = 14ev

1
191. 1 
30
1
2 
60
 = 1 + 2
1
=
20
Page # 280
N0
N=
2t / t½
N0 N0

4 (2) t / t½
0.693
 t = 2t½ = 2×

t = 2×0.693×20 yrs
= 27.72 yrs
194.  longest  Emin

for Balmer  longest is for n = 2  3
for Lyman  longest is for n = 1  2
  longest Balmer >  longest Lyman
Page # 281
COMPREHENSION TYPE
195. Distance travelled by the car in 10 second is equal to displacement in 10 second and it is same as area
under the v-t curve.
1 1
 Distance = × 2 × 10 + 10 × 5 + × 3 × 10
2 2
= 10 + 50 + 15
= 75 m
Hence (B)
10ms 1
196. Retardation = = 10 ms–2
5
 Braking force = ma = 1000 × 10 = 10000 N
Hence (C)
197. From v-t graph we can analyze in t = 0 to t = 2 sec slope is positive and constant. Hence acceleration is
10
positive and constant and it is = 5 ms–2.
2
Between t = 2 to t = 7. Slope is zero so the acceleration is zero. Between t = 7 to t3= 10 slope is
10 –2
negative and constant. Hence acceleration is negative and constant and its value is – ms .
3
Hence the required at graph is (D).

Sol. Relative to the bucket (which floats downstream) the boat’s speed upstream and downstream must be
the same. Thus the boatman also spends 40 min on returning to meet the bucket. Further, the speed of
the boat downstream relative to the bank is 25 m/min (since it takes 40 min to travel 1 km to point A).
After meeting the bucket, the boat spends 24 min on returning downstream, so the meeting place is
600 m before A, or 400 m from the place where the bucket is lowered into the water. Thus the bucket
travels 400 m in the 80 min between being lowered and picked up, i.e. the speed of the current is 5 m/
min and that of the boat relative to the water is 20 m/min.
dN dN dN
dN dN
dN dN 
201. dN  dN  0
dN
dN dN dN
202. FBD of jeans dN (normal force on the jeans by man)

dN
dN = T d T cos (d T cos (d

T d T d T sin d/2
Max. value of friction T sin d/2
fmax =  dN
Page # 282
2
fmax   Td (T = Kx = 500 × .05 = 25 N)

0
fmax = 2T = 2 × .5 × 25 = 78.5398 N

force acting downward is force of gravity = mg = 5 N()
static force of friction is self adjustable in nature therefore friction will be 5N (upward)
203. Maximum acceleration can be in the condition when fmax is acting on the man.
The forces acting on the man are force of friction upward (fmax = 78.5398) and weight downward
(mg = 5N).
Applying second law : fmax – mg = ma
78.5398 – 5 = .5 × a
~
 147 m/s
2
204. Ft = mg sin  – kx cos  ;  = 60°
at = g sin 60° –
kx
m
cos 60° =
3 g kR
2

4m
 
3 1
ac = v2/r = 0 released from rest
2
1 2 1
205. S.E. = kR  sin   
2  2
2
1 2  3 1
= kR  

2  2 
=
kR 2
8
 3 1  2
1 1
206. mu2 = k(R)2
2 2
k
u= R
m
1 1
208. ( M + m) v02 = kxm2
2 2
kxm = µs(M + m)g
xm = µs / k
2
1 1  (M  m) s g 
(M + m) u02 = k  
2 2  k 
2
 s g 
k =   (M  m)

v
 0 
Page # 283
209. aBox = µkg
kmg
mg kxm
aBlock = (µs – µk) M
M
kx m   k mg
aBlock =
M
mg
= (µs – µk)
M
Sol. String will be taught when distance travelled by the two blocks become equal i.e.
1 2 1
A = B  gt = 10t – gt2  t = 1 sec.
2 2
Before t = 1 sec acceleration of both block will be equation t 'g' in downward direction.
After t = 1 sec, there will jerk in string and velocity of A and B will be given by
mvA+ 2mvB = muB (uA = velocity of A at t = 1 sec.)
uA uA
 vA = and vA = (  vA = vB after string becomes thought)
3 3
vA = vB = 10/3 m/s.
 velocity of 'B' when 'A' has ascended by 5 m is given by
2
 10  10 10 10
v=    2  10 = 7 m/s ( After t = 1 sec, a = ms2 )
3 3 3 3
dv
213. Vmax at =0
dx
6x2 – 18x + 12 = 0
x2 – 3x + 2 = 0
x = 1, 2
d2v
= 2x – 3
dx 2
= –1 at x = 1  maximum
= 1 at x = 2  minimum
Motion can be oscillatory about x = 2
E < Emax
Emax = 2 × 13 – 9 × 12 + 12 = 5 J
214. Umin at x0 = 2m
215. a = F = –6(x2 – 3x + 2)
a = –4(x2 – 3x + 2) = –4((2 + y)2 – 3(2 + y) + 2)
= –4(4 + y2 + 4y – 6 – 3y + 2)
a = –4y
=2
2
T= =  sec.
2
Page # 284
y
B
C A x
216.

D
C
217. S
Vi
V
D

 S  
Vav  direction of S in direction of Vav
t
 
218. J  P impulse-momentum theorem
Vf
C A   
V  P  J 
Vi
1 1
219. ki = mu2 = × 4 × 25 = 50 J
2 2
14
a= = 3.5 m/s2
4
1 2 1 7 63 123
s=w+ at = 5 × 3 + × × 9 = 15 + = m
2 2 2 4 4
7 21 31
v = u + at = 5 + ×3=5+ = m/s
2 2 2
1 31 31 961
kf = ×4× = = 480.5 J
2 4 2
861
w = fs = = 430.5 J
2
7 21
220. v=0+ ×3=
2 2
1 21 21 441
kf = ×4× = = 220.5 J
2 4 2
1 7 63
s=0+ × ×9=
2 2 4
63 441
w = 14 × = = 220.5 J
4 2
Page # 285
1 1 1
222. Correct equation is, mv0 cos  = mv + mv and mv02 = mv2 + mv2 + mgh
2 2 2
223. The forces involved are constant, path will be a parabola with axis along the direction of acceleration
with respect to ground.
v 02 cos 2  (1  sin 2 )
224.
8 g sin 2 
 GMm GMm
229. U=– and K.E. =
r 2r
for same m, if r1 > r2, KE1 < KE2 and U1 > U2
Also, angular momentum of A before reaching the position 2 (during elliptical path) was less than that of
B. Since, some impulse is needed (at position 2) for A in direction of its motion, to make its speed and
angular momentum equal to that of B.
230. In the continuation with same comprehension

(r2  r2 / 3)
r= = 2r2/3
2
Let time period of A in elliptical path be T0
2 3
 T0  r
   =  
T  r2 
T( 2 2 )
 T0 =
3 3
 Time taken by A to move from 1 to 2,
T 2
t = T0/2 =
3 3
231. Half immersed = 50 cc displaced water. So 25cc rise in left and 25cc rise in right according to archemedies
principle, buoyant force is equal to weight of displaced fluid, here, is equal to weight of 50cc water and
if is less than the w.r.t. of 100cc ice ball, so, the ball cannot float.
232. (A) If ice melts then its excess volume outside the water will raise the water volume i.e., 50cc is dis-
placed but 90cc will be the increase in volume of water by melting 100cc ice.
(B) If water freezes then it happens around the central crystal so volume of ice ball will increase and it will
take in surrounding water so, water level falls on both sides.
233. (A) Heating will melt the ice and increase the volume of water.
(C) coin placed in right vessel will displace some volume of water, which will be equally distributed to
both vessels raising level in both.
Page # 286
235. mg = Fb
a3 × 0.4 g = a2 hg
2
h= a
5
m = a3×0.4
Fnet = a2xg
a 3  0.4 
T = 2
a 2 g
2a
T = 2
5g
236. Displacement must be less than submergence depth of cube.
237. v1wg = (v – v) ig + v(m)g

v2wg = (v – v) ig + v('m)g
 v 
( v  v)i  v m   1i   m
v1  v 
= =
v2 ( v  v)i  v'm  v 
  1i  'm
 v 
 1000 
  1  0.9  4.9
 20  49
=  1000  = Ans
  1  0.9  1.9 46
 20 
238. Mass inside the of cavity is more for cube A than for cube B.
239. long as cubes are floating, respective water levels do not change.
Let at t = t0, cube A sinks.
vwg = (v – v)ig + vmg
v is volume of cube which is changing linerarly with time at t > t0.
vwg + NA = (v – v)ig + vmg
after sinking water level decreases due to melting of ice,
1 dv dh1
=A ; A-cross-section of vessel
10 dt dt
Let at t = t0', cube B sinks
v'wg = (v' – v)ig + v'mg
1 dv ' dh 2
=A
10 dt dt
dv dv ' dh1 dh 2
 =  = ; final heights are same in both reach.
dt dt dt dt
Page # 287
240. 1v1A1 = 2v2A2
m = 1500 kg/m3 × 0.1 m/s × 4(cm)2
msT = 1000
1500 × 0.1 × 4 × 10–4 × 1500 × T = 10000
10000 1000
T = =
90 9
1 1500
241. 2 = =  = 1350
(1  T) 3 1000 
1  1 10  
 9 
2v2A2 = 1v1A1
 1350 × v2 = 1500 × 0.1
v2 = 0.11 m/s
2L
243. Net force exerted by liquid on styrofoam is buoyaut force =  w g
2
244. Average pressure on slant surface

 l 
(P0   w gh 0 )   P0   w gh 0  
 2   P   gh  l 
Pavg = = 0 w 0
2  2 2
Force on any one of the slant face

= (P0   w g (h 0 – ))L
2 2
3
245. Resultant downward force due to surface tension = 2 T [L + l] FB  w gLl 2
8
3
Buoyent force =  w gLl 2 mg
8
f gLl 2
Weight =
2 TL T2 TL
 f gLl 2 
 
 2 
 
 2T0 
246. Q = nCv  
 3 
3 2
=1× R  T0 = RT
T0
2 3
Page # 288
248. AB = CD
AE = ED
P0
P0  3P0
PE = 2 =
2 4
nRT
249. P= , where n = number of moles of all gases
V
Na  Nb
n= , N = Avogadro number
N
( N a  N b ) RT Na  N b R ( N a  N b )kT
P= = T =
N V V N V
250. After getting combined the no. of moles becomes half in this case
 at const. V and T
Pn
 P becomes half
251. P0 × S0 + mg = P × S0 sec 37° × cos 37° P0

mg
 P = P0 + S 37° mg
0
600
 105 + P0
20 104
= 4 × 105 Pa
252. P'V' = PV
mg  Mg
 P' = 2P = 8 × 105 = P0 + S0
7 × 105 × 20 × 10–4 – 600 = Mg
 M = 80 kg

m
Sol. P0V0 = RT in A cylinder ...(1)
M
mB
PBV0 = RT in B cylinder ...(2)
M
Adiabatic

P0 V0 = Pf  0 
V
 2 
 
Page # 289
Pf = 2 2P0 = PB
P0 V0 m 3
Divide (1)/(2) = VB = V
PB VB mB 2 0
P0 V0 m
=
3  mB
2 2P0  V0 
2 
mB = 3 2 m Ans.
V
 Pf Vf  Pi Vi  2P0 0  2 2  P0 V0
U = –W =   = 2 = 2( 2  1)P0 V0 Ans.
  1  (3 / 2)  1
Fcompressive = PfArea = 2 2PS Ans.
 Pi Vi  Pf Vf  P0 V0  2 2 P0 (V0 / 2)
WA =   = = 2P0V0(1 – 2)
  1  (3 / 2)  1
= P0V0(2(1 – 1.414) = P0V0(–0.828) = –0.828P0V0
|WA| = 0.828 P0V0
 Vf   3V0   3V0   3  3
T = C = nRT0ln  V  = Pf Vf ln  2V  = 2 2P0  ln  = 32P V ln  
 i  0  2  2 0 0 2
= [32ln(1.5)P0V0] = (4.242 × 0.40)P0V0
WB = 1.719P0V0
|WB| = 1.719P0V0
|WA| < |WB| Ans.
Alternative:
263. Potential of the sphere is zero as it is earthed so potehtial at the centre , v = 0

Kq Q1E
v=  =0
l R
Q1 = charge induced on the surface of the sphere
 qR
 Q1 =
l
Page # 290
mv 2 eE 0 b
265. eE = v=
r m
eE e b
ac = = E0  
m m r
2eE 0 b
266. If v = , centrifugal force > electric force (centripetal force) in the reference frame of proton.
m
b
1 dr 2eE 0 b  b 
m v2 = eE0b
2 e
 r v=
me
n  
a
a
267. v is independent of r.
268. Magnitude of initial acceleration of the electron.
e  3 2 2  e  3 2 2 
(A*)  mR   (B)  mR  
 4 6   4 6 
0   0  
e  3 2 2 
(C)  mR   (D) none
 4 3 
0  

 Q x
Sol. Electric field E = – 2 x + 4 2 2 3 / 2 (considering right direction as positive)
0 0 (R  x )
  1 x 4 2R 
= 2  x  
0  2 (R 2  x 2 )3 / 2 
  1 2 2xR 
= 2  x  
0  (R 2  x 2 )3 / 2 
Sol.(i) Initially x = 3 R
  1 2 2 3
E = 2 R    
0  3 8 
   2 2  3  3 2 2 
  =  
20 R  3 (2 2 )  20 R  2 6 
 
( e) (E ) e  3 2 2 
a (acceleration) = =   mR  
m  4 6 
0  
Page # 291
Sol.(ii) Force on electron is zero at point where E = 0  x = R
Sol.(iii) Potential difference between two points

V = – E dx
P.d. due to line charge between
x=R & x= 3R
3R
 dx   ln 3 
VA – VB =   
2 0 x
=   4 
0  
R
Potential difference due to ring between x = 3 R and x = R
1  4 2  R 4 2 R    1 
  =
VA – VB = 4  2R  2R   1 
 0 

2
0 
  1  ln 3 
Net VA – VB = –  1   
0  2 4 
271.
Position of maximum velocity is 1' and 2' for the balls as it is minimum potential energy position
 3L 
Potential difference between 1 and 1' = V1 – V1' = E ×   2 
 4 
L 
Potential difference between 2 and 2' = V2 – V2' = – E ×   2 
4 
Change in electrostatic potential energy = Q × (V1' – V1) + Q × (V2' – V2) = – QEL (loss in PE)
1 1
= Gain in KE = mV2 + m(2V)2
2 2
(where velocity of the ball closer to the axis is V & farther from axis is 2V)
QEL
 V=
5m
272. Position of option (A) is minimum PE position means stable equilibrium position. Any displacement from
this position is opposed by restoring torque.
273.
 3L L 
For small angular displacement  from equilibrium position restoring torque = QEsin    = I
 4 4
(since  is very small sin)
Page # 292
 QEL   QEL   mL2 9mL2 

 =   (  )  =   where I (moment of inertia) =   

 2I   2 I   16 16 
5mL
Time Period (T) = 2/= 2
4QE
1 1 1
274.   (for lens)
v u f
1
here v = +15 and = 10 cm
p
1 1 1
   u = –30
15 u 10
| v | 15 1
m= = =
| u | 30 2
So distance travelled by bullet in 2ms = (100 m/sec × 2 × 10–3 sec) = 20 m/s
1
distance as seen on film = × 20 = 10 cm
2
275. Q = Q0e–t/RC RC = time constant = 2m/s

After one time constant Q = 0.37 Q0
Q2 (0.37Q 0 ) 2 Q2
(UC)f = = = 0.37 × 0.37
2C 2C 2C
(UC)f = (0.37 × 0.37) (UC)
rest energy is lost to resistor = 3.45 J
1
276. Initial P.D. = V then CV2 = 4J
2
1
 (200 × 10–6)(v2) = 4
2
 v2 = 4 × 104  V = 200
RC = 2 × 10 sec
–3
 R = 1
So I = 200A
dN hc dN 1240
278. 5W = × = × × 1.6 × 10–19
dt  dt 500
dN 2500  1019
= = 1.25 × 1019
dt 1240  1.6
Page # 293
dN
279.  if T 
dt
dQ
= eA T4 T   A
dt
dQ
280. = eA (T4 – T04)
dt
dQ
Tmax  max
dt
2
100 2  100 
P4 = P1 =   1
4  2 .2 
2
 100 3 
P2 =    2
 2 .2 5 
2
 100 2 
P3 =    3
 2 .2 5 
I1 R
I2
281. Rv
 r
282. Rate of energy = Power = I12R
283. Rate of energy = power = I22 RV

P
 
  
   R
e
r eas I2 =  RR V  R  R V = r  R 1  r 
De
c
Increase r RR  V
 R
 V 
R
rR
Rv  rR 
Rv = so, (P2)max is when , RV =   <R
(r+R) rR
Page # 294
[Sol. i2 = i3 = Ib
3 2
V1 = (V2 + V3) = V
and P2 = P3 (V) Ib
(0)
 R2 = R3
and V2 = V3 = V/2 1
(V) (0)
P1 = P2 = P3 = P4 (given) I Ia R1 = 36
( V / 2) 2 4
V2
P1 = ; P3 =
36 R3
(0)
As P1 = P3  R3 = 9  I 
Also R3 = R2 = 9 Ans.
I
Ia = and I4 = I
3
P1 = P4 = 4W
2
I
  R1 = (I)2R4 = 4W
3
R1
 = R4
9
 4 = R4 Ans.
Also I = 1A
Req = 16 and I = 1A
 = 16V Ans. ]
[Sol. The total charge inside the cylinder is Q = –ner2 C beam


Applying Gauss's law gives E = Q/0 B 
r j
 ner 2   ner
2rEr =    2  r̂
E
0 0 
 v
The circulation of B around the circle is  = 2rB0

The positive direction for current is along the axis parallel to v . 
Fe  
The current passing through the circle is E B
–
I = –r2j = –r2nev e
Applying Ampere's law we obtain.  = µ0I 
Fm 
v
 1
2rB0 = –µ0r2nev  B = µ0nevr ( ˆ )
2
The total force acting on an electron is the sum of the electric and magnetic forces
     ner nerv 2  ne 2 r
F  e(E  v  B)  e  µ0 r̂
2  = 2 0 (1 – µ00v ) r̂ ]
2
 2 0
Page # 295
µ0I
289. = × a2 cos t
2b
1 d r µ Ia 2  sin t
i= = = 0
R dt R 2bR
2
290.  =
R
2
 µ0 Ia 2  sin t 
 =   × 1
2b  R
 
2
  µ 0 Ia 2 sin t 
=  
R  2b 
 
291. t = 0, i = 0
292. Reading of C = V {i in that branch = 0}

V
Reading of A =
R
 R
293. VB = iRammeter = 0
 Vcap. = 0
L R
294. R
2V
V
at t = 0 inductor is open circuit i 
2R
V V/2
O
3V/2

O
2V
V 3V
p.d. V – 
2 2
Page # 296
L (1 10 2 )
295. Time constant L = R = = 1m/s
C 10
3L = 3 ms
296. When switch is opened, the inductor opposes change in flux by inducing a current in it. A large potential
difference develops across the inductor for change to jump the spark plug gap.
2
1 1  12V 
297. US = Li2 = (10–2 H)   = 7.2 mJ
2 2  10 
1 1 1
298.  
v u f
v = 2.5 cm in all cases
u=–x
1 1 1
 
2 .5 x f
fmax  x is max.  x = 
fmax = 2.5 cm
fmin  x is min.
1 1 1
 
2.5 25 f
25
fmin. = cm. ]
11
1 1 1 1 1
299.    = 
f eq v u 2 .5  x
xmax.  feq = max.  eye is focussed at 
1 1 1 1
   2.5 cm
f e f lens 2.5 x
flens = 10 cm  x = 10 cm ]
 h/F D D
300. m     2.5 cm ]
 max h / D F 10
301.
Page # 297
O 50 – x
1cm
302. x 2cm
1 x 50 100
=  x=  50 – x =
2 50  x 3 3
1 1
100  50 1 100
=  f= cm
3 3 f 9
303. Line passing through centre passes undeviated
50 40
30  =
3 3

 2 1  2  1
Sol. (1)  
v u R
Taking refraction first at curve surface
2 1 1 2Rx
v1 + x = R  v1 =
xR
for plane surface
xR  R 2 1 2( x  R )
v’ = v1 – R  v’ =  – =0
xR v R (x  R )
1 2( x  R )
=
v R (x  R )
for virtual image
1 2( x  R )
<0  <0
v R (x  R )
x<R
(2) For x = 2R
4R 2
v1 = = 4R  u = –2R
R
µ1 v 1 4R
m1 = µ . u = . = –1
2 2 (2R )
m2 = 1  m1m2 = –1 Image is real inverted and same size.
Page # 298
30°
R 30°
30°
(3)
• R Hence correct answer is 90°.
O
 1
307. (µ –1)t =  n   
 2
 1  560  109  1
t = n     n    1.4  10 6
 2 0.4  2
Since we observe 3 max. n  3
 (2n + 1) × 0.7 µm

308. I = I0 cos2
2
 2
 in t = 10 sec,  = × 10 =
15 3
2
 = p +
3
2
      3
I = I0  cos    = I0 sin2 = I0
  2 3  3 4
 
in t = 5 sec,  = ×5=
15 3

= +
3
2
      I0
I = I0  cos    = I0 sin2 =
  2 6  6 4
309. (µ – 1) t = in 30 sec.

t 560 140
  nm/s
 T 0 .4 3
Page # 299
Sol. (a) 250 gm × 4.18 × (80 – 75) = (ms) (75 – 20)
 (ms) = 95 J/k
(b) Granite (Maximum specific heat)
(c) as Rate = 500 cal/min.  5 min = 2500 cal.
2500 × 4.18 = (750 × 4.18 + 500 × 0.17)
  = 3.24 final temperature = 83.24°C

Sol. Suppose final temperature = 100
then , Heat absorbed by ice = m (L × ST) = 200×180 Cal
Heat absorbed by water = m ST = 200 × 45 Cal
Total heat absorbed = 200 × 225 Cal
Suppose 'm' mass of steam condenser then heat returned = mLv
= 540 × m = 200 × 225
Suppose final temperature = T
then Heat absorbed by ice = mice (Lf + S.T.) = 200 (80 + T) Cal
Heat absorbed by water = mwater · S(T + 55) = 200 (T – 55) Cal
Heat released by steam = msteam {Lv + S(100 –)} = 100 (540 + 100 + T)
= 100 ( 640 –T) Cal
Heat released by steam = Heat absorbed by ice + water
 100 × (640 – T) = 200 (80 + T) + 200(T – 55)
 640 – T = 2 (80 + T) + 2 (T – 55)
590
T=  100C  All steam has not condensed and hence final temperature it 100°C
5
Suppose mass x of steam has condensed.
then , Heat released by Steam = 540 x
Heat absorbed by ice = 200 ( 80 + 100)
Heat absorbed by water = 200 ( 100 – 55)
Heat absorbed by steam = Heat absorbed by water and ice.
 540 x = 200 × 225
250
x=
3
Water present in final system = 400 + x = 483.33 gm
Steam present = 100 – x = 16.67 gm
316. n=43 E = 3eV

1242
= = 414 nm
3
317. E = exactly the energy difference
318. E4  2 = 8eV
E2  1 = 10 eV
 < 8eV
E3  2 = 5eV
 > 5eV
Page # 300
4 14
319. 2 He  7 N 11 p 178 x
320. d = RN + Rp R
R = R0A1/3 = R0 141/3 + R0 41/3
1 2 kq q
321. µv rel = 1 2
2 d
1 4m  14m 2 k  2  e  7e
× v rel = R (141 / 3  2 2 / 3 )
2 4m  14m 0
1 18ke 2
2
× 4m v rel =
2 R 0 (141 / 3  2 2 / 3 )
64 64
322. 29 Cu 30 Zn  01 e   Q = (mZn – mCu)C2
64
29 Cu 64 0
28 Ni  1 e   Q = (mZn – mNi – 2me)C
2
64 0
29 Cu   0 e 64
28 Ni   Q = (m2n – mNi )C
2
 = 1 + 2 + 3 (1 = 0.4 , 2 = 0.2 , 3 = 0.4 )

T1/ 2 12.8
T1/2 e– capture = = = 32 hrs.
0.4 0.4
323. Q = (63.92977 – 63.92914) × 931.5

= 0.00063 × 931.5 = 0.587 MeV
dQ dN 0.666  106  1.6  10 19  0.2  ln 2  10 22

324. = ×Q=
dt dt 12.8  3600
= 3.2 × 10 W
3

1  1 1 
Sol. = RZ2  2  2 
 n m 
for H visible is from 2  3, 4, 5, 6 .........
here Z = 2
1  Z2 Z 2   4 4  4 1
 
 =R
  n 2  m2  = R  2 2 2 = 2
  4 m  m 6
m = 6 to 4, 7 to 4, ........
Page # 301
REASONING TYPE
329. Because nu = nu
330. The velocity will be upwards but decreasing, so acceleration will g downwards.
331. u x1  u x 2
1 1
u y1 t  gt 2 = u y 2 t  gt 2
2 2
 u y1 = u y 2
hence they will have same initial speed to collide.

332. If particle moves with constant acceleration a , then change in velocity in every one second is numerically

equal to a by definition. Hence statement-2 is true and correct explanation of statement-1.
333. Flags in the bucket indirection of velocity of wind relative to balloon which is zero. Hence flags will not
fly.
334. To strike ground simulaneously

gt 02
usin t –   h2
2
gt 02
usin t –   h1
2
(u – u) t = (h – h)
h 2  h1
t = u u u2
1y 2y 2
•
to collide in mid air x component should be equal relative velocity u – u . u1
h2 1
‘’ displacement h – h •
h1
h 2  h1
‘’ time taken t = u  u
1y 2y
hence cannot collide.
335.
If there's friction on pulley the pulley rotates.

(B) F = (0)a
F=0
Page # 302
336. Since his acceleration is downward get will reduce and scale reading will decrease.
337. String gets slack therefore velocity of each block is zero.
338. So floor also does not offer reaction
339. In case of horse pulling the cart friction between wheels and surface is static ( limiting static friction). In
case of block, block moves only when applied force exceeds limiting friction
1 1
340. (K) = K + (K) = (m + m) v2 + µv2
2 2
1 1 3
= (4) (0.5)2 + × (2)2 = 2J
2 2 4
1 1 3
(K) = 2 = × 4 × v2 +   × (3)2
2 2 4
 11
v2 = ]
16
    
341. J   Fdt  p  p f  pi
p f 2 pi 2
KE = K – K = 
2m 2 m
 
W =  F . d s  K f  K i  K
342. Work energy theorem w = K
343. External force always accelerate centre of mass
m x
344. COM is near to mass 2 m COM 2m
345. In centre of mass frame linear momentum always remains zero.
346. If we want to throw a bottle from a moving train so that danger of being broken on hitting ground is least.
We should throw bottle in backward direction to minimize is speed.
347. Momentum of a system is zero in C-frame so if 2 block system is true and one
comes to rest w.r.t. c.m. other will also be at rest to make momentum zero
Page # 303
348. During collision, kinetic energy is converted to elastic potential energy.
349. 1st is true because forces form a couple. 2nd is true by Newton's law
350. When f is static

h
N
a
2x
µ=
h
when f is kinetic and it the block has to be toppled N must shift to end
µNh/2  Na/2
a
µ>
h
a > 2x
µ > µ not possible itwon't topple.
351. Due to frictional torque shpere get angular speed
352. a = R  ac
if  is clockwise then torque due to F is greaten then torque due to friction
353. No, friction only act when there is tendency to slepe
354. Think what if the surface on which rolling takes place is moving with respect to
ground.
 
355. L  I  can be applied about any axis
2mR 2  2mR 2
356. I= (due to symmetry)
2
357. They cannot be replaced by point masses if they are kept inside one another.
358. If we move two bodies at infinity w.r.t. each other, and we try to move one towards other, as gravitation
force is always attractive, (never repulsive) work done by gravitation force is always positive,
Gravitation P.E. = ( work done by gravitation force)

this is always  ve If no other force is acting
on system and initial velocity is zero or
towards each other.
Gravitation P.E. = always –ve.

so Gravitation Potential at a point always (–ve)
Page # 304
359. By Kepler’s law T2  R3
360. Here both the statements are correct and II is correctly explaining one.
This can be easily proved by writing the basic equations.
361. On moon g decrases so that less portion is submerzed
362. Action and reaction never act on same body
363. Density chagnes symmetrical in case of gas as well as liquid
 3
364. l= ,l= l : l :: 1 : 3
2 2
365. f = f – f (Beat frequency is independent of medium)
 V  V0 
366. f’ =  V  V  f
 S
 V  V0 
f=  f
 V 
 V 
f =   S
 V  VS 
 V  VS 
=  
 f 
V = velocity of listener ; V = Velocity of source.
 
But if VS  V0 then f’ = f
Thus statement-3 is not always correct
P RT
367. 
 M
368. Due to analomous behavier of water
369. Heat is energy in transit.
370. While evaporation water takes heat of transformation so that our body cool down
371. Accoding to prevost theorey of exchange body radiate and absorbe simultaneusly.
372. Correct reason is that the spectrum is shifted as temperatue is increased.
373. Not in rotational equilibrium

Page # 305
 
374.  = 0  q= 0   E.d s 0 . This does not necessarily implies that E = 0.
375. In electrostate condition net electric field inside the conductor is zero
376. At sharpe point chances of dielectric breakdown will be more.
E0
377. Because
K
  2
378. R= = is valume is constant V = const. Þ A· l = const. Þ r2 · l = const.
A (A)
2r 
  0 =0  poisson's ratio
r 
r r 1
= –     2 Ans.
379. no. of free electrons is independent of temperature.
380. At some critical temperature resistivity becomes zero
381. Resistivity increses with rise in temperature
382. When battery is supplying power, inside battery positive charge moves opposite to
electric field. So work done by electrostatic forces is negative.
383. current inclosed is same so  B·d will be same for both cases.
385. IwL > V
i
386.
Increase in R decreases i. magnetic flux through ring, which is inside paper, decreases and by Lenz’s law,
current flows to produce flux in inward direction i.e. clockwise.
387. Because flux is maximum when rings are coplaner
388. In case of a converging Rays image may aproach focus

Page # 306
389. Ist focus  If Ray passes though this point then becomes parallel
IInd focus  Ray parallel passes through focus
390. Mirror formula is independent of µ
391. Laser maintain its line of sight.
392. Image form with half lens will be same but less bright
393. Paraxial Ray's makes small angle
394. For interference phase difference should be constant.
395. It is internal energy which determine temperature
dT 1
400. Because 
dt s
hc h
401. E and p 
 
h hc
402. d  and 
2mk E
403. Due to storng nuclcar forces.

Page # 307
404. Note that the quantities specific heat and latent heat both contain a term ‘energy per unit mass’. However
energy itself contains mass and hence the dimensions of both these quantities do not contain mass.
 
vw   vw 
vw ( vb)
 ( vb )
406. (A)  vb (B)

or 
vbw vwb vwb
  
The flag will flutter in the air relative to the boat i.e. in the direction v wb  v wind  v boat
y vA/B
407. rmin

A x
B
d
B as frame of reference
  
v AB  v A – v B  v î  2 v ˆj
 = tan–1(2)
2d
rmin = d sin =
5
AM d
T0 = | v =
A/B | 5
R2 =  5vt cos  – d   
2
5vt sin   2
graph is neither circle nor straight line
y x
408. g sin 
g cos 
g
V32 = V12 – 2g sin  x so V3 < V1

V42 = V22 2g cos  (y) = V22 – 2g cos  (0) = V22
V4 = V2
Page # 308
409. (A) — is correct as OP < OQ
(B) — is also correct
(C) — we can't say
(D) — yes as he started late but reached at the same time.
410. 20 × t = 10t + a  10 t = a
for B for A
y y
vn = vn =
2 2
dn 20t dn 10 t
= =
dt 2 dt 2
b t b t
 dx =  10 t dt  dx =  5t dt
0 0 250 0
5t 2
b = 5t2 b – 250 =
2
5t 2
5t2 – 250 =  t = 10 & a = 100
2
411. Since acceleration is in x direction only, velocity in y-direction will not change.
When speed = 5 m/s
5 2 = V x 2 + V y2 = V x 2 + 4 2
 V x = ± 3m/s
Vx  u x
 V x = u x + a xt  t = ax
3 4
t1 = = 2.5 s
 0 .4
3 4
t2 = = 17.5 s
0 .4
y u x
B
A
412.
 
O
X Y
ux = u uy = 0
ax = –g cos  ay = –g sin 
vx = 0
vx = ux + axt
Page # 309
u u
t= =
g cos  g sin 
o – u2 = 2(–g cos ) sx
u2 u2
 sx = =
2g cos  2g sin 
413. (B) Acceleration is upward with horizontal initial velocity so trajectory is parabolic.
(C) Acceleration is zero so velocity is constant.
(D) Due to acceleration speed increase
414. FBD of A
NA
aA
mAg
FBD of B
NA
NB
aBx
aB(y)
 m Bg
In frame B : Blook A moves in positive x direction.
415. Since the book remains at rest ... there is no acceleration of the book which means from Newton's
Second law that there is no net force acting on it.
416. FR / B and FM / R both are equal to tension in the rope. Friction is lesser for block than that for man.
Pulling force tension is same for both of them. Friction on block can keep it static.
417. N = 10 a = 200 N
fmax = 0.6 × 200 = 120 N

mg = 100 N < fmax
 The friction is static and f = 100 N
The contact force = N 2  f 2 = 1005 N

Page # 310
418. When the girl is bending her legs, the total force exerted by her legs in the action, normal force by
grand is the reaction.
considering FBD of girl
  
FN  Fw  ma
 
FN  FM

So force on floor is FM
 
Resultant force on girl is FW  FM

Note : If we say the change in force of girl is FM , then (A) and (B) would also be correct.
419. f
10 T1 T1(max.) = fmax = µN = 70 N.
T2y T2
T2 x
30°
T2 y = tan 30°
T2x
T1 cos 30°
T2
30° T3
T1
T3 sin 30° mg
T1 cos 30° = T3 sin 60°

T3 = T1 cot 30°
mg = T3
T3 70  3
m=
g
= 7 3 ~¯ 12 kg
10
420. If tension is same in all parts of rope, the 1st monkey will have to be at rest.
v2
421. mg – Ncos = mg sin × sin – m cos
R
mv 2
N sin = sin + mgcos sin
R
mv 2
N – mg cos =
R
Page # 311
422. Eventually block and plank acquire common velocity. velocity v01 decreases and v02 increases. Accel-
µ k m1g
eration of plank = m2
Acceleration of block = – µkg
Acceleration of both blocks becomes zero simultaneously.
0
423. WD =  mg cos .Rd Rd

0
N
R–h
= mg R sin 0 
µN
= mg [ R 2  (R  h ) 2 ]1 / 2
= mg [ 2Rh  h 2 ]1 / 2
424. The system will lose its entire mechanical energy if the block finally comes to rest at the mean position.
Now suppose the block comes to rest for the first time after the start at a distance d1 from the mean
position on the other side, then
x=0
1
k(d2 – d12) – µmg (d + d1) = 0
2 d d1
(From work energy theorem, K = 0)
2mg 2mg
 d – d1 =  d1 = d –
k k
Now, similarly if d2, d3,.... etc. are the successive distances of the block from the mean position where
it come to rest for the second, third times etc. then d2 – d3 = d1
2mg 2mg 4mg
–d2 = d – d1 =  d2 = d1 – =d–
k k k
2mg 6mg
d3 = d2 – =d–
k k
 
2nmg
dn = d –
k
we want dn = 0
 2mg 
 d=n  
 k 
2mg
i.e. d should be an integral multiple of .
k
Page # 312
425. spring and gravitational force are always Non-impulsive and are conservative in nature.
426. Statement - I :
wnet = KEf
 work done by gravity is same in both
case
Statement II
h h
tan A = , tan B =
 2
A > B
A = g sin 
Statement III
wg + wext = 0
wext = – wg
427. w = KE
2
1 1 F 
(A) w = mv  m t 
2
2 2 m 
1 f2 2
(B) w  t
2m
2
f  2
(C) v    t
2
m
1 f2 2
(D) w = t
2m
428. (i) F cos  = mg
mv 2
(ii) F sin  =
L sin 
v 02
429. tan = (f = 0)
Rg s
v < v0 (slips downwards)
mg sin = 0 mg cos
tan  = m0
  
430. vb / t  vT / g  vb / g
for v b / g maximum
Page # 313
 
v bT and v T / g most be parallel

v b / g = v  v  2v
v b / g  2v
bob performing circular motion in frame of train
mv 2
T=


for v b / g is minimum
 
v b / T and v T / g must be antiparallel
 
vb /g = 0
1 1
431. –mg (1 – cos ) = mv2 – mv2 ............ (1)
2 2
m 2
T – mg cos  = ............ (2)

V2 = (2 – 3 cos )
(A)  = , V2 = 5g, hence true
1
(B) 3.5 = 2 – 3 cos , cos  = –   = 120° hence true
2
(C) 2 = 2 – 3 cos , cos  = 0 , /2, hence true
1
(D) 1 = 2 – 3 cos , cos  = ,  > 60°, hence true
3
dm dv
432. Fext = vrel +m
dt dt
dv
= 0 (v is contant)
dt
P = xg + v2
wP + wg = KE
L L
wP = +  xg dx   (dx ) v
2
0 0
L2g
wP =  Lv 2
2
Page # 314
433. Velocity of centre of mass is non zero
1m 1 2
 v1  v 2   kx max
2
2 2  2
dm
434. Fh = Vw cos = Vwr cos
dt
Vw r cos 
ah =
M  rt
dv V r cos 
= w
dt M  rt
v t
dt
 dv = Vwr cos  M  rt
0 0
t
 M  rt   M 
v(t) = Vwr cos ln    v(t) = Vw cos ln  
 r 0  M  rt 
435. In CM frame the blocks will perform SHM as

 VCM is constant hence both will can have maximum velocity v0/2 towards right in CM frame.
 (vB)max = v0 in ground frame
In CM frame (vA)min = –v0/2
 (vA)min = 0 in ground frame
i.e. A move only in right direction
In CM frame vB = v0/2 left in the case when spring is at natural length
 vB = 0 in ground frame at that instant.
436. Final momentum in y-axis is zero.

5 
So MV1 =  V0 sin   3M
 12 
3
V1 = V0
4
Along x-axis
5 
Initial momentum = final momentum  V0 cos   3M = MV1’
 12 
V1’ = V0
Page # 315
437. (D) is true option
mA  mB
because VA = m  m UA
A B
2m A
VB = m  m UA
A B
438.
The torque about the fixed point is zero, therefore angular momentum about this point will remain conserved.
when A and A' are fixed,
 m 2
LP = mv =  wP
2 3
 m 2 m 2
LQ = mv + w =  wQ
2 3 3
 wQ > wP
When B and B' are fixed,
mv mv
LP = =  w 'P
2 3
mv m 2
LQ = = ×wQ'
2 3
 wQ' < wP'
14m/s
C (in frame C)
439. ( F = 0,  = 0)
x=14 m/s
7
14 =   w  w  4rad / sec
2
7 2
aA = aB =   w = 56 rad/sec2
2
Page # 316
440. F = ma ........ (i) a
F
R 1 a
F = mR2 ........ (ii)
2 2
aP = a – R = 0 P 
R
441. mgr = fR .......... (i)
f
N1 sin  + f = mg .......... (ii) g R
N1 cos  = N2 .......... (iii) N2
r
f  µN2 .......... (iv) 
N1
442. I = t mg
1 2 (t ) 2
hence I 
2 2I
 
443. w =  f k .d s  0
if fk and ds looth are parallel to each other friction force acts up the inclind to produce angular acceleration.
T

 L   ML 
2
444. Mg     
 2   3 
Mg
3g L 3g
   acm = 
2L 2 4
 3g  Mg
– T + Mg = M  T=
 4 4
445. (A, B & D)
av × t = L2 – L1 = L
Page # 317
 
L1   L cos  î  L sin  ˆj , L 2  L cos  î  L sin  ˆj
 
L 2  L1 = ( 2L cos  î )

magnitude is same but direction of angular momentum is continuously changing. So L is not constant
(B) about centre is constant
(C) Tcos = mg ...(1)
Tsin = m2lsin ...(2)
m2lcos = mg
g g
2 = , =
l cos  l cos 
gl
V = (lsin) = sin 
cos 
Fav × t = P = P2 – P1
gl
mV = msin
cos
gl
P2  P1 2m sin 
Fav = = cos 
t 
2m sin  gl g 2mg tan 

Fav = ×  Fav =
 cos  l cos  
L will be constant about line OC as shown in diagram
y

L
is p
ara 
l lel L is parallel to –k^
to ^
+k 
 L = 0 about points on
P
this line
446. 45° x
  O
L = L0
about points
on this line
447. Using law of conservation of energy

1 2 1
for wheel A, mgh = I + mv2
2 2
2
1 V 1
 mgh = I   + mv2
2 r 2
Page # 318
1 1 
 mgh =  2
 m  v2
2 r 
mg
 v2 = ·h
11 
 m
2  r 2 
 v h
 VA  h and VB  4h  VB = 2VA
g sin 
h
Also VA2 = 2aA sin   aA = 1  1
mr 2
 Acceleration of wheel is independent of h
 aA = aB
h 1
Also = aAtA2  tA  h
sin  2
tB 4h
 tA = =2
h
 2 3 6 1 2 1 2
448. T  Þ 2 Þ = 2 
10  9 k 10 k 100 k
k = 800
x 1 + x2 = 6  3(x1) = 6x2  x2 = 2m, x1 = 4 cm
1 2 1 1
kx = m1v12 + m2v22  m1v1 = m2v2
2 2 2
1 6 6
3v1 = 6v2  × 800 × = 2.4 kg m/s
2 100  100
k k
449. ' = ; v1 x
m1 m1  m 2 0
k
'A' = x
m1  m 2 0
m1
A' = x
m1  m 2 0
Page # 319
450. (A) The vector sum of these three is  2 1 a 

(C) Energy associated with each wave = Ka2
Energy with resultant motion = K  2 1 a
2

2
 
K 3 2 2 
(D) Vmax = A
Vinitial = aw
Vresultant max, =  
2  1 a = 2.14 a
 Vresultant 72 time Vinitial
451. v = A cos (t)

for KE = 75% of KEmax
3
v= of vmax
2
3  2  1
A = A cos   t   t= sec.
2  2  6
or P = Pmax/ 2
1  2  1
 = cos   t   t=
2  2  3
1 k
452. (A) Isochronous system  f =
2 m
mg x=0
(B) m(g+a) k
ma old equ. (extreme position)
k
A= k
new equ.
(C) vmax = A
k ma m
= = a
m k k
453. At infinity total mechanical energy was zero, since mechanical energy remain conserve, thus total me-
chanical energy will be zero through the motion of the particles.
K.E. + P.E. = 0  K.E. = – P.E.
2
1 m ·um v rel G ·um 2
 =
2 m  um r
Page # 320
10 Gm
 vrel =
r
454. (A) Net gravitational field at centre due to solid sphere (having cavites)
is equal to zero.
let point P is in y – z plane P (o, y, z) then equipotential curve must be circle y – z plane 2 to the diameter
passing through eavities.
455. let both planet have densities e and 8e

4 3 4
r1 e  r23 8e
3 3
r1 = 2r2 ....(i)
2
g1  r2  1
   
g 2  r1  4
GM
456. Orbital speed (v0) =
R
2GM
escapes speed (ve) =
R
457. due to symmetric mass distribution about centre the gravitational about centre the gravitational field at
this point is equal to zero.
and equipotential surface is  r to the diamenter AB
458. v= 2g(h ) = 2 10  (5 / 100) = 1 m/s
1
Range = 0.8 × = 8 cm
10
3
 Range from B = 8 cm – 8 cm × = 3.2 cm
5
1 2
vcos t – gt = – 0.08
2
0.6t – 5t2 = –0.08
0.6  0.36  4  5  0.08 0 .6  1 .4 1

t= = =
2  10 20 10
Horizontal force required = mv cos 37° = v2 cos 37° = 1.5 × 10–4 × 1000 × 2 × g × h × (4/5)
0.05 4
= 1.5 × 2 × × = 0.12 N
100 5
Page # 321
459. There is some tension (say T)
FA (downward) & FB (upward)
FB + T = FA + mg
 FB – FA = mg – T
FB – FA < mg
460.
T
m1g
m2g N
N = (m1g + m2g) – T
if T = 0  N = (m1g + m2g)
if T > 0  N < m1g + m2g and T cannot be negative
461. Since body is floating, Buoyant force is same in both liquids and is equal to the weight of the body.

462. (A) T = 2 g
eff
Pb
(B) fraction = P same
L
m
(C) T = 2
k
(D) P = P0 + hPgeff
dm
463. mass rate of strike = A(2v)
dt
 
Change in velocity during strike = v = v f  vi = (–v) – (v) = –2v
dm dm
Thrust force on jet = v = (–2v) = –4Av v2
dt dt
Thrust force on wall = – Thrust force on jet = 4Av2
d( KE ) 1 dm 2
dt
=
2 dt
(v f ) 
1 dm 2
2 dt
( vi ) =
1 dm
2 dt
 
( v) 2  v 2 = 0
Page # 322
465. At the open end pressure node is present. So that
at x = 0 P should be zero and v = f,
3
for first over tone = 0.80
4
 f = 300
  = 2f = 600 t
15
Hence P = A sin x cos 600 t
8
466. As the motions of particles are simple harmonic, amplitude = 2cm.
(Agnular frequency) = 3 rad/sec.
As the phase difference of particles separated by 1 cm is /8
8
 =  2 = 16 cm


Hence, wave velocity =   = 24 cm/s.
2
 2 
y = (2) sin  (24 t  x ) cm.
 16 
2  
469.  = ( x1  x 2 )    
 4 6
when x1 – x2 = 23/24
then  = 2 (constructive interference)
when x1 – x2 = 11/24
then  =  (destructive interference)
470. The wave speed depends on propertices of the medium, not on how you generate the wave. For a
string. v = Ts  . Increasing the tension or decreasing the linear density (lighter string) will increase the
wave speed.
 30t x 
471. y = 10–4 sin 2   
  
 t x
y = 10–4 sin 2   
T 
473. d' = d(1+T)  = +ive (coefficient of linear

expansion)
r' = r(1+T)  = +ive (coefficient of linear expansion)
Page # 323
n T T Yl
474. f= =
2L  A L
n YAl n Yl
f= or
2L L 2L dL
MR 2
475. I= & M is constant  I  R2
2
I  R 
 =2   = 2  (T) on heating
I  R 
also no external torque present
 L = Iw = constant
1
w
I
w I  R 
 =– = –2   = – 2  (T)
w I  R 
477. L ob  L act [1  T]
L T' 1
T  2  (1  T )  1  t
g T 2
T 1
T '   t
T 2
F
FB
L
F = mg – FB F'  mg  VS 1   ST  g
1   L T
mg
Weight of body in liquid increases F = mg – LVSg F' > F
f ' 1   L T

f 1   S T
479. (A) Process AB : PT = const.  nRT2 = const.

B B
const. dV 2nRT
W=  PdV =  T
dV 
dT
=
const.
A A
100
const. 2nRT PA TB 1 TB
W=  T
·
const.
dt  
PB TA 
3
= T
A
300
Page # 324
300
 TB = = 100  W = 2nR (100 – 300)  WAB = –400 nR
3
(B) Process CA : Isochoric P/T const. : TA/TC = PA/PC
TA/TC = PA/PB  TA/TC = 1/3  TC = 3TA
TC = 900R  U = nCVT
3 3 3
= (1) R × (TA – TC) = R × (300 – 900) = R × – 600 = –900R  |U| = (900R)
2 2 2
(C) Process BC : Isobaric
5
Q = nCPT  Q = (1) R × (TC – TB)
2
5 5
Q= R × (900 – 100)  Q= R × 800  Q = 2000 R
2 2
 dQ 
480. Rate of heat loss,   = k( –  )
 dt  loss 0
At 45°C, Rate of heat loss = Rate of heat supplied = 12W

 k(45 – 15) = 12
 k = 2/5 W/°C
 dQ 
  = k(20 – 15) = 2W
 dt  loss
481. Heat flow
At A
x+1+3=5
x=1 Heat in flows from E
 TE > TA
 TC > TA > TD
TB – TA = TE – TA
 TB = TE
3
482. TKE per mole = RT (same for all ideal gas)
2
No of molecules in one mole = 6.023 × 1023 molecules.(same for all gases)
483. Adiabatic compressibility (K) = 1/(P)

Taking log
ln K = –lnP = –lnP – ln
Let ln K = y, ln P = x and ln  = c
 y=–x–c
Intercept on y axis is –c = – ln 
Page # 325
 2 > 1
Higher  means lower atomicity and lower degree of freedom.
So, (B) and (C)
484. (i) n1 C v T1 + n2 C v T2 = (n1 + n2) CvT
1 2
 5R 
2  T + 3 (3R) 2T0 = 5 Cv T
 2  0
23
RT
T0 = CvT
5
5R
n1C v  n 2C v 2  3  3R 14
(ii) Cv =
1
= 2 = R
n1  n 2 23 5
19
Cp = R
5
19 14
r= ; Put in (i) Cv = R
14 5
23
T= T
14 0
485. Ucycle = 0
Qnet = Wnet
–40 – 130 + 400 = Wcb + Wba + Wac
230 = 0 + (–80 J) + Wac
Wac = 310 J
Work output
Thermal efficiency = Heat input
230
=  100 = 11.5 × 5 = 57.5
400
486. We know
5 7
He = ,  O2 =
3 5
PV = const.
5/3
 L 
PHe (LA) = 5/3
PHe  A
2 

PHe = PHe (2)5/3 ... (1)
PO 2 (LA)7/5 = PO 2 (LA)7/5
7/5
L
PO 2 = PO 2   ... (2)
 L 
Page # 326
Now PO 2  PHe  PO 2  PHe


PO 2 PHe 7/5
 L  1
 PO 2 =     = 5/3
PHe L 2
L7 / 5
(L) = 5 / 3
7/5
2
L L
L = 5 / 3 5 / 7 = 25 / 21
2 x 2
LA
so volume of O2 = LA =
2 25 / 21
m
487. (A) Only equilibrium position changes. Time period remains same T = 2 .
k
1 2 1
(B) kx  mv 2  v at mean position is same amplitude will be same.
2 2
3mg
(C) In case - 4 Eaquilibrium position x0 = .
k
Q Q
488. At R, Enet = E + 2A  – 2A  = E
0 0
Q Q Q
At S, Enet = E + 2A  + 2A  = E + A 
0 0 0
Q Q
At T, Enet = E + 2A  – 2A  = E
0 0
489. Using law of conservation of energy, EA = EB

1 kQq kQq
 mV02 + =0+
2 a a
[ At B, V = 0 and zr = b]
kQq kQq kQq
 + =
6a a b
7 1 b 6
 =  =
6a b a 7
At infinity, EA = E
Page # 327
1 kQq 1 kQq
 mV02 + 2
= mV + 0 [  0 as r ]
2 a 2 r
7 1
 mV02 = mV2
2 2
 V = 7 V0
490. Equivalent circuit
C
C u2
C C
u1
u
5C
equivalent capacitance =
3
When k2 is closed no increasing in energy
1 2
1 5C 2 5CV 2
when k1 is closed E = cqV = V =
2 2 3 6
492. Equivalent circuit
C
C u2
C C
u1
u
5C
equivalent capacitance =
3
When k2 is closed no increasing in energy
1 1 5C 2 5CV 2
when k1 is closed E = cqV2 = V =
2 2 3 6
493. xa + xb + (Q2 + x) c = 0
 Q 2c
x= Q2+x
abc
Q1 = y + x + y – Q2 – x y x –x x –x y
–Q2–x
Page # 328
Q1  Q 2
y=
2
Q 2 ca
V = (a  b  c) S 
0
C
3 3
1 3
C 4C/3 C/3 C C/3 C/2 4C/3

494. (A) (B) (C)
2 6 1 6
C 6 C
+kC0V0 –kC0V0
495. Charged induced on the surface of dielectric slab
 1
= kC0V0 1   = (k – 1) C0V0
 k
– +
– +
– +
– +
(B) – (k – 1) C0V0 – + + (k – 1) C0V0 E– E+
– +
– +
Resultant field is zero due to charge on both the surfaces.
 kC0 V0  k 2 C 0 V0
(C) 
Force of attraction =  
 (kC0V0) = 2  A
 2 0 A  0
(k  1)C 0 V0
(D) 0 A
Q
496. A 0 = Emax
240 0 L2
A = 60L2
kA 0
4 0 A
= 480
d
0 A 8
= 120 × = 192
d 1 5
d  1  
2 4
Page # 329
497. (i – ig)R = ig × 96
(i – 10–4)R = 96 × 10–4
x = deflection
498. I
G
I I
5
Case-I G
4I
5 4
I I ( 4)
=
5 G4
G + 4 = 20
G = 16
I I I1 16
G G
Case-II 4 
2 4/3
I4 3 I
I' = =
4 13
16 
3
499. When S is open :
18V 18V 18V
C1
3 3F
18V +
–

C2 F
O O O
C1 & C2 are in series
C1C 2
 Ceq = C  C = 2F
1 2
charge (Q) = 18 × 2 = 36 C
when S is closed :
18V 18V 18V
C1
3 3F
18V +
–

C2 F
O O O
at steady state :
18V 18V 18V
3 V1 •
18V + •
– 2A
 V2 •
•
O O O
Page # 330
V1 = 2 × 3 = 6V
V2 = 2 × 6 = 12 V
Q1 = C1V1 = 18 C  36 C
Q2 = C2V2 = 72 C  36 C
 charges on both C1 & C2 has changed.
500. t = 0 uncharged capacitor has zero potential diff.
i1 2K
R1 i2 10F
So, + i3
12V R2
– 2K
2K R3
Req = 3K
12V
i1 = = 4mA
3K
i1
i2 = i3 = = 2mA
2
Steady state, capacitor does not allow current flow, so
i1 2K
i2 10F
+
12V i3 =0
– 2K
2K
12V
i1 = i2 = = 3mA and i3 = 0
4 K
24 4
501. i=  A
39 6 3
4
V1 =  9  12
3
4
V2 =  6  8V
3
at t= 
V2 = V1 = 24
Page # 331
R s
502. R2 R4
Q
equivalent diagram is as shown is P is moved 2cm right them R1 = 12, R3 = 3

R1 R2
R3 = R 4 (Hence wheat stone will be balanced)
5 10 20 R1 R2
If s is moved left cm then R3 = and R4 = hence R = R (hence wheatstone will be
3 3 3 3 4
balanced)
504. VPQ = 5 – I1(1) = 0  I1 = 5A
x = 3(I1) = – 15 V
I3 = 3A
 I2 = 5 + 3 = 8 A
 V0 = 8(3) = 24 V
V0 – VP = 24 – (–15) = 39 V
Also, V0 – VP = E – I2(1)
 39 = E – 8(1)
 E = 47 V
505. Since FCD shorts bulb 3, the circuit is equivalently wires BC and EF in parallel. As the voltage across
each branch must be equal to the voltage of the battery, the voltage from E to F is unchanged by closing
the switch. Initially, there is voltage across the switch and after it is closed, the voltage is across the
resistor. By closing the switch, the current in the circuit increases as effective resistance a cross battery
R1
decreases. (across battery effective resistance = 1  (R / R )  R 1 ) and the power from the battery
1 2
must increase.

  0 ( j  a )
506. Magnetic field is given by B 
2
B0x ^
j
L
507. Wire segment (1)
x dy
Page # 332
L y
  B0 x  iB 0 L
(d f ) =  i dx  2  = (3)
0 2
(2) (4)
  iB0 L
df = k̂ x
2 (1)
  iB0 L
Similary for f 2 = – k̂
2
 iB0 L
f3 = k̂
2
 iB0 L
f4 = k̂
2

fn = 0
If coil is constrained to rotate about
 B0 L 
y-axis |  | = 1  L
 2 
iAB0
=
2
 Similarly for torque about torque has same magnitude
0K
508. (A) hence K = V
2
 
(D) F = qu  B hence upwards.
509. (B) qE = qvB take effect is due to force on moving charge
510. The loops is alwsys attracted towards wire as the region part of loop getting attracted is experiencing
stronger magnetic field.
511. The magnetic field due to the outer loop is into the paper. The force on an element of the inner loop has

the direction given by ds  B where ds is the element length in the direction of current. Thus the force is
radially outward.
Since the force is symmetric, i.e. radially outwards everywhere and the loops are concentric, there is no
net force on the inner loop.
Page # 333

v
512. (A) –––––– ×++++++

B ^i 0
Magnetic force is  inward on right half and outward on left body. It is constrained so no effect.
(E0dq)

×
(B) Torque of electric force increases .
x x
(E0dq)
(E0dq)

(C) × Torque electric force decreases .
(E0dq)
(D) Rod will slow down only if force on any element is opposite to velocity magnetic force is always
 to velocity vector.
mv   
513. R= ; F  q ( v  B)
qB
515. Perimeter is decreasing at a rate of 2v

d dr v
 (2r ) = 2v  =
dt dt 
v
 r = (r0 – t)

 d dr
 = B · r2  = = B · 2 · r
dt dt
v v v
  = 2B(r0 – t) · = 2Bv(r0 – t)
  
 2Bvr Bv
I= =  ·2r =
R 
517. At resonance XL = XC and Z = Zmin = R
1
XL = L and = XC
C
If ‘f ’ is decreased then ‘’ will decrease and hence XC will increase therefore at f < fr, circuit behaves as
capacitive.
VL and VC always difference in phase by 180° at any frequency.
Page # 334
518. For µ2 > 2 (TIR will not take place)
2 sin 45° = µ2 sin r µ3 = 2
µ2 sin r = 2 sin e 
r
r
e = 90°
Hence deviation is 45° 1 = 2
45° 45°
µ2 < 2 TIR will take place
deviation is 90°.
(2,0,0) 3m = Radius of field of view

•
519. obj.
(1,0,0)• 2m = Radius of field of view
field of view
• 1m z
45°
y •
(–1, 0, 0)
520. Light travels from rarer to denser medium
i µi = 1
r  µr = µ

=i–r
 1 
 sin 1  
(sin i) 2 
 = i – sin–1 non-linear increasing function of i.

i
/2
d cos i
slope of tangent : d = 1 –
i  2  sin 2 i
Slope of tangent increases as i increases
Hence 'c' is not the graph for light that travels from rarer to denser medium.
Page # 335
1 1 1
521.  
f v u
1 1 1 1 1 xy
    
22.5 y  x x y xy
x + y = 120 Þ xy = 120 × 22.5
x (120 – x) = 120 × 22.5
x2 – 120 x + 120 × 22.5 = 0
120  120 2  4  120  22.5

x=
2
120  120 2  120  90

=
2
120  10 36
= = 60 ± 30 ; x = 30 or 90
2
522. Option A  Wrong because lens / mirror used must be of converging
nature
(i = r)
////
//
/////////////////
B i
r
//
B  Correct
C  Correct
D  Correct
4 xy
523. tan  = 
x 2x
2
2xy = x – yx
3xy = x2 x–y
x  x
y y

3 
x
x 2x
 x î  ĵ
3
Page # 336
525. Let maximum intensity be I0

I = I0 t
2
I0
Iav =
2
   1
I < Iav  cos2   <
 2  2
   1
 cos   <
 2  2
 3
 <  <
2 2
F   F  1
526. =y   =  
A   r  A
2
1   r  2 1 r   F  1
 U=    =  
2    2   r  A2
1
 U
A
MR 2
527. I= & M is constant  I  R2
2
I  R 
 =2   = 2  (T) on heating
I  R 
also no external torque present
 L = Iw = constant
1
w
I
w I  R 
 =– = –2   = – 2  (T)
w I  R 
528. Obrivation in 'A' can be explained only when we assume energy of incident radiation to be in form some
hc
packets. Observation in 'B' and 'C' can be explained by Einstein formula K    which supports

particle nature.
Page # 337
529. Intensity increases no. of photon coming on plates therefore it wouldn’t change stopping potential work
function maximum K.E.
530. It photon is emitted perpendicular to v, f =f0 because same part of energy of transition goes to recoil KE
of the hydrogen as in the stationary atom. If photon is emitted in same direction as v, f > f0 because now
KE of the H atom decreases due to recoil. and if photon is emitted opposite to v, f < f0 because KE of
H atom increases due to recoil, the increase here is more than in a stationary atom.
mv 2 kZe 2 1  kze2
531.  2  K.E.  , which increases, but P.E. = decreases   r3/2
r r r r
532. (A) n = 3
(B) 2r = n  232r0 = n   = 6r0
(C) No. = 3C2 = 3
(D) all lines in Balmer or lyman series.
534. * the probalility of decay in 1 sec is the decay constant , which remains constant.
* after average life 37% of nuclei remain undecayed.
* Part of energy of disintegration is taken by the recoiling doughter nucleus.
Page # 338
535. (i) When he drops the coin & it takes lesser time then its acceleration w.r.t. ground should be greater
than 'g' . So if lift is going up with increasing speed or going down with decreasing speed than time taken
by coin will be less. B, C.
(ii) A, C, D
x2
536. (A) 15 = x –
80
1200 = 80x – x2
x2 – 80x + 1200 = 0
x2 – 60x – 20x + 1200 = 0
x = 60, 20
(100) 2 1000
(B) y = 100 – = 100 – = 25
80 82
x2  x 
(C) Hz range : x – = 0  x  x   = 0 ; x = (0, 80)
80  80 
537. (i) N = mg – Fsin = mg – (ksin) t

 Graph (Q) for Normal reaction
(ii) fmax= N = mg – (k sin) t

mg
f = F cos = (k cos) t till F  fmax i.e. for 0  t 
k (cos    sin )
mg
for t >
k (cos    sin )
f = mg – (ksin) t
Hence graph (S) for friction
F f
(iii) a=
m
a = 0 till F  fmax
a = k(cos + mg sin) t – g for F  fmax
Hence, graph (P) for acceleration
(iv) v = 0 till F  fmax
t2
v =  a dt = (k cos  + mg sin ) – gt for F  fmax
2
Hence graph (R) for velocity
Page # 339
538. m = 7.5 kg mg = 75  = 0.1
F = 100 N
(A)  = 37° F = 100 N
F sin m N
Fsin  = 60 m = 7.5 kg
N = 80  fA  8 mg µ = 0.1

f = 8 , Kinetic F F cos
(B)  = 45°
N = 50 2  fB  5 2
Fsin  = 50 2 ,
f = 75 – 50 2
= 25 ( 3 – 2 2 )
f = 5 (static)
C)  = 53°
Fsin  = 80
N = 60  fC  6,
f = 5 (static)
539. (A) To wind up, bob has to reach B.

Minimum velocity at B = gy
C
Apply conservation of energy at C and B.  –2y
1 B
m ( – 2y) g = mgy y
2 O
 y=2 –4y y
 y = 2/5 A
 For 0 < y < 2 / 5
(B) If it cannot wind up, it will become projectile
2 / y < 
(C) If bob becomes projectile, It will experience of jerk from string after sometime. Direction of
impulse will not be perpendicular to direction of velocity. So mechanical energy will not be conserved.
If bob winds up, mechanical energy will be conserved till it collides with peg.
540. F1 = k1x1 | F2 = k2x2

k1x1 = k2x2 = kx
k 2x
 x1 = k  k
1 2
& x 1 + x2 = x
k 1x k1k 2
& x2 = k  k & k = k  k
1 2 1 2
1
(A) w.d. by S2 on block = – kx2
2
1
(B) w.d. by S2 on S1 = kx2
2 1 1
Page # 340
1
(C) w.d. by ‘F’ on block = + kx2
2
(D) w.d. by S1 on wall = zero (no disp. of pt. of application)
ar
541. a
(A) Acc - of - A w.r.t
a
ground ar
A N f
(B) R
f
(C) ar is along the plane
N'
R
(D)
f
60(1–v) v
542. (A) 60(1–v)
3
Pi = P  0 = 60 (1 + v) + (80 + 20)v v= 
8
3
is opposite to 2m/s velocity of Ram i.e. m/s towards rigid.
8
1
(B) 0 = 80(1 + v) + (60 + 20)v v=– m/s
2
(C) 80(1 + v) + 60 (–1 + v) + 20v = 0
80 – 60 + 800 + 60v + 20v = 0
–20 = 160v
1
v=– m/s
8
80 3
(D) After jump of Ram 20 3/8 now (80 + 20) = 80(1 + v) + 20v
8
17
v=– m/s
40
Page # 341
543. (P) Torque due to frction in zero about A so that angular momentum will be conseved in all cases and
also direction of friction depends on relation between v0 and 0 R and among v0 and 0R which will
become zero first
545. A becouse inital temperature gradient is maximum at
A and minimum at B
dQ
B  At steady sate will be same
dt
C  because at steady state
dQ dT dT
= KA product of A = cosntant
dt dt dt
 GM 
546. (A) L = mvr = m r

 r 
 L r
So angular momentum increases and becomes 2 times
(B)
A = 4R2 – 2 × 2R2(1 – cos) = 4R2cos

So, area covered by satellite increases
GMm
(C) U=–
r
So, when r is doubled PE becomes half and increases
GMm
(D) KE =
r
So, KE decreases and becomes half
547. (P) Pressure above surface × Area

R2 × gh
(B) Pressure below bottom × Area
= (2gh + 2gh) R2 = 4R2gh
h
(C) Fv =  g (h  x ) dx × 2R = Rg3h2
0
Fr =  (2gh )  (2gx )  2Rdx

0
Page # 342
3h 2
= 4gh  6Rgh2
2
total = 9Rgh2
 h  h
x
dx h h
x
(1) h (2) dx h
2
2
(D) FBuoyancy = pR2hg + 2R2hg

= 3R2hg
548. y = A sin (2x – 2t + /3)

dy
vp = = – 2A cos (2x – 2t + /3)
dt
1 1
(A) x , t ,
3 3
 2 2  
y = A sin       ve
 3 3 3
 2 2   
vp =  2A cos       ve
 3 3 3
1
(B) x= , t = 1sec
3
 2 
y = A sin   2    0
 3 3
vp = + 2A = +ve
1
(C) x = 1, t = sec
3
2  
y = A sin  2      ve
 3 3
 2  
vp = – A cos  2      ve
 3 3
(D) x =1, t = 1 sec

y = A sin  2  2     ve
 3

vp = – 2A cos  2  2     ve
 3
Page # 343
549. Refrection at movable boundaries no phase reversal takes palce but at rigid bondaries phase reversal of
180º takes place
550. From extrem positvie to mean Kinetic energy will increase.
P
P
T
Q x
R S
551.
S T
S x
P R
Q From S – x graph
C  C 
552. (A) by dopler effiect '  f '  f 0  C  v 
 s
C  C 
(B) by dopler effiect  f '  f0  
'  C – vs 
553. When source move towards observer w.r.t. medium, distance between two consecutive wavefronts
decreases, there by decreasing time taken in travelling from one wave front to other hence increasing
frequency.
In case of 'A' source moves towards observer w.r.t. medium while in B and C source moves away from
the observer . Where as in D, source doesn't move w.r.t. medium.
Q k 0 [(2R ) 2  R 2 ]
554. = (T1  T2 ) = Rk0(T1 – T2)
t 3R
Q 4kR 1R 2 4k 0 3R ·R
(B) = (R  R ) (T1  T2 ) = (T1  T2 ) = 6k R (T  T )
t 2 1 (3R  R ) 0 1 2
Q 2k 0l 4k 0 R
(C) = (T1  T2 ) = (T1  T2 )
t  R2  ln 2
ln 

R
 1
Q dT  x  dT
(D) = –R2k · = –R2k0 1  
t dx  3R  dx
3R T2
Q dx

t
=   x  = –R k0  dt
2
0  1   T1
 3R 
Page # 344
3R
 x 
ln  1  
Q  3R 
= = R2k0(T1 – T2)
t (R / 3)
0
Q k 0 R (T1  T2 )
 =
t 3ln 2
v
fs 
555. (A)
mgsin 0
'a' and '' are constant so  = 0 – t

t
(B) In steady state, of a uniform rod y
T1 T T2
T1
x
T2
 T1  T2 
T =    T1 x
   
strain
stress m2
(C) strain = = (2 – x2) strain is rotating rod. parabola
y 2 y
x

dT CA
Q.556 = (T – T0)
dt ms
dT1 C  6r 2 300C
= (50) =
dt P  S r3 PSr
dT2 C  4r 2 150C

= 3 (50) =
dt PS4 / 3r PSr
dT3 C  3r 2 225C

= 3 × 50 =
dt 2 / 3r PSr
(B) r/2 3r/8
Pr 3 2 2 Pr 5 2 2 4 3 8r 5 2 2 3 4r 5
(r  r ) = r ×  × r = ×r ××  =
2
12 12 5 3 15 5 3 15
Page # 345
(C)
557. v  T pressure remain constant

T
558. (B) Due to string constraint bob will move in circular path with respect to lift, w.r.t. ground acceleration
is not constant hence path will not be parabolic.
(C) Coefficient of friction for both objects are not sufficient for pure rolling. Hence acceleration will
be same (a = g sin  – g cos ). Also time will be same but work doen by frictional force will not be
same.
559.
(A) If outside charge is shifted to other position, distribution of +q on outer surface changes. Inside
cavity charge is unaffected.
(B) If inside charges is shifted, distribution of (–q) on inner surface will change so that net effect of (+q)
& (–q) inside cavity becomes zero outside cavity.
(C) When magnitude of charge inside cavity is changed (–q) inside cavity and (+q) outside cavity also
change.
(D) When conducter is earthed charge on outer surface changes so that potential of conducters becomes
zero.
 dv 
560. (A) Ex =    î = – 1 î
 dx 
 dv  1
Ey =    ĵ = ĵ
 dx  3
1
tan = = 30°
3
1
 = 150°
 dv 
(B) Ex =    î = + 1î
 dx 
Page # 346
 dv 
Ey =    ĵ = 0
 dx 
 = 0°
 dv 
(C) Ex =    î = – 1 î
 dx 
 dv 
Ey =    ĵ = + 3 ˆj
 dx 
 = 120°
 dv   1  1
(D) Ex =    î =     î = î
 dx   3 3
 dv 
Ey =    ĵ = –  3 ˆj =
 dy 
  3 ˆj Ans.
Alternative
 V V
E  ĵ
x y
 1
(A) E   î  ĵ  = 150°
3

(B) E   î  0 ĵ  = 0°

(C) E   î  3 ˆj  = 120°
 1
(D) E  î  3 ĵ  = tan–1(3) 60° <  < 90° ]
3
10V 20V
1F
• • 6V 26V
5613 (A) 16V R2
R1
P.D. across capacitance is 10 C

By analysing circuit P, Q, S is correct
i1 i2 12V
12V• •
20V
10V 1F
B – 8V
2V • A • 2V
(B) i1 + i 2 R2
0V
By analysing P, R, S is correct
Page # 347
26V 26V 26V 26V

• • • •
10V 20V
A B 12V
–4V • 16V • • 6V
(C) 20 R1 R2 14V
• • • •
0V 0V 0V 0V
By analysis (P), (Q), (S)
12V 12V 12V 12V
• • • •
30V 10V
20V
–18V • • 2V • –8V 12V
(D)
• • • •
0V 0V 0V 0V
By analysis.
0A
562. A— C1 = d  C1   Ceq =
d
C1C
C1  C 
 Q = CeqV 
 V on 2nd cap. 
AR  Q
0A
B— C1 = A  C1   Ceq  Q  V
d
C— no effect
D— Ceq = C  Ceq  V & Q
563. (A) when battory is conneted

then on insertion of dielectric – charge becomes K time and also energy becomes K time while case of
battery is not present then charge remain conserved
(B) with in case in separation capacitance decrease
564. (A) Field remains same as charge is same. Hence energy stored increases. (P) & (Q) as field is same
and (R).
(B) Since distance between plate and charge remains same and field decreases, (S & T)
Q2
F= , charge is same hence force remain same (Q).
2 0 A
(C) Since connected to battery P.D. remains same and as distance increases the electric field de-
creases. (T) Also as capacitance decreases the charge also decreases decreasing the force of interaction
and energy inside decrease (S).
Page # 348
(D) Capacitance increases and P.D. remaining same, thus charge and energy increases (P) and force
of interaction increases. Field remains same as distance and P.D. remains same (R) and energy increases
as
  
 E ·A E
565. (A) = = =
i jA j
V EAV V 2 A
(C) V = = = = V2 / R
  L
V V EL
(D) = = =R
  EA
566. (A) If velocity is along electric field path will be straight line otherwise parabolic.
(B) In magnetic field straight line, parabolic, circular paths are possible.
(C) If qE = qVB then path will be straight line and if EF and magnetic field parallel to each other then
path will be helical.
(D) If any net constant force like gravity, electric force etc. then path could be St. line, parabola,
circlar and helical (helical path can be possible if magnetic field is applied).
567. (A) force on positive and negative charge will be equal and opposit but torque due toforce will be along
x axis also dipole momentum is from negative to positive charge
F +
(B) – x component will cancle
F
B
F
(C) i net force has no x component
F B
(D) net force on closed current carying loop placed uniform B is zero
R 2
P= [–i – j]
2
568. By Right hand thumb rule
 R   R   20 
569. (A)  = tan–1   = tan–1   = tan–1  2  = tan–1 (1)
 XL   L   2 
 = /4
Page # 349

(B) T = 2 ; So T1  2s ; T2  4s
g
 2 2   1 1
 = ()t =    t = 2    1
 T1 T2  2 4
 = /2
2 2f
(C)  = kx = x = x = 
 V
T
V= = 100 m/s

Gm1m 2
570. (P) U=– –ve and increasing.
r
(Q) q Ucap   Umg  +ve and increasing.
(R) O v  and increases.
VI
(S)
If object is from ¥ to 2f VI 
If object is from 2f to f VI 
velocity is always in same direction.
kQq
(T) U=– r  becomes more –ve.
q –Q r
V  Blv
571. (A) i
R
V  Blv
F=  Bl
R
(B) i l B = ma
l BdQ mdv BlQ
 =  v=
dt dt m
Ui > Uf because energy is dissipated in em radiation.
(C) No energy dissipated as no resistance
R  Red executes SHM.
F = ilB to left  fext to right
Ldi
F = ilB,  Blv  not possible to move with constant v
dt
Page # 350
2R
x
572. 2 1
Refraction at
First surface first surface
µr µi µ r  µi
 
v u R
1 4 / 3 1 4 / 3
 
v ( 2 R ) (R )
1 2 1
+ =–
v 3R 3R
v = –3R (virtual)
µi
4 / 3 (3R )
m= µ =
r (1) (2R )
m = 2 (magnified)
Reflection from mirror & refraction from second surface
2
2R 2R
2R
6R
4/3 1 4 / 3 1
– =
v ( 4 R ) R
v = 16R (Real)
µi v 1 16R
m= µ u =  m = –3 (magnified)
r 4 / 3 ( 4 R )
Refraction a first surface after reflection from mirror and refraction at second surface.
2 1
14R
16R
µr µi µ r  µi
 
v u R
1 4 / 3 1 4 / 3
 =
v 14R R
7R
v= (Real)
3
Page # 351
µi v
m= µ u
r
4 7 / 3R 4 7 2
m= × =  m= (diminished) ]
3  14R 3 3  14 9
573. (A&B) For mirror,

2
v
vI = –   V0 (opposite to v0)
u
(C) For Lens,
2
v
vI =   v 0 (same direction to v0)
u
(D) Plane mirror,
vI = 2vm (same direction to v0)
574. (A) r1 = 30° , r2 = 70°

c = 45°
(B) r1 = 30° , r2 = 0°
light emerges normally from surface QR.
(C) 1 sin 90  2  sin r1
r1 = 45°
1
2  1 sin e
2
e = 90°
Light emerges grazing from surface QR
 v2
575. vI = 2 v0
u
(A) if v0 = (+)  vI = (–)ve
h2 v
h1 = as |u| decreases  |v| increases
u
 magnification increases
(B) as object goes from P  f image goes from P  +
|v|  |u|   m2 
(C) Object gas from C  –
image goes from C  focus
|u|  |v|  m2 
(D) Object goes from +  P
image goes from –f  P
|v|  |u| 
v is decreases with a greater rate  m2 
Page # 352
4
576. (C) Velocity of bird in water = 6 × =8
3
w.r.t fish = 8 + 4 = 12 
(D) Velocity of bird in water after reflection from mirror = 8 
w.r.t fish = 8 – 4 = 4 
3
(A) Velocity of fish in air = 4 × =3
4
Velocity of fish w.r.t bird = 3 + 6 = 9 
3
(B) Velocity of image of fish after reflection from mirror in air = 4 × =3
4
w.r.t bird = – 3 + 6 = 3 
D 6 107 1
577. Fringe width W = = = 12 × 10–4 = 1.2 mm
d 0.5 103
On y line fringes are as shown below
Ist, IInd maxima M1 & M2

Ist, IInd & IIIrd minima respectively D1, D2, D3
yd 2
Phase difference  = ×
D 
I = I1 + I2 + 2I1I2 cos = I0(5 + 4cos)
In Case (A)  = 3 + /3  cos = –1/2
In Case (B)  = 4 – /3  cos = 1/2
In Case (C)  = 4 + /3  cos = –1/2
In Case (D)  = 4 + /3  cos = –1/2
578 If the ray is reflected from denser boundary, it gets phase change of 180°.
Transmitted ray never gets phase change.
579. (A)For convex lens

| f |  Converging power reduces, virtual image is formed closer to lens hence closer to screen
Page # 353
For concave lens
| f |  diverging power 
I moves away
Hence (P), (Q)

(B) |u| < | f |  virtual image in all cases
(P), (Q), (R), (S)
(C) Say u = –u0
(i) converging lens
f f
m= =
f  (u 0 ) f  u0
if u  m thus distance between images decreases
(ii) diverging lens
 f0 f0
m= =
 f 0  (u 0 ) f0  u 0
if u0 
m
thus distance between images increases
(D)
In rest of cases no common region
hc
580. energy of photon =

1240
= ,  = 620 mm

1240
= 7×106 = 177 ×10–15 m

Page # 354
581. (A) If tarqu zero about cnetre of circular motion then angular mumetum will be constant
(B)  I = constant I decrese the  increses
(C) In pure Rolling work done by frictional force zero
(D) An external force incrases the speed of centre of mass
582. For x-ray spectum

I
583. Q = mc2
Page # 355
SUBJECTIVE TYPE
584. [E] = mL2T–2

a b c
m  L  T 
K 2  K1  1   1   1 
 m 2   L 2   T2 
1 2 2
 1kg   1m   1sec 
 10      
100gm   200cm   5 sec 
2
1000gm   100 cm 
 10    52
 100gm   200 cm 
1
 10  10   25  625 Ans.
4
nd
ou
gr
er
id
gl
37°
v
585. vRain glider =vRain ground 37°

–vglider ground
45°v
nd
R ain
ou
g ro
gr
un
er
d
id
gl
v
(vglider ground)=u
ucos37° = 12 2 sin 45° u = 15 m/s
586. The vertical speeds must be equal at the start and have always  u = V. This is time because the two y
1 1
values are given by u1t – gt2 and Vt – gt2  we must have u1 = V if these are to be equal for same
2 2
(and hence all) t.
To find the horizontal speed, note that the balls take a time T = v/s to reach the temp.
d
The left ball must travel a horizontal distance d in this time  ug = =
v/g
  gd 
 u =  v , v
 
g 2d 2 2
u= ,v
v2
g 2d 2
minimize of take the derivative of 2 + v2
v
 g 2d 2 2
2 2
O=
d   v  =  2g d + 2v  v2 = g2d2 = v =
 v 2  gd
dv   v2
v = 10 10 = 10 m/s
Page # 356
587. vB + vA = 2 vP = 2 × 5
2 + vA = 10  vA = 8
aB + aA = 2aP = 2 × –2
aB – 3 = –4
aB = –1
1
s = 0 = 2 × t – × 1 × t2
2
t = 4 sec.
vc
37°
53°
588
53°
37°
V
3 V
3V 12

5 5
V=4
4V 9 7
 + VC =
5 5 5
VC = 0 + aCt
aC = 7
589. v = u + at
v1 = 10 + 4 × 4 = 26 m/s
1
S1 = 10 × 4 + × 4 × 16 = 40 + 32 = 72 m
2
Now a = 8 – t
dr
=8–t
dt
r t
 dr   (8  t )  dt
26 4
t
 t2 
v – 26 =  8 t  
 2 4
 t 2   16 

v = 26 +  8 t  –  32  
2  2

2
t
v = 26 + 8t – 24
2
t2
v = 2 + 8t –
2
Page # 357
dx t2
 = 2 + 8t –
dt 2
8
 2 t 
3  83   64 
x=  2 t  4 t   
= 16  64  4  –  8  64   = 8 + 64 × 3 – 74.6
6 4 6  6 
 
= 200 – 74.6 = 125.33
 Total distance = 72 + 125.33 = 197.33 ~ 197 ]
v
B B
h
590. A vt –  37°
 A
37°
vt
h
= tan 37°
vt  
h

v tan 37 
 = 7.5 m/s = 750 cm/s ]
t
591. both block moves downward with acceleration g(=10 m/s2). by using string constraint pully p will move
upward with acceleration 40 m/s2
592. ve = speed of escalator steps per second

Total length in steps = 20 + ve 20 = 32 + 16 ve
steps
ve = 3
sec
Total length in steps = 20 + 3 × 20
= 80
593. a1 and a2 w.r.t. ground

m = 50 kg
a1
mg mg
a2 M = 100 kg
mg
a1 =  2m / s 2
m
mg
a2 =  1m / s 2
M
Plank as frame of reference
Page # 358
Plank comes to rest
V
a1/2 = 3 m/s2
v
h
h tan = 3 =
t

t time
2t
h = 3t
for minimum time, man will acceleration and retard with a1/2 for equal time interval t.
Area of v vs t graph = displacment
1
( 2 t )(3t )  75
2
t=5
minimum time = 2t = 10 sec
f
a2(w.r.t. rod)
594. 3g
a1
(w.r.t. ground)
4gf
 
A cat / g  – a1 ĵ  a 2 ĵ  0
a1 = a2 = a ...(i)
4g + f = 4a ...(ii)
3a + f – 3g = 3a ...(iii)
on solving above equation
g
a = 7 
4
n=7
595. For the dog,

N + Tsin – Mg = 0 (vertical)
F – Tcos = 0 (horizontal)
For maximum extension, f = N
For spring, Tcos – kx = 0 (horizontal)
We have four unknowns (N, T, F, x) and four equations.

Solve for T: Tcos = kx  T = kx/cos
Substitute for F and solve for N
N – Tcos = 0  N = Tcos/ = kx/
Page # 359
6
596. ax = = 1 ms–2
1 5
N=1×1=1N
1
fr = µN =
2
fr 1
a= =
m 2
1
0 = v0 – ×t
2
t = 10 sec.
597. Along normal their velocity are same.


v 5m
v1
v1 cos  = v sin 
at instant of touching ground.
2 .5 1 v1 v 3
cos  = =   = 60°  =
5 2 2 2
1 v12 3 v12
wg = k  mg × 2.5 = mv12  25 = + ×  v1 = 5 m/s
2 2 2 3
3
598. Let x is the vertical distance covered by the ring. Then x = L tan 37° = 0.7 ×
4
L
l = L sec37° – L = L (sec 37° – 1)  = l [RT-3 24-09-2006]
4
l = distance moved by block M
Now, from constraint relation
4
vM = vr cos 37° = v ...(1)
5 r
vr = velocity of ring, vM = velocity of the block at this instant
From mechanical energy conservation
PE + KE = 0
1 1
–mgx + Mg l sin 37° + mv 2r + Mv 2M = 0 ...(2)
2 2
on solving eq. (1) and (2), we get
vr = 0 m/s
Page # 360
599. Let us denote the elastic constant (spring constant) of the rope by k and its unstretched length by 0. The
maximum length of the rope is 1 = h – h0 = 23m, whilst in equilibrium it is 2 = (23 – 8) m = 15m.
Initially, and at the jumper's lowest position, the kinetic energy is zero. If we ignore the mass of the rope
and assume that the jumper's centre of mass is half-way up his body, we can use conservation of energy
to write.
1
mgh = k(1 – 0)2.
2
In addition, in equilibrium,
mg = k (2 – 0)
Dividing the two equations by each other we obtain a quadratic equation for 0.
 20  2(h  1 ) 0  (12  2h 2 )   20  4 0  221  0
which gives 0 = 13m.
When the falling jumper attains his highest speed, his acceleration must be zero, and so this must occur
at the same level as the final equilibrium position ( = 2).
Again applying the law of conservation of energy,
1 1
mv2 + k (2 – 0)2 = mg (2 + h0)
2 2
where the ratio m/k is the same as that obtained from the equilibrium condition, namely,
m 2  0

k g
Substituting this into the energy equation, shows that the maximum speed of the jumper is v = 18 ms–1
 65 km h–1. It is easy to see that his maximum acceleration occurs at the lowest point of the jump. Since
the largest extension of the rope (10 m) is five times that at the equilibrium position (2m), the greatest
tension in the rope is 5mg. So the highest net force exerted on the jumper is 4mg, and his maximum
acceleration is 4g.
u 2 cos 2 0
600. At maximum height R =
g
u 2 sin 2 0
Maximum height of projectile H =
2g
Given R = 2H
u 2 cos 2  2 u sin  

2 2
=  2g   tan = 1   = 45°
g  
Page # 361
N1
a
T T mg
601. N2
a mg
T T
N1 = + mg = ma .........(ii)
2 2
T T
= N2 mg – = ma ..........(i)
2 2
T T mg (10 1 )(10) 1
mg – =  mg = T 2  T =  = N.
2 2 2 2 2
1
 100T2 = 100   = 50 ]
2
2kg 3kg 2kg 3kg

602. A V1 B V2 A B V = 4m/s
2(V1) + 3(V2) = (2 + 3)V
 2V1 + 3V2 = 20 ........(i)
loss in KE = heat energy
1 1 1
2(V1)2 + 3(V2)2 – (2 + 3)V2 = (2 + 3)ST
2 2 2
3 2 3V22
V12 + V2 – 40 = 15 or V12 + = 55 ........(ii)
2 2
Solving equation (i) and (ii), we get,
V1 = 1m/s or 7 m/s and V2 = 6m/s or 2 m/s for collision V1 > V2. So V1 = 7 m/s and v2 = 2 m/s
603. As µ << m, M, momentum conservation

MV = (M + m)V'
gives for the velocity of the two carts after collision,
MV
V' =
Mm
Consider the circular motion of the ball atop the cart M if it were stationary. If at the lowest and highest
points the ball has speeds V1 and V2 respectively, we have
1 1
µV12 = µV22 + 2µgR,
2 2
µV22
= T + µg
R
Page # 362
where T is the tension in the string when the ball is at the highest point. The smallest V2 is given by T = 0.
Hence the smallest V1 is given by
1 1
µV12 = µgR + 2µgR i.e. V1 = 5gR
2 2
With the cart moving, V1 is the velocity of the ball relative to the cart. As the ball has initial velocity V and
the cart has velocity V' after the collision, the velocity of the ball relative to the cart after the collision is V
– V'. Hence the smallest V for the ball to go round in a circle after the collision is given by
MV Mm
V – V' = V – = 5gR i.e. V = 5gR
Mm m
r1
r2
T1 T2
 a1 a1
604. r1 = r , r2 = 2r
2g 2g
T1 T2
a1 = r , a2 = 2r ...(i)
T2 2r – T1 r = I  ...(ii)
 (I = 10r2)
T1 – 2g = 2a1 ...(iii)
2g – T2 = 2a2 ...(iv)
on solving above equation
a2 = 4 m/s2
M
v2
m
605. P w v1
Conservation of Angular momentum about point 'P'

m 
  Mv 2 ...(i)
12 2
conservation of linear Momentum
0 = mv1 + Mv2 ...(ii)
Page # 363
v 2 – v1
e
 ...(iii)

2
by using above equation
m
M
2
1
606. w.r.t. COM K.E. = (red mass) vrel2
2
mr
w.r.t. COM Angular momentum = v
2 rel
 Equating energy
1 m 2 Gm 2 1 m 2 Gm 2
v0  0 = vrel 
2 2 r 2 2 r
(Here vrel is relative velocity | to line as vrel along the line joining is zero when separation is either
min. or max.)
Angular momentum conservation
mr0 mr
v0 = v
2 2 rel
r0 v0
 vrel =
r
solving 3r – 4rr0 + r02 = 0
2
r0
 rmax = r0 rmin =
3
ratio = 3 (ans)
2R R3 3
607. T= = 2 = = 3 ×103 sec = 3000 sec.
V GM GP
 GM  3M 1 2
608.  µVrel 0
d 2
 3GM 2 1 3M 2 2
   Vrel
d 2 4M
2
8GM
 Vrel =
d
8GM
Vrel =   = 8 Ans.
d
Page # 364
609. At the "critical" depth H, the equilibrium condition for the compound object
suggests that the density of the liquid is d = (d1 + d2)/2. For the top and the
bottom object taken separately, the equilibrium conditions are, respectively:
d1Vg + F – (dVg – dgAH) = 0
d2Vg – F – (dVg + dgAH) = 0
(For each object, the term in parentheses indicates the " effective" buoyancy force.)
Combining the last two equations yields the answer : H = [(d2–d1)Vg – 2F] / [(d1 + d2) gA]
610. As force equal PAaA = PBaB

where PA = pressure at top
aA = area of top surface
PB = pressure at bottom,
aB = area of bottom surface
PB = P0 + hg = 1 × 105 + (30) (1000) (10) = 4 × 105
(1 × 105)(R22) = (4 × 105) (R12)
R 12 1 1
2 =  R1 = R ....... (1)
R2 4 2 2
4
and R2 – R1 = h  R2 – R1 = 40
3
611. wvw = 16 x = density of H2O.
L VL – H VL = 28
L VL + w ww – H (VL + Vw) = 19
 16 – H Vw + 28 = 19
H Vw = 25
w 16 16
 H =  w = × 1000 = 640 kg/m3
25 25
612. w2 – w1 = mgh
= (99 × 10 × 1) × 10–3 × 10 × 0.3
= 9.9 × 0.3 = 2.97 J
2m
613. mg = 1 × 0.5 V0g  1 = V
0
3m
mg = 2 × V0 g  2 = V
3 0
1V   2 V 1   2
= =
2V 2
(1   2 ) Vg 1  2m 3m 
mg = Vg =  m =   V
2 2  V0 V0 
Page # 365
5mV
m = 2V
0
V = 0.4 V0  40%
2 3
614. (R2H – R ) × d × g
3
 2 
R2 H  R  × 104
 3 
 2 
=  × 0.09 × 104 1   0.3
 3 
 × 900 × 0.8 = 720 
615. Mg – T – 6r1v = 0
mg + T – 6r2v = 0
4 3 2

 r  r  g
3 1 2

=v
6(r1  r2 )
2 2 g
v= (r1 – r1r2 + r22)
9 
2 2 g
T = Mg – 62r1 × (r1 – r1r2 + r22)
9 
4 3 4
= r1 × g – g [r13 – r12r2 + r22r1]
3 3
4
= gr [r12 r2 – r22r1]
3
4  r22 
= rgr12 2 r  
3  r1 
dT 4  2r2 
1  0
dr2 = 0  3 gr1
2
 r1 
r1 = 2r2
M
=8
m
Page # 366

616. 2x ×  × g = L × g
2
70cm
 L = 4x 20 70 + x – L
frequency same   = same 20 – x
1m 5 cm
 x
20 – x = x
4
30 30
5
70 + 3x =
4
70 – 3x = 100 – 5x
2x = 30 ; x = 15
L = 4x = 60 cm
8 x 2  x
617. t=  8+x
c c 2-x
•
 – 6 = 2x –8 x 2
x = – 3m
5
 t= y
c
5 32  y 2 –3
 y=4
F0
618. Time taken by pulse to reach from P to Q(t0) = , where F0 = 3
k
T dX F0  kt
Now, V =  =
m dt m
L t
1 0
 = m  (F0  kt ) dt
1/ 2
 dX
0 0
2
L= F03 / 2
3k m
3
2 F0 2 3 3 3 23
 k= = 2 = = 20 Ans.
3L m 3  1 3  10 3  0.1
2 cm
619. ×22 × y =  × 42 × 100
y = 40 cm = /2 y 10 cm
 = 80 cm 4 cm
0.8 × 420 = 336 m/s
Page # 367
S M
620.
52 cm 50 cm
v = 325 m/s
V 325
0 =  10 =
4L 4  0.52
325
20 =
4  0.50
325  1  325  0.004  0.325
10 – 20 = 1        6.25 Hz
4  0.264  4  0.260  0.264  0.260  0.264
621. at given time y = m1x 0 < x < 0.1 m

= m2 x + C 0.1 m < x < 0.15 m
10 3  T
m1 = = 10–2  V  
  
0 .1  
10 3
m2 = = 2 × 10–2
0.05
2
1 1  y 
dK = dm VP2 = dx   V 
2 2  x 
1  0 .1 0.15 
 dK = 2  V   1 0 2  dx 
2 m 2 dx  m 2
0.1 

K
1
2

 m12 (0.1)  m 22 (0.5) 
K=
1
2

T 10  4 (0.1)  4  10 4 (0.5) 
10
= [10–4] (0.3) = 0.15 mJ Ans.
2
622. Qloss = Qgain

mCSCTC = mice L
(CA) (SC) (T – 0) = (ice Ah)L
 C SC T
h= ice L
hA  A SA (4)(0.2)
hB =  BS B = =4
(2)(0.1)
Page # 368
623. 200 × S × 30 + 50 × S × 40 = 250 × S × T1 50

T1 = 32º
200 g 200 g
32 × S × 50 + 150 × S × 40 = 200 × S × T2
40ºC 30ºC
T2 = 38º
200 × S × 32 + 50 × S × 38 = 250 × S × T3
T3 = 33.2º
33.2 × S × 50 + 150 × S × 38 = 200 × S × T4

T4 = 36.8º
36.8 × S × 50 + 200 × S × 33.2 = 250 × S × T5

T5 = 33.92º
2
1
624. 2
  1 2 2 
14        1   78
dQ k1A1 k 2A 2 80  1 78   2 
 
= T + T = +
dt L L 0 .5 0.5
 7 (   2)    22  14  dm dm
= 156 80 
2 
= 156 80  7 7  = 156 × 88 × × Lf = × 80 × 4200
    dt dt
156  88  7  60
m = = 11 × 156 × 10–3 kg
80  4200
= 1716 gm
dQ
625. =  × 0.8 × 4r12 [8004 – 6004] 800
dt
4r2 r2'
=k× ' × (600 – T) 600
r2  r2
r2r2'  r22
17 0.9 1 5
 10 8    108  100  28  103 
600 – T = 3 10 100 100  T = 516 K
0.085
Page # 369
626. The rate of the heat transfer is approximately proportional to the temperature difference, between radiator
and room as well as between the room and the outside. The corresponding proportionality constants can
be denoted as C ("radiator-room") and D("room-outside").
Then, initially,
C(T – 300) = D(300 – 260)
For the second set of temperatures:
C(T – 290) = D(290 – 240)
Solving the equations yields T = 340 K
627. Process A  B
3 13
WAB =  P dv = 2T
1/ 2
dv =  RT 1 / 2dT
2T
1/ 2
3
On solving, WAB = 50 R = 50 × 8.3 = 415 J
Process B  C
1 1/ 2
U= V
2
3 1
RT = V1 / 2  3PV1/2 = 1
2 2
1
 P=
3 V
1600
1
Now WBC =  P dv =  dv = 2 V = 2 [ 40  10] = 2  30 = 20 J
100 3 V 3 3 3
Total W = 415 + 20 = 435 ]
dv Adx
628. Temperature is constant  E = 0, dW = nRT = nRT
v AL / 2
Q = E + W
dW nRT dx
 =
dt L / 2 dt
dQ dW 1 T 2nRT  dx 
  k =  
dt dt 900 L L  dt 
dx k  27 415.5  27  2 1
 = = = m/s = 5 mm/s
dt 900.nRT 900  0.5  8.31 300 200
629. Q = 7J
Q = DU + W
7 = nCvT + PdV
5
= n RT + nRT
2
7
7= (nRT)  nRT = 2 J
2
Page # 370
f 5
630. V = nRT = (P2V2 – P1V1) = 63 J
2 2
1 2
mgx + kx + P0Ax = gas
2
gas = 12 J  Q = 75 J
631. At B and C (TB = TC)

PB VB PC VC
TB = TC
PB VA PC 3VA
TB = TC
PB = 3PC
for line AC P  V (straight line through origin)
PC VC 3VA
so P = V = V
A A A
 PC = 3PA
Thus PC = 3PA ; PB = 3PC = 9PA .....(I)
VC= 3VA ; VB = VA
PA VA
TA = .....(II)
nR
from A to B ; sochoric P  T 
so TB > TA
for C to A ; both (P, V)  so T 
Thus from B to C ( we could have maximum temperature)
P = aV + b
 6PA  3PA V
 P =   2V  + 12 P
 A
 P=– + 12 PA
 A  VA
PV = nRT
 3PA V 
 
 V  12PA  V = nRT
T
 A 
dT
for Tmax =0
dV
 6PA
VA V + 12PA = 0
V = 2VA  P = 6PA
6PA (2VA ) 12PA VA
T= =
nR nR
Tmax = 12 TA = 2400 K
Page # 371
632. 1– 2  Isothermal
 300 
Q12 = –nR × 350 ln  
 100 
2– 3  Isobaric
Q23 = n × Cp × [T3 – T2]
T3 350
=
300 100
T3 = 1050
7 7
Q23 = n × R (1050 – 350) = nR × × 700
2 2
3 – 1  Isochoric
5 5
Q31 = nCvT = –nR × × (1050 – 350) = –nR × × 700
2 2
5  ln 3
 = 1 – nR  350 ln 3  (5 / 2)nR  700 = 1 –
7
nR (7 / 2)  700
 5  (12 / 11) 
= 1   × 100% = 12.98%  13%
 7 
633. Electric field on particle

 V  [250  (250)]
E= E = E = – 2500 V/m
x 20 102
qE 1.6 1019  2500
Acceleration of charge particle =  31
 2500 1011 m / s 2
m 16 10
2 5 1 2
thus time taken = {S = at )
a 2
2  20 102 –8
= 11 = 4 × 10 sec. = 40 nS
2500 10
4 3
634. V= r .... (1) p0
3
Q
 .... (2) 2/20+p
4r 2
2 4s
 p  p0 
2 0 r .... (3)
p – p0 = 0 .... (4)
Page # 372
1 Q2 4s
 · 
2 0 16  r
2 4
r
1 n 0s 4 3
 · · r  4s
2 0 16 2 r 3 3
n = 96

635. 2 0 r = Ebreak

r = 2  E
0 break
103
=
2  3.14  8.85 1012  3 106
1
=  103
2  3.14  8.85
= 5.99 m  6 m Ans.
 
636. Along z axis E ·dA  0

Along x axis E = cont.
 x= 0
for y = 0
 
 
 E ·dA   30  2ˆj·dA  ˆj  6 dA  6
for y = 1
 

 ·dA   31  2ĵ·dA ĵ  9 dA  9
E
 net= +30 Ans.
637. WAex. B = W = UB – UA
y y
B (0,2R,0) B (0,2R,0)
x x
/2
A
(0,0,2R)
z z
Q2
W = UB – ............ (1)
4 0 5 R
At new position
Page # 373
Q2
U'B =
40 5 R
Work done = U'B = UB = –W = – 4J
638. In uniform electric in vertical direction if (+ve) charge feels extra acceleration in downward direction,
then (–ve) charge will feel acceleration in upward direction.
vuncharged = 5 5 m / sec
v = 0, h = height
v2 – u2 = –2(g) h
– (5 5 ) 2 = –2gh
uq+ = 13 m/sec
v = 0, h = h
 FE 
v2 – u2 = 2 g   h
 m
 F 
0 – (13)2 = – 2 g  E  h
 m
Let uq– = u(say)
v = 0 h = ht
 FE 
v2 – u2 =  2 g  h
 m
 FE 
–u2 =  2 g  h ; u = 9 m/sec
 m
a
639. FAB = (0 + l) × l = al 
l
a
FCD = (l + l) × l = 2al 
l
For FAD = FBC
l
a  x 
2
a 3
F =  x  l dx =   lx  = al
l l 2 0 2
6al = 6 × 5 × 105 × 20 × 10–6 × 0.1
= 6N (ans)
x
q1 – q2
640.
4 7
q1 q q1 q
 2 =0  2 =0
x4 4 x7 7
Page # 374
q1 x4 q1 x7
q2 = q2 =
4 7
x4 x7
=
4 7
7x – 28 = 4x + 28
3x = 56
56
x=
3
56
q1  7 11
= 3 =
q2 3
7
| q2 | = + 12 c
11
 q1 = 12 × = 44 c
3
641. Initially, 2Tcos = mg ...(1)

here T = k(26 – 24)
T = 2k
5
So, 2 × 2k × = mg ...(A)
13
1st Case
Now length of string = 30 cm
T1 = k(30 – 24)
 2T1cos = qE1 + mg
9
2 × 6k × = qE1 + mg
15
36 20
 k– k = qE1
5 13
(468  100)k
 = qE1
65
368k
 = qE1 ...(B)
65
2nd Case
T2 = k(40 – 24) = 16k
16
2 × 16k × = qE2 + mg
20
128k 20k (1664  100)k
 qE2 = – =
5 13 65
1564
qE2 = k ...(C)
65
Page # 375
E2 1564
 E1 = 368 = 4.25
642. Q = CV
4 4
 2 4
V = –   Edx = –20   x  3  dx
3 3 
 x 3 4x 4 
V = –2Q  3  3 
 
3 
1 4 
V = –2Q  [64  27]  [7]
3 3 
Q 119 
= 3Q  
C  3 
1
= 119 F–1
C
643. Just after closing switch no current flows through R2 so I1 = 3mA

Long time after closing switch no current flows through C so I2 = 2mA
Directly after re-opening the switch no current flows through R1 and the capacitor will discharge through
R2 so I3 = 2mA
Cq1 Q0 Cq 2
643. = (Q0 – q1)  q1 =  = K(q1 – q2)
k  C K
1  
 K
q1 Q0 Q0 Q0
q2 =  q10 = 10
 = 10
 C  C 2  C
1   1   1  
 K  K  K
 C Q0 Q0
1   = 10 2  
 K 3  C 10 n
1  
 K
10 2 = 10  n 3
ln 2 ln 3
=
10 ln 2
Page # 376
644. Initially,
2 
q1 = 24  F  = 16 C & q2 = 16 C
3 
Finally,
(V1 – 24) × 1 + (V1 – 0) × 2 + (V1 – 24) × 2 + (V1 – 0) × 1 = 0

24  3
V1(1 + 2 + 2 + 1) – 24 × 3 = 0  V1 = = 12 V
6
Q1 + Q2 = (12 – 24) × 1 + (12 – 0) × 2 = – 12 + 24 = 12 C
Q3 + Q4 = (12 – 24) × 2 + (12 – 0) × 1 = – 24 + 12 = – 12 C
Initial net charge on plates left of S = 0
Final net charge on plates left of S = Q1 + Q2 = 12 C
Charge flowing through S = 12 C towards left
Alternative:—
– 2 × 12 + 1 × 12 = 0 = – 12 = 12 C
645. [RT-4, XII, 19-08-07]
C(x – V0) + C(x – 0) + C(x + 4V0) = 0

3Cx = –3CV0
3V0 0 A
Q=  x=3
L
Page # 377
l   p  2 
646. For w1,  = 2  1  2  l  ...(1)
  
2l   p  R 
For w2,  = 3  1  R  l  ...(2)
  
Dividing eq. (i) by (ii) and on solving, we get
Resistance of wire w2 = 1 
647. Taking potential at A to be zero potental at B = 3V and potential at B' = 3V and potential at C = 6V
so reading of V3 = 3V
R R IC R
B’
V1 V3
D
V2
R R R
A
B C
9V
Let VD be potential of point D then sum of charged reaching point D is zero

VB  VD VB'  VD (VC  VD )
R V2 + R V1 + R V3 =0 R V1  R V1  R V3  R 
3  VD 3  VD 6  VD
 + + =0
R R R
 12 – 3VD = 0 ; VD = 4 volts reading of V3 = 2 volts.
wire BC

F
cos  = d/r
a2
r  d2   13cm a/L = 5cm
4  d
i1
 a/L = 5cm
648.

F
•
wire DA
  0 i1, i 2 
Torque =  a cos   a
 2r 
Page # 378
x
649. z
4  10 7 8  1 1 
B=    î  k̂ + 1.4 × 10–6 î
2 2 2 2 
 
=  8î  8k̂  14î  10 7
= (6î  8k̂ )  10 7
B = 10 × 10–7 T
Ans 10
650. Bv = BHtan = 0.1 × (4/5) = (4/50)T
BHN = 0.1 cos37° = (4/50)T
BHE = 0.1 sin37° = (3/50)T

 on the coil due to component of B in N direction = 0
  
|  | | M  B | = 1 × 22 × 0.1 = 0.4 Nm
2 2
 3  4 5
Bres =     = = 0.1 T
 50   50  50

 has direction as shown
In its plane, I can be found by  axis theorem
 22 
 3   3  12   4 = I = 2I
 12 
  1
I = 8 kg m2
 0 .4
= = = 0.05 rad/s2
I 8
Page # 379
1
651. Induced EMF = Bl 2
2
At any time t
di Bl 2
L + iR =
dt 2
Solving for i, we get
i=
Bl 2
[1  e Rt / L ]
2R
Torque about the hinge P is
l
1 Bl 2 Bl 2 B 2l 4
 =  idxB ·x = iBl = [1  e Rt / L ] = [1  e  Rt / L ]
2
0 2 2 2 R 4 R
Max. value occur at t =  and half of this is equal to
B2l 2 1
i1 = when 1 – e–Rt/L =
4R 2
B2l 4
 Torque at this instant = = 1.25
8R
10t/ 2 x
652. x = 10t
10 t/ 2
10 m/s
2
10t 
=B  
 2
d d
 100Bt  100  (.10)  (.10)  1V  100Bt  100  (.10)  (.10)  1V
dt dt
 10t 
R = (.01)  4 
 2
1 d
i= = 35.35  35 A Ans.
R dt
653. For constant velocity,
a=0
F0 = Fm
  Bv 0 
= iB =  B =  B
R  R 
F0 R
v0 = velocity at point ‘P’
B2 2
Fm iB
Now, retardation a= =
m m
Page # 380
B 2 2
a= v
mR
dv B 2 
 –v = v
ds mR
0 s
B 2 2
or   dv =  ds
v0 mR 0
B 2 2
or v0 = s
mR
mRv 0 F0 mR 2
or s = = = 320 m
B2 2 B4 4
  
654 
 = B Vcm  L 
 
 3 4 
 

= 6k̂   î  ĵ   4î  3 ĵ  = 21
 2 2  
655. When the rod moves with constant velocity, net force on the bar is zero
 W = gravitational force = mg = ilB
[i = induced current in the circuit]
0.2  10
 i= = 4A
2  0.25
100  
To produce 4A current in the bar, induced emf  in the circuit is =4   = 60 V
40
 60
We know,  = BlV  V= = = 120 m/s
Bl 2  0.25
2
d  4 .5 
656.  = 150 × (µ0 ni) × p ×  
dt  100 
230  10 2 2 4.5  4.5

= 150 × 4 × 10–7 × × ××
100 0 .1 104
 600 2  460  103  10 7 (4.5) 2

i= = ×
12 12 104
= 0.04657500 × 10–6
~ 5A
Page # 381
657.
~
V0 V0 1 1
i =  =
Z R LC 1.6  250  106
1 V0 103
VC = i0 × i0 ×  =  50
C CR 45
32
400 
50  250 106  R
32  10 6
R=  6 .4   64 Ans.
50  250  400
3 wL1
658. tan  = R =
1 4
3
wL1 = R
4 1
100
1=
9 2
R  R12
16 1
R1 = 80 L1 = 60
wL 2 4 4
  wL2 = R
R2 3 3 2
100
5=  R2 = 12 ; WL2 = 16
16 2
R  R 22
9 2
z= ( wL1  wL 2 ) 2  (R1  R 2 ) 2 = 119
659. R.M.S value of supply voltage, V = 200 volts

Across resistance, rms voltage, VR = (200) 2  (120) 2 = 160 Volts
160
 Current, i = = 4 Amperes
40
Page # 382
d A
F y A
660. 
F d
F
A’
y
F+Normal shift
1
Normal shift = h 1–
n
A A'

Fy  1
F  y  h 1   A’ A
 n
F–y F NS
 h  1 
A'  A 1  1   
 F  y  n 
AF
F–y=
d
 dh  1 
A'  A 1  1   
 AF  n 
 23  1 
 11  1   = 1.2 cm = 12 mm.
 1 10  1.5 
661. Beam is parallel to base  mm deviation
  60   
sin   sin  
 2   2 
µ=  3 =
  60 
sin  
sin  
2  2 
 60    3 60  
sin   =  = 60
 2  2 2
 = 60°
662. u = –(30 – 2t)
v = 20 – 2t 2t 20–2t 30–2t
1 1 1 20 30
– =
v u F
Page # 383
1 1 1
+ =
20  2 t 30  2 t 5
50  4t 1
2 =
600  4t  100t 5
2
250 – 20 = 600 + 4t – 100t
4t2 – 80 t + 350 = 0
40  1600  1400 40  14
t= = = 6.465 sec.
4 4
µr 20  3 / 2
663. Refraction plane surface h' = h µ = = 30 cm
i 1
Mirror
1 1 1
 
v u f
1 1 1
 
v  45  10
90
v=– from pole of mirror..
7
90 105  90 15
distance of object from plane surface l = 15 – = =
7 7 7
µr
Refraction at plane surface x = 10 l' = l µ
i
15 1 10
x = l' =  =  7x = 10 (location of final image from plane surface)
7 3/ 2 7
664. (I) Image by partial reflection = 12 cm below water surface

(II) For mirror object appears at
u 24 12
= +
4/3 4/3 1
4
u = 24 + 12 ×  u = 40 cm
3
Reflection
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ =  = +  v = +24 cm
v  40  60 v 60 40
Refraction
AI 48
= = 36 cm
1 4/3
Thus, distance between two images = 36 – 12 = 24 cm
Page # 384
4
1
4 1 3
665. – =
3v  30 5
4 1 1 1
= – =
3v 15 30 30
v = 40"  u = 35"
1 4 / 3 1 4 / 3
– =
v  30 5
1 6 4
– +
v 90 90
v = 9"
distance from observer = 21"
y
(2,2,0)
45° x
666. (0,0,–1)
2î  2 ĵ  k̂
n̂ 
3
ê   î
Using, r̂  ê  2(ê ·n̂ )n̂
2(2) (2î  2 ĵ  k̂ ) 4  î  8 ĵ  4k̂

r̂   î  =  î  (2î  2 ĵ  k̂ ) =
3 3 9 9
2mg
667.  5  10  2
k
1 1 1
 
v f u
1 1 1  2 1
  
v  10  20 20
v = – 20 cm
d1 = 20 cm (initial distance of image from mirror)
1 1 1 3 2
  
v  10  15 30
v = – 30 cm
d2 = 30 cm (final distance of image from mirror)
d2 – d1 = 10 cm (distance in which the image oscillates)
Page # 385
•
30 cm
668.
40 cm
Plane
mirror
v0 = – 4 m/s  -ve
vi/m = – µv0
vi/m = + 4/3 × 4
vi/m = + 16 / 3
vi / m
vi/G =

 16 / 3
vi/G = =4
4/3
vi/0 = 4 – (– 4) = 8 m/s
669. u = – 24
uf
v= u  f
 24  15 124  15
v =  24  15 = = 40
8
 D = 200 – 24 – 40 = 136 cm
RI v 40
= =
 0.03 u  24
40
RI = × 0.03 = 0.05 mm
24
 d = 0.05 × 2 + 0.06 = 0.16 × 10–3 m
D 6000  10 10  136  10 2

= =
d 0 .16  10 3
 = 51 × 10–4m = 5.1 mm
1 1 1 1  df  df1 df 2 df 32
    2  2  2
670. F f1 f 2 f 3  F2 f1 f2 f2
 1 2 3
  
F f1 f 2 f 3
 0.066 0.055 0.040
for achromatism  = 0    0
22 11 f
40
–3–5+ =0
f
f = 5 cm Ans.
Page # 386
2mm 20 30 h1
671. 50
S'
0.1 50
h1 = 50  h1 = 1mm
L  h1 80
=  L + h1 = 4 mm  L = 3 mm
0 .1 20
D 5 107 1
B= = = 2.5 × 10–4 m
d 2 103
L 3 103 300
N= =  4 = = 12
B 2.5 10 25
672. The path difference at point P,

x = (SS2 – SS1) + (S2P – S1P)
dy d (d 2)
= D  D
1 2
For constructive interference,
dy d2
x =  = n
D1 2D 2
(10 3 )(0.5 sin  t )  10 3 (10 3 ) 2

 = n
1 2 2

(0.5 sin   t) × 10– 6 + 0.25 × 10– 6
6
= (5000 × 10–10)n = 0.5 × 10– 6n
 0.5n  0.25
sin   t =
6 0 .5
For the minimum value of t, n = 1.
 1  
sin   t =    t = or t = 1 sec.
6 2 6 6
Page # 387
 1
673.  2tµ =  n    (for destructive interference)
 2
(0)
 1 n=1.58
 2tµ =  n   
 2 n=1.56 t=1.25µm
 1 (0)
 2t(1.56) =  n    n=1.52
 2
 1
 2 × 0.25 × 10–6 × 1.56 =  n   
 2
 1
  n    = 7.8 × 10–7 = 780 nm
 2
780
=
1
n
2
n = 0,  = 1560 nm
1560
n = 1,  = = 520 nm
3
2
n = 2,  = 780 × = 312 nm (not possible)
5
674. Reflected ray from upper surface would shift by /2 only while reflected from lower surface would not
have any shift.
2µt = n11 = n22  (n1 = n2 + 1)
as there is no minima in between these two wavelengths
(n + 1) (512) = (n) (640)
n2(640 – 512) = 512
n2 = 4
So 2 × 1.28 t = (4) (640)
4  640
t= = 1000 nm = 1µm
2  1.28
675. Reflected ray from upper surface would shift by /2 only while reflected from lower surface would not
have any shift.
2µt = n11 = n22  (n1 = n2 + 1)
as there is no minima in between these two wavelengths
(n + 1) (512) = (n) (640)
n2(640 – 512) = 512
n2 = 4
So 2 × 1.28 t = (4) (640)
4  640
t= = 1000 nm = 1µm
2  1.28
Page # 388
676. d = x
n
x= = condition of dark fringe
2 d

x
n = 0, first dark fringe at join of plates
n = 4, fifth dark fringe at fiber

x
4
d = x = = 2
2
d = 2 × 550 nm  1100 nm
677. Heat produced by friction

in i sec = mg (v× 1)
= 0.5 (100+900) (10) (20 × 1)
H = 100.000 J/s
T – 50
H
5 10 – 2  T = 100°C
100 1
Ml 2 Ml 2 (1  T )'
678. 
3 3
' =  (1– 2T)
  '
 100  2T 100
3
 2  2 104 10  4 101 = 0004 Ans
679. P = = ( 500 × 5 × 10–2) × 10
dT
P = ms
dt
dT –2
= 500  5 10 10 = 5 × 10–2
dt
x × 10–4 = 5 × 10–2 = 500 Ans.
dN
680. P = 700 × 103 × 1.6 × 10–19 × = 10 × 10–3
dt
dN 102 1 1012
=  = =  N0
dt 1014 7 16 11.2
ln 2 14  86400 1012
= N0 = = 154 × 1015
14  86400 11.2 ln 2
Page # 389
681. A B
t=0 N0 N0
t0 = 3 days 2N N
2N = N0 (0.5) t0/1
N = N0 (0.5)t0/2
1 1 
2 = (0.5) t0     
 1 2
3 
 0.5–1 = (0.5)    2 
 1 
3
 –1 = –2  1 = 3 days
1
1
682. Energy available = µ v 2. = Q value.
2 rel
1 7 1
= × × vrel2 = Q value.
2 7 1
1 8
 × vrel2 = Q ×
2 7
8
Ki = 1645 × = 1880 keV
7
683. Evaporations and reaction has rate similar to first order reaction rate
Hence
1 1 1 1
    6 hrs
t1 / 2 t1/ 2 evoparatio n t1/ 2 suction t1 / 2
16
Hence water left =  1kg
24
dQ dN
684. P=  (eV)
dt dt
dN P 3136
  19
dt eV (1.6  10 )(40 103 )(0.98)
= 5 × 1017
hc
685. th = eV
a
1 1 1 
 K = R(z – 1)2  2  2 
1 2 
13   th 
(K – th) =   K  
10  2 
3  13 1 
 =    th
10 K  10 2 
Page # 390
3  4  10 7   8  12.4  10 7 5000
   = (z – 1)2
10  3(z 7 ) 2  =  10  15.5 103 8
625 = (z – 1)2  z = 26
h 6.6 1034
686. p= = = 1.32 × 10–24
 5 1010
p2
E= = qV
2m
(1.32 1024 l) 2
= =V
2  9 1031 1.6 1019
1.32 1.32 1048 132  132 121
= = = = 6.05 V ~ 6V
18 1.60 1050 18  160 20
687. Radiation T4
So T2 = 2T1 and By wein's displacement law
1

T
1
So 2 = = 3000 Å
2
By Einstein's photo electric equation
hc
= eVs + 

hc hc  1 1 
f= – eVs = – (13.6 eV)12  2  2  = 4.00 – 2.55
 3100 Å 2 4 
 = 1.45 eV
  
= 1.45 =   or  = 145 Ans.
 100 
hc
688. K2max = – 1 – ev0 = 1

hc
K1max = 2 + ev0 = 3

2hc
(1 + 2) = 4

2  1240
=
4  2 .2
 = 400 nm
dN P0   6.63  10 6  300  10 9
689. = ×  = 0.1 × = 1012 sec–1
dt hC 6.63  10 34  3  108
E = h (f – fT)
5
P= × E × 1012 = 221 × 10–9 W
6

Master Problem Package Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Master Problem Package Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Master Problem Package Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page # 67

STRAIGHT OBJECTIVE TYPE

(A) (P/N) (2 + 45/100) mm (B) (N/P) (2+45/N)mm

Which reading is correct ?

(A) v (B) 2 v 3 (C) 3v 4 (D) none

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) 480 m (B) 720 m (C) 360 m (D) none

Q.18 In the arrangement shown in figure. The ratio of velocity V1 & V2

(A) gl (B) 2gl (C) 2 gl (D) 3gl

(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 1

(A) it is moving at a constant speed (B) it is speeding up

(A) W /(  6 ) (B) W /(  12 ) (C) W /(  10 ) (D) None of these

(A) 1s (B) 2s (C) 4s (D) 8s

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) 40 3 m (B) 20 3 m (C) 10 3 m (D) 60 3 m

(A) 0.5 m (B) 1m (C) zero (D) 2/3 m

(A) F/K (B) 2F/K (C) F/2K (D) 4F/K

(A) 1/3 (B) 1 3 (C) 1/2 (D) 1

(A) Regular fruit juice (B) Frozen fruit juice

(A) 6g/13 (B) g/4 (C) 3g/8 (D) None

(A) u = vcos, upward (B) u = v, downwards

(A) V/(4R) (B) V/(3R) (C) 2V/(3R) (D) 3V/(4R)

(A) 3 × 107 N (B) 4 × 107 N (C) 2 × 107 N (D) 5 × 107 N

(A) x(m) (B) x(m)

(C) x(m) (D) x(m)

(A) 100 N (B) 150 N (C) 200 N (D) 250 N

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these

(A) A and – 4520 J (B) A and – 460 J

(C) A and – 4520 J (C) A and – 460 J

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) L/8 (B) L/4 (C) L/6 (D) L/5

(A) 2a2c/b (B) 3a/2b2c (C) 2ac/b2 (D) 3c/2ab2

(A) Q ball (B) P ball

(A) (+P0V0/2) (B) (–5P0V0/2) (C) (–3P0V0/2) (D) 0

17r0 r0 17r0 r0

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) R/60 + E (B) R/120 – E (C) –R/60 + E (D) R/240 + E

(A) L is positive and M is negative (B) both spheres are positive

(A) Opposite direction. (B) Same direction.

(A) (1, 1, 0) (B) ( 2 , 1, 0) (C) (1, 2 , 0) (D) (1, 0, 0)

(W) (X) (Y) (Z)

(I) (II) (III) (IV)

(A) W – II; X – I; Y – III; Z – IV (B) W – III; X – I; Y – II; Z – IV

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) zero (B) 13 (C) 17 (D) 27

(A) C > A = B (B) C < A = B (C) C = A > B (D) C = A < B

(A) 5  (B) 4  (C) 3  (D) 1 

Q.164 Which of the following quantities can be written in SI units in Kgm2A–2s–3?

(A) 0.38 mA (B) 0.84 mA (C) 0.72 mA (D) 0.1 mA

(A) R1 = R2, L1 > L2 (B) R1 > R2, L1 = L2

(A) 90º (B) zero (C) 53º (D) 37º

(A) 0.4 A (B) 0.2 A (C) 1.0 A (D) 1.4 A

(A) 1° clockwise (B) 1° anticlockwise (C) 2° clockwise (D) 2° anticlockwise

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) 45º (B) 35º (C) 20º (D) 10º

(A) IQ (B) IR (C) IS (D) IU

(A) 6, 5 (B) 5, 6 (C) 4, 3 (D) 3, 4

Q.197 Correct acceleration-time graph representing the motion of car is :

Paragraph for question no. 198 to 200